JP2020014783A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a "non-ready-to-win (long)" performance mode is selected and "five seconds" are selected as extension time for a "slump state" in a slump performance table, the total performance time becomes "20 seconds" and "20000" is set to a value of a slump performance timer. As a "slump performance" corresponding to the slump performance timer, a first "fake pseudo continuation 1" performance is set to a "first performance", and a second "false pseudo continuation 2" is set to a "second performance".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (variable effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a predetermined value is obtained. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with the number being the upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that may cause a jackpot appears as a part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. There is an effect that performs a new effect as to whether or not a specific display result appears while performing a pseudo effect as if it were performed (so-called “pseudo-serial” effect) (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-134027

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and it is not possible to create unexpectedness in the effect content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 makes a determination based on acquisition means for acquiring lottery information triggered by establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Determining means; selecting means for selecting an execution time of dynamic display of identification information performed on the display means based on a result of the determination by the determining means; and displaying the information based on the execution time selected by the selecting means. Means for executing the dynamic display in the means, wherein when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined An execution determining means for assigning a game value, wherein it is possible to determine whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining means. In this case, when the execution determining means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the display means replaces the dynamic display with a time longer than the execution time selected by the selecting means. Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the specific effect execution means is configured to select a predetermined extended time when the specific effect is executed; Total time execution means for executing the specific effect during a total time of the extension time selected by the selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the dynamic display executing means determines whether the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display or the specific identification information. And a determination effect execution means for executing a determination effect of whether or not non-specific identification information different from the appearing, the specific effect execution means, in the specific effect, of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A plurality of execution units for executing a greater number of the determination effects.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, acquisition means for acquiring lottery information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, determining means for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, Selecting means for selecting the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display means based on the determination result by the determining means; and the dynamic means in the display means based on the execution time selected by the selecting means. Dynamic display executing means for executing display, and when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Execution determination means capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means, and when the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means, When the line determination unit determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the display unit executes a specific effect instead of the dynamic display for a time longer than the execution time selected by the selection unit. Effect execution means. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect execution means, when the specific effect is executed, an extension time selection means for selecting a predetermined extension time, the extension time selected by the extension time selection means, and a selection by the selection means Total time execution means for executing the specific effect during a total time with the execution time. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display executing means determines whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Effect execution means, wherein the specific effect execution means includes a plurality of execution means for executing, in the specific effect, a greater number of the determination effects than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. . Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a typical sectional view in the front view of an alternate distribution unit and a holding device. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternate distribution unit and the holding device taken along the line AA of FIG. 4 in a side view, and (a) is a diagram illustrating a state where a ball is held in the holding device; In b), when the holding device solenoid is driven from the state of (a), the holding state of the ball held in the holding device is released, and the ball flows down from the board return opening to the dummy winning opening. It is a figure showing the state, and (c) shows the state where the tip of the holding device opening / closing plate is tilted from the state of (b) toward the passage side of the sorting ball inlet so that the ball can be received into the holding device. (D) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet from the state of (c) is guided into the holding device by the holding device opening / closing body. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of reservations typically. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an A table of a stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a B table of a stop pattern table, and (c) is a diagram. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a C table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a D table of a stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an E table of a stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for a loss typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for big hits typically. It is a figure showing an example of an effect time of each effect element of a variable effect or “slump effect” executed in each game situation. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between a fluctuation time and an extension time, and "slump effect", (a) shows "slump effect" at the time of a loss, and (b) is a timing chart showing reach time. It shows "slump effect". FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of an audio lamp control device and a display control device. It is the figure which showed an example of the suspension change table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the hold display information storage area. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the slump effect storage area. It is the figure which showed an example of the slump production table typically. (A) is based on the starting winning prize in the “slump state”, and when the fluctuation effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect and the production time of the “slump effect” FIG. 9B is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the fluctuation time of the variable production and the production time of the “Slump production” when the fluctuation production of various reach is acquired based on the winning start in the “slump state”. It is a timing chart shown. (A) shows the fluctuation time of the variable effect and the “slump effect” when the variable effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired based on the winning start during the “slump effect” other than the extended time. (B) is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of various fluctuations in the case where fluctuation effects of various reach are acquired based on the winning start during the “slump effect” other than the extension time. It is a timing chart showing the effect time of "Slump effect". (A) shows the variation time of the variable effect and the “slump effect” when the variable effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired based on the winning start during the “slump effect” based on the extended time. FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing the effect time of the variable effect, and FIG. 10B shows the fluctuation time of the variable effect when the variable effect of various reach is acquired based on the winning start during the “slump effect” based on the extended time. It is a timing chart showing the effect time of "Slump effect". It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the hold information storage area and the execution information storage area. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the holding | maintenance apparatus control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a dummy winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing a symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the confirmation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” is being executed in “slump effect” in the third symbol display device, and a state immediately before a chance-eye development symbol appears. (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the gaseline pattern is stopped in the effect element of “pseudo-change” in “pseudo-sequence 1” from the state of (a), and FIG. ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the holding symbol has been shifted from the state of FIG. 2 and the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” that is “Gase pseudo-run 2” has been executed, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the gassed eyes design stopped in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" in "pseudo ream 2", and (e) shows that the reserved pattern shifted from the state of (d) to "pseudo ream 3". "High-speed fluctuation" is a state where the effect element was executed (F) shows a state in which the gaseline pattern is stopped in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" in "pseudo-sequence 3" from the state of (e), and a series of "slump effect" ends. FIG. (A) is a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” or the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is executed in the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” in the third symbol display device, FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a state immediately before a chance eye development symbol appears, and FIG. 10B shows a state in which the first chance eye symbol appears in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” from the state of FIG. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” in which all symbols fluctuate again from the state of (b) is executed, and (d) is a diagram showing (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” is executed from the state of (c). FIG. The figure showing the state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” in which the symbol fluctuates is being executed. Ri, (f) are diagrams reach formed symbol in effect element showing a state just before being emerges of "pseudo variation" from the state of (e). (A) is a diagram showing a state in which “first development feasibility effect” is executed in “slump effect” in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing “second slender effect effect” from the state of (a). It is a figure showing the state where “the development possibility production” was executed, and (c) is a diagram showing the state where the “third development possibility production” was executed from the state of (b). (A) is a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is being executed in the “slump effect” on the third symbol display device, and shows a state immediately before a chance-eye development symbol appears. (B) is a diagram showing a state of whether or not the chance symbol design stops in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram showing (b) It is a figure showing a state in which the gassed eye pattern appeared in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” from the state of (c), and (d) is the end of the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” from the state of (c). It is the figure which showed the state which indicated that the variable production was ended by appearance of the gassess eye pattern, and (e) is the state where "the 3rd development possibility production" is performed from the state of (d). (F) shows the “third development possibility effect” from the state of (e). Is a diagram showing a state in which chance first pattern developed successful was revealing. (A) shows a state in which the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” is being executed in “slump effect” in the third symbol display device, and a state in which the chance-eye development symbol is stopped in the main display area. (B) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance symbol pattern has appeared in the effect element of “pseudo variation” from the state of (a), and (c) is a figure again showing the state of (b). FIG. 9D is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of “pseudo-change” is being executed after all the symbols have changed, and a state immediately before a reach forming symbol appears, and FIG. FIG. 10E is a diagram showing a state in which the reach forming symbol has appeared from the state, the sub display area and the cockpit display area have been erased and the reach forming symbol has been enlarged, and FIG. The directing element of "Which reach" is being executed Is a diagram showing a state, (f) is a view showing a state in which emerges the "big hit" symbol from the state of (e).

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning ports (ball entry ports) 63, 65a, 77a, 78a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) for launching a ball in the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as “variable effect”). Also used as

  In addition, the fluctuation effect is an effect displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 has a specific winning opening ( For example, it is executed when the player wins a left special figure winning opening 77a or a right special figure winning opening 78a described later (see FIGS. 3 and 4), and the symbol (third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time. Thereafter, an effect of presenting to the player the result of the lottery performed for the winning (whether or not it is a big hit) by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed.

  Further, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) to be described later have uniformity. There are three stages, “stage” and “island stage”. The various effects such as the above-described variable effects and “reach display” executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

  The “reach display” refers to a display one step before the “big hit display” indicating that a big hit occurs in a variable effect executed in a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. . Specifically, a third symbol of a left symbol row Z1 and a right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6) described later stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) continues to change without stopping. It means the state that it is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “reach display” is roughly divided into one unit element constituting an effect of “normal reach” (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as “effect element”), It is developed and executed from the production element of "normal reach", the production element of "super reach" having a higher jackpot expectation than the production element of "normal reach" is developed and executed from the production element of "normal reach", The effect of "Special Reach", which has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect of "Super Reach", and the effect of "Pseudo-Variation" or the effect of "Developability", which will be described later. Reach ”production elements are provided.

  The change of the stage may be performed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demonstration display) or during a “high-speed fluctuation” effect element in which the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed invisibly to the player in the fluctuation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, every time the frame button 22 is operated, the state is repeatedly changed in the order of “in-town stage” → “sky stage” → “island stage” → “in-town stage” →. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  Also, when the effect element of “normal reach” is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the effect element of “normal reach” is changed to the effect element of “super reach” or When evolving to the effect element of “special reach”, the selection screen of the effect element of “super reach” or the effect element of “special reach” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the effect elements of “normal reach”. It may be configured as follows.

  Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as a rendering element of “super reach” or a rendering element of “special reach” are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. When the player performs a pressing operation, the selected candidate is changed. Then, based on the production candidate selected when developing to the production element of “super reach” or the production element of “special reach”, the production element of “super reach” or the production element of “special reach” is determined. According to the determination, the effect element of “super reach” is executed on the third symbol display device 81 as the effect element of “special reach”.

  In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button that is pressed down. However, instead of the frame button 22, a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, It may be constituted by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect element of “super reach” or the effect element of “special reach” may be determined.

  Further, the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper plate 17 in a side view, but the arrangement position of the frame button 22 may be any arrangement position as long as the player can perform a pressing operation. For example, it may be disposed on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17 or may be disposed near the lower plate 50 (upper surface or side surface) described later.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emission mode by lighting or flashing according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined "reach display", and the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illumination parts 29 to 33 in which light emitting means such as light emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes; hereinafter, abbreviated as "LEDs") are incorporated. .

  In the pachinko machine 10, the illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or “reach display” or the like, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 is turned on or blinked by a built-in LED. Lights or flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that "reach display" is being performed one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred, is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene), which is chromium-plated in the area around the illuminated parts 29 to 33, in order to bring out more gorgeousness, is abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is regenerated according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

  In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of a push button, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 by changing the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting is built in.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. Each control board includes a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit; hereinafter, abbreviated as “MPU”) as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, ports for communicating with various devices, and various lotteries. A random number generator used for clocking, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and the like are mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 and a detailed configuration of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of ball guides, windmills, rails 61, 62, and a ball win on a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. , A variable winning device 65 that is opened when a third symbol jackpot occurs, a left special figure winning opening 77a and a right special feature that are used as a chance to draw a third symbol by lottery. An alternate sorting unit 71 having a drawing winning opening 78a and a later-described holding device 73 (see FIGS. 4 and 5), a second ball opening 67 serving as a chance to draw a second symbol, a third symbol display device 81, The variable display device unit 80 and the like having the second symbol display device 83 and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

  The general winning opening 63, the variable winning device 65, the alternate sorting unit 71, the second ball opening 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. From the front side with wood screws. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 3) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 3), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 in a front view is referred to as "right-handed". The act of causing the launched ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view is referred to as “left-handed”. In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, a configuration is such that a ball can enter the alternate allocation unit 71, but does not easily enter the second entrance 67 and the variable winning device 65. . Further, in a right-handed game, the ball can enter the second entrance 67 and the variable winning device 65, but the ball does not easily enter the alternate distribution unit 71. The specific configuration of this alternate distribution unit 71 will be described later.

  A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a as light emitting means and a seven-segment display 37b is provided in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 3). The first symbol display device 37 is a variable display of the first symbol according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). Is displayed, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a are reserved balls that are the number of balls (reserved balls) for which dynamic display has not been executed among the balls that have won (entered) the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the LED 37a corresponding to the state. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emission colors. .

  The 7-segment display 37b includes two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right, and performs dynamic display indicating the determination result of the first symbol. Specifically, the two 7-segment LEDs have a variable time (dynamic) determined based on a prize in the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a provided in the alternating distribution unit 71 described later. After the dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the center segment of the 7-segment LED is blinked alternately) until the elapse of the target display time, the display is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is a loss, a symbol “−” is displayed in which only the central one segment is lit and displayed. If the determination result is a big hit, “3” and “7” corresponding to the big hit are displayed. Is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a ball hits the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a as a big hit (big hit lottery). The jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, “15R probable jackpot”, “15R regular jackpot” or “2R probable jackpot” is prepared.

  Here, the “15R probability-change jackpot” is a probability-change jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “probability changing state” after 15 rounds of jackpots. In the first embodiment, when the “15R probability change big hit” is won, the same odd-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81.

  The “2R probable jackpot” is a probable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “probability changing state” after two rounds of jackpots. In the first embodiment, when a “2R probable big hit” is won, a predetermined combination of third symbols (for example, “341”) is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The “15R normal jackpot” is a state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “time reduction state” after the 15 rounds of the jackpot and changes to the “time reduction state” during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). That is. In the first embodiment, when the “15R normal jackpot” is won, the same even symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the “probability change state” refers to a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a so-called probable change state, in other words, a state of the game that is easily shifted to the special game state. That is. In the high-probability state (probable change state, probable change state) in the first embodiment, the hit probability of a later-described second symbol change display (hereinafter, the second symbol change display is referred to as “variable display”) is increased, and the later-described change probability is increased. The electric accessory 79 provided on the right side of the alternate sorting unit 71 is easily opened, and as a result, a ball is easily thrown into the right special figure winning opening 78a in the alternate sorting unit 71. Including state.

  On the other hand, the “normal gaming state” refers to a low probability state that is not a “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a larger jackpot probability than in the “probability fluctuation state”. Is low. The “time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)” means that the big hit probability is a low probability state like the “normal game state”, and only the hit probability of the variable display of the second symbol is increased. Similar to the “probability change state”, it means a game state in which a later-described electric accessory 79 is opened and a ball easily enters the right special figure winning opening 78a.

  In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the variable display of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory 79 attached to the right special figure winning opening 78a is opened, or the time of one hit The number of times the electric accessory 79 is opened may be changed. Specifically, in the “time reduction state”, the time during which the electric accessory 79 associated with the right special figure winning opening 78a is opened is made longer than in the case other than the “time reduction state”, The number of times that the accessory 79 is opened may be made larger than the case other than the “time reduction state”. Further, in the “time shortened state”, at least two of the increase in the winning probability of the variable display of the second symbol, the increase in the opening time of the electric accessory 79, and the increase in the number of times of opening the electric accessory 79, are provided. May be performed simultaneously.

  At the center lower part of the game area, there is provided an alternate sorting unit 71 into which a ball flowing down the game area can enter. The alternate sorting unit 71 mainly includes a sorting ball opening 72 into which a ball flowing down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view in the game area (that is, a ball in a left-handed game) can be entered, A holding device 73 (see FIG. 4) in which the ball that has entered the sorting ball inlet 72 (see FIG. 4) enters and is held, and a board return in which the ball held by the holding device 73 is discharged. An opening 74, a dummy winning opening 75 into which the ball ejected from the board return opening 74 can flow, and a ball which has entered the sorting ball opening 72 and has not entered the holding device 73. A sorting device 76 (see FIG. 4) for alternately sorting to the left route 77 or the right route 78 (both shown in FIG. 4) in the unit 71, and a ball sorted to the left route 77 by the sorting device 76 can enter. To the right route 78 by the special left special drawing winning port 77a and the sorting device 76. The right special symbol winning opening 78a capable ball entrance is spheres kicked, the electric won game 79 described above, is constituted by.

  When a ball wins the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a provided in the alternating distribution unit 71, a special figure winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the special figure winning opening switch is turned on, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) performs a jackpot lottery of the first symbol, and the dynamic display of the first symbol according to the lottery result is the first symbol. As shown by the 7-segment display 37b of the display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation effect of the third symbol. The left special figure prize port 77a and the right special figure prize port 78a are each one of the prize ports in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 of the first embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 when viewed from the front. In FIG. 4, for convenience of explanation, the configuration is such that the components on the near side in the front view of the alternate sorting unit 71 and the holding device 73 are excluded, and a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the alternate sorting unit 71 and the holding device 73. The alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 are represented in a schematic cross-sectional view, and each member (part) constituting them will be described.

  As described above, the alternate sorting unit 71 includes a holding device 73 that holds the ball that has entered the sorting ball inlet 72, and a sorting device that can sort the ball that has flowed down without being held in the holding device 73. A device 76 is provided. The ball held in the holding device 73 is configured to be able to enter the dummy winning opening 75, and the ball sorted by the sorting device 76 is allowed to enter the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a. It is configured.

  The sorting ball inlet 72 of the alternate sorting unit 71 is a path through which a ball shot leftward and flowing down the game area can pass when flowing into the alternating sorting unit 71. The ball that has flowed into the mouth 72 is configured to be guided to the holding device 73 or the sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side (the lower direction of the alternate sorting unit 71). In addition, it is configured such that a ball fired right and passed through the game area does not flow into the distribution ball entrance 72.

  The retaining device 73 is a device for retaining (reserving) only one ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet 72, and is located downstream of the sorting ball inlet 72 and upstream of the sorting device 76. It is located in. The ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet 72 is configured to be held by the holding device 73 before reaching the sorting device 76 when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, When the ball is held in the holding device 73, the ball passes through the front side of the holding device 73, flows down to the distribution device 76, and is separated by the distribution device 76. The ball retained in the retaining device 73 is discharged from the retaining device 73 when the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when the “slump effect” is executed), flows out of the board return port 74, and And flows into (wins) a dummy winning opening 75 provided immediately below the board return opening 74.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 controls the third symbol display device 81 so that the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the variation effect of the third symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “slump”). The left special figure winning opening 77a or the first time from the state where the variable effect is not performed (in the first embodiment, after "5 seconds" or more after the stop of the variable effect. This state is hereinafter referred to as "slump state"). When the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is executed based on the winning in the right special figure prize port 78a, an effect of a longer time (period) than the execution time of the obtained fluctuation effect, and the obtained fluctuation effect. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute an effect element (hereinafter, referred to as a “slump effect”) whose number of times of execution is greater than the number of times of execution. With such a configuration, by increasing the number of effects while increasing the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81, the situation in which no effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 is reduced, The player can be prevented from getting up.

  In this case, the number of times the fluctuation effect is performed more than the number of times of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the acquired start winning (hereinafter referred to as “slump effect”, and the fluctuation stop (pseudo stop) from the start of the change of the third symbol ) May be referred to as an “effect unit”), in order to execute the “slump effect” of the effect unit, the number of the effect units of the “slump effect” It is necessary to display a dummy hold display in a cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, to give the player an illusion that a fluctuation effect is being executed. Therefore, in order to create the above-described situation, the ball that has been held in the holding device 73 at the timing before the execution of the “slump effect” is replaced with an alternate distribution unit having a left special figure winning opening 77a and a right special figure winning opening 78a. The dummy winning opening 75 provided in 71 is awarded, and based on the winning, the dummy pending display is displayed as an actual floating effect pending display (hereinafter, the actual floating effect pending display may be referred to as “main pending display”. Is displayed in the cockpit display area Db. Then, when the “slump effect” that is additionally executed is performed, the dummy hold display is digested, so that the player can be given an illusion as if the variable effect is being executed.

  It should be noted that a method of executing a plurality of effects in a variable effect corresponding to one main hold display, such as an effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” described later, is also conceivable. In that case, from a player accustomed to the game, When looking at the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" executed when this hold display is small, it is inferred that "only the time of the fluctuation effect is prolonged forcibly", and rather the factors that make the game more exciting Has become. Therefore, by executing the “Slump effect” with the appearance and digestion of the dummy hold display as in the first embodiment, by executing an effect as if the variable effect is being executed, it is possible to simply perform the fluctuation operation. This makes it difficult for the player to guess that the production time is being lengthened, and prevents the player from getting up.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, a description will be given of an operation mode of the holding device 73 and a behavior of the ball when the ball flows into, holds (reserves), and is discharged from the holding device 73. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 along the line AA in FIG. 4 when viewed from the side. FIG. 5A shows a ball held in the holding device 73. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a state. FIG. 5B shows a state in which the ball held in the holding device 73 is changed from the state of FIG. FIG. 5C is a view showing a state where the ejected ball is discharged and flows down to the dummy winning opening 75. FIG. 5C shows a state in which the leading end portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a moves from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 5D is a view showing a state in which the ball can be received into the holding device 73 by tilting to the side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10), and FIG. The figure which showed the state where the ball which flowed into the mouth 72 was guided into the holding device 73 by the holding device opening / closing plate 73a. A. When the state shown in FIG. 5D is reached, the state again transitions to the state shown in FIG. 5A, so that the state shown in FIGS. 5A to 5D is configured to loop. .

  First, as shown in FIG. 5A, the holding device 73 mainly includes a holding device opening / closing plate 73a, a holding ball holding portion 73b, a rotating shaft portion 73c, a rear wall 73d, a lock piece 73e, It is composed of a holding device solenoid 73f and a holding ball detection switch 73g. Hereinafter, each of the above configurations will be described with reference to the movement of each configuration shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (d).

  The holding device opening / closing plate 73a, the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the rotating shaft portion 73c are integrally formed so that the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b are perpendicular to each other in an L shape. The rotating shaft 73c is formed at a connection portion (at an L-shaped corner) between the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b. The holding shaft 73c and the holding ball holding portion 73b are configured to be rotatable in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the rotating shaft 73c.

  FIG. 5A shows a state in which one ball is held in the holding device 73. In this state, the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state (that is, off), and both the holding portion locking portion 73e1 and the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 provided on the lock piece 73e connected to the holding device solenoid 73f are located rearward. A state in which the lock piece 73e (the holding part lock part 73e1 and the opening and closing plate pushing part 73e2) protrudes from the rear wall 73d is referred to as an "initial position". In the state where the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, the movement of the lock piece 73e is restricted by the holding device solenoid 73f.

  The retaining ball holding portion 73b is a portion for storing the ball in the retaining device 73 when the ball flows into the retaining device 73. When a ball flows into the holding device 73 in a state where the tip side of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is inclined toward the passage of the sorting ball opening 72 (that is, the holding device 73 is open), the holding device 73 holds the ball. When the device solenoid 73f is not driven and the holding portion lock 73e1 is at the initial position, the ball is held on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the holding state is maintained by the holding device solenoid 73f.

  Specifically, when a ball is placed on the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding ball holding portion 73b rotates by its own weight, and then the lower surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b locks the holding portion of the lock piece 73e. The holding portion lock portion 73e1 restricts the downward rotation of the retaining ball holding portion 73b by contacting the upper surface of the portion 73e1. That is, the holding ball holding portion 73b is pressed downward by its own weight of the ball placed on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b in a state where the downward rotation is restricted by the holding portion lock portion 73e1, The holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state, and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a formed integrally with the holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in an upright state. As a result, the state where the ball is stored in the space formed by the holding device opening / closing plate 73a, the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained. At the same time, the standing state of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is maintained, and the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet 72 flows into the sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side.

  At this time, it is detected by the holding ball detection switch 73g disposed in the holding device 73 that a ball is held in the holding device 73. The holding ball detection switch 73g detects the presence of a sphere between the light receiving element and the light emitting element when the light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown) are cut off by the ball. A main control, which will be described later, is constituted by an optical detection switch that detects the absence of a sphere between the light receiving element and the light emitting element by not blocking the light receiving element, and is electrically connected to the holding ball detection switch 73g. The detection information of the retained ball detection switch 73g is output to the device 110. Note that the retaining ball detection switch 73g is not limited to an optical type, and other well-known sensors such as a microswitch can be used.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is shipped from a factory in a state where one ball is suspended at the stage of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10. The lock piece 73e is configured such that when the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state (ie, off), the holding portion locking portion 73e1 is located at a position that restricts the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b. ing. Further, even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned sideways or upside down, the ball is held by the retaining ball holding portion 73b by the lock piece 73e. With this configuration, the state where the ball is retained in the retaining device 73 is maintained from the time of shipment from the factory to the time of installation of the hall, regardless of the orientation of the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is transported. can do. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the hall, the first ball that has entered the alternate sorting unit 71 is not retained in the retaining device 73, but is won in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a. Can be done. Therefore, when a game is played for the first time with the pachinko machine 10, when a ball is flown into the alternate distribution unit 71, it is possible to make the player surely receive the lottery of the third symbol (the first symbol). .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5B, six seconds have elapsed since the first effect unit (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect”) in the “slump effect” in the first embodiment was executed. When the elapsed time), the holding device solenoid 73f is excited (that is, turned on) for a predetermined time (in the first embodiment, "2000 ms"), the lock piece 73e moves to the holding device solenoid 73f, and the holding portion locking portion 73e1 and the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 are both immersed in the rear wall 73d. As described above, when the holding device solenoid 73f is excited, the holding portion lock portion 73e1, which has restricted the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b, enters into the rear wall 73d, and the holding ball is held. The holding portion 73b rotates downward due to the weight of the ball. Then, the ball held in the holding ball holding portion 73b flows downward, is discharged from the board return port 74 to the front side of the gaming board 13, and flows into the dummy winning port 75 as it is. That is, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured to win the dummy winning opening 75 by exciting (driving) the holding device solenoid 73f.

  With such a configuration, the ball held in the holding device 73 can be reliably won in the dummy winning opening 75, and the player who does not understand the details of the dummy winning opening 75 can receive the left special figure winning. By the ball winning in the dummy winning opening 75 arranged between the mouth 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a, it can be illusioned that the starting winning of the third symbol (first symbol) has been obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the holding device solenoid 73f changes from the excited state to the non-excited state, both the holding portion lock portion 73e1 of the lock piece 73e and the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 are moved from the rear wall 73d. It will be in the state of protruding again. At this time, the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e collides with the tip of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a, and the force of the collision causes the holding device opening / closing plate 73a to move toward the front passage wall 72a of the sorting ball opening 72. It is turned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 5D, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a that has collided with the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 in the state of FIG. Collides with the front end wall (the inclined surface at the end) of the front passage wall 72a and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a. Since the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is configured to be heavier than the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the sorting / unloading) due to the weight of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a. The state of being inclined toward the front passage wall 72a of the ball opening 72 is maintained. Therefore, when no ball is placed on the retaining ball holding portion 73b, the inclined state of the retaining device opening / closing plate 73a is maintained, and the ball flowing into the sorting ball inlet 72 can be received in the retaining device 73. (Hereinafter, may be referred to as “acceptable state”).

  Here, the tip portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is formed so as to have a sharp inclined surface, and when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is inclined toward the front passage wall 72a, the inclined surface is shaken. It is configured to make surface contact with the front passage wall 72a of the entrance ball opening 72. With this configuration, when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a can be further tilted toward the front passage wall 72a side of the sorting ball opening 72, and the sorting ball opening 72 can be tilted. Can be reliably guided into the holding device 73.

  Further, the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball opening 72 is unlikely to collide with the upper surface of the tip of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a (the portion that contacts the wall surface of the sorting ball opening 72), and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a Of the ball on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., the upper surface on the right side of the tilted holding device opening / closing plate 73a), the impact of the ball's own weight can be received by the inclined surface, The impact when the ball collides with the holding device opening / closing plate 73a can be reduced to prevent the holding device opening / closing plate 73a from being damaged.

  Then, when a ball flows into the sorting ball inlet 72 in a state where the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is in a receivable state, the ball collides with the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and flows down to the holding device 73 side. . Then, the ball collides with the upper surface of the retaining ball holding portion 73b, and the retaining ball holding portion 73b is rotated downward about the rotation shaft portion 73c by the weight of the ball. At this time, since the holding device solenoid 73f is in the non-excited state and the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, the lower surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b and the upper surface of the holding portion locking portion 73e1 abut, and the holding portion locking portion 73e1 This restricts the downward rotation of the retaining ball holding portion 73b. When the ball placed on the upper surface of the retaining ball holding portion 73b is pressed downward by its own weight, the retaining ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state, and is formed integrally with the retaining ball holding portion 73b. The standing state of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is also maintained. As a result, the state where the ball is stored in the space formed by the upper surface of the retaining ball holding portion 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening / closing plate pushing portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained (FIG. 5A). reference).

  In this way, the holding device 73 holds only one ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet 72 and holds the predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, when the “slump effect” is executed). Then, the held ball is discharged from the holding device 73 to make the dummy winning opening 75 win. Then, based on the winning, a dummy hold display is displayed in the same display as the main hold display, and n (where n is a natural number in a “slump effect”) a second effect unit in the “slump effect” additionally executed. ) The effect unit to be performed is referred to as an “n-th effect” (at the start of the execution of the effect element 1; however, the “simulated consecutive” effect and the “developability” effect are excluded). By digesting the display, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the variable effect is being executed.

  In a state where the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted (that is, in a receivable state), when a plurality of balls continuously flow into the sorting ball inlet 72 and flow into the holding device 73, first, Alternatively, a discharge path may be provided to hold only one ball and discharge the subsequent balls. With such a configuration, only one ball can be always held in the holding device 73, and one ball can be made to flow into the dummy winning opening 75 at the time of the "slump effect". Inconsistencies can be prevented.

  Further, the members constituting the alternate distribution unit 71 may be formed of a transparent or translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin or the like), and the members constituting the holding device 73 may be formed of a transparent or translucent material. . With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the flow-down state of the ball that has flowed into the alternate sorting unit 71, grasp the winning prize ports 77a and 78a that flow, and hold the ball in the holding device 73. It can be visually confirmed whether or not the operation is performed.

  Further, the holding device 73 is disposed upstream of the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a in the alternate sorting unit 71 (ie, between the sorting ball opening 72 and the sorting device 76). However, instead of this, it may be arranged downstream of the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a. Then, the balls that have won the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a are held in the holding device 73, so that the balls that have entered the alternate sorting unit 71 can be held in any of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a. , And the ball can be held in the holding device 73 while the lottery opportunity of the first symbol is always obtained. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an event that a lottery of the first symbol cannot be received even though a ball has entered the alternate sorting unit 71. In this case, the ball retained in the retaining device 73 is a so-called out ball, so that even if the ball flowing down from the retaining device 73 wins the dummy winning opening 75, the ball is not paid out. It is suitable.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. The distributing device 76 of the alternate distributing unit 71, as described above, alternately distributes the sphere that has flowed down from the distributing inlet 72 and has not flowed into the holding device 73 to the left path 77 or the right path 78. A rotating shaft portion 76a, a central plate portion 76b extending upward from the outer periphery of the rotating shaft portion 76a, and a left side support extending leftward and rightward from the outer periphery of the rotating shaft portion 76a. It is composed of a plate 76c and a right receiving plate 76d, and a distribution-side magnet (not shown) built in the central plate portion 76b. Further, on the wall portion on the back side of the game board 13 of the alternate distribution unit 71, a unit-side magnet (for example, an S-pole when the distribution-side magnet has an N pole) repels the above-mentioned distribution-side magnet. (Not shown).

  The distributing device 76 is configured to be rotatable by 30 degrees in the left and right directions around the rotation shaft portion 76a as a rotation center. In the state of FIG. The left receiving plate 76c is in a right guiding position in which the entire left receiving plate 76c is below the rotary shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is above the rotary shaft portion 76a. The ball that has flowed down is guided to the right route 78. The right guiding position is maintained by the repulsion between the distribution side magnet and the unit side magnet.

  Here, a description will be given of a mode in which the sphere that has entered the alternate sorting unit 71 is alternately sorted to the left route 77 or the right route 78 by the sorting device 76. First, as shown in the state of FIG. 4, the distal end side of the left receiving plate 76c abuts against the wall of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire left receiving plate 76c is located below the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d Is located above the rotating shaft portion 76a, the ball that has entered the alternate sorting unit 71 and has flowed down from the sorting ball inlet 72 is the central plate portion 76b and the right receiving plate 76d of the sorting device 76. Fits in the space formed by Then, by pushing down the right receiving plate 76d by the weight of the ball, the entire distribution device 76 rotates, and the distal end side of the right receiving plate 76d contacts the wall of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire right receiving plate 76d becomes The left receiving plate 76c is located below the rotation shaft 76a and above the rotation shaft 76a. Accordingly, the distribution device 76 is in a state in which the ball can flow down to the right path 78 side, and in this state, the ball is guided to the right path 78 by rolling on the upper surface of the right receiving plate 76d.

  At this time, the force of pushing down the right receiving plate 76d (rotating the entire distribution device 76) by the weight of the sphere rather than the repulsive force of the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Is larger, the distribution device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the state in which the left receiving plate 76c is above the rotary shaft 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is below the rotary shaft 76a, that is, the state of the left guide position is Will be maintained.

  Then, the ball that has entered the alternate sorting unit 71 and has flowed down from the sorting ball inlet 72 fits in the space defined by the central plate portion 76b and the left receiving plate 76c of the sorting device 76. When the left receiving plate 76c is pressed down by the weight of the ball, the distribution device 76 rotates, and the distal end side of the left receiving plate 76c contacts the wall of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire left receiving plate 76c rotates. The right receiving plate 76d is located below the shaft 76a and above the rotary shaft 76a. Therefore, the distribution device 76 is in a state where the ball can flow down to the left side path 77 side, and in this state, the ball is guided to the left side path 77 by rolling on the upper surface of the left receiving plate 76c.

  Also at this time, the left receiving plate 76c is pushed down by the weight of the ball (the entire distribution device 76 is rotated) rather than the repulsive force of the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since the force is larger, the distribution device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the state in which the left receiving plate 76c is below the rotating shaft 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is above the rotating shaft 76a, that is, the state of the right guide position. Will be maintained. By repeating these movements alternately, the sphere that has entered the alternate sorting unit 71 is alternately sorted to the left path 77 and the right path 78.

  The left path 77 of the alternate distribution unit 71 is a path along which the sphere guided to the left inside the alternate distribution unit 71 by the distribution device 76 flows down. A left outlet from which a ball flowing down the left passage 77 flows out is provided at a lower left side of the left passage 77, and a left special drawing winning opening 77a is provided below the left outlet. Therefore, the ball guided to the left side route 77 flows down in the left side route 77, is discharged from the left side exit, and is configured to win the left special figure winning opening 77a.

  The right path 78 of the alternate sorting unit 71 is a path along which the sphere guided to the right in the alternate sorting unit 71 by the sorting device 76 flows down. At the lower right side of the right path 78, there is provided a right exit from which a ball flowing down the right path 78 flows out. At a position below the right exit, a right special figure winning opening 78a is provided. Therefore, the ball guided to the right route 78 flows down the right route 78, is discharged from the right exit, and wins the right special figure winning opening 78a.

  By configuring the alternate sorting unit 71 in this manner, the sphere that has entered the alternate sorting unit 71 can be alternately sorted to the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a. It is possible to avoid a state in which the winning opening is kept fixed and to diversify the winning pattern of the winning openings 77a and 78a.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is provided on the upper right side of the alternate distribution unit 71 in a front view, and a horizontally long large winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the big hit is stopped. As described above, the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is illuminated and displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the open / close plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball can easily enter the big winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is provided with a larger value than usual at the time of giving a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

  A second entrance 67 is provided above the variable winning device 65 in a front view and on the right side in a front view of a variable display device unit 80 described later. The second entrance 67 has a through hole (not shown) through which a ball passes, provided in the up-down direction. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a second symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes the main controller 110 to variably display the second symbol. A winning lottery will be held. Note that the second entrance 67 only serves as a trigger for a random display of a variable display of a normal symbol, and is configured so that a prize ball or the like is not paid out even when the ball passes.

  An electric accessory 79 is disposed downstream of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 71. The electric accessory 79 mainly includes a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) for driving the rotating plate to open and close.

  The main controller 110 of the first embodiment normally closes the right special figure winning opening 78a while keeping the rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 in an upright state, but the variable display of the second symbol is performed. When a win is won, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 is moved from the upright state to the right by a predetermined angle (eg, , 45 °) to drive the right special figure prize port 78a into an open state by driving in a tilted open state (tilt state), so that the ball can easily enter the right special figure prize port 78a. .

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability of winning in the variable display of the second symbol changes according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the “normal gaming state”, the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and it is difficult to win a win in the variable display of the second symbol. The rotating plate 79 is hard to be opened (tilted), so that it is difficult to win the right special figure winning opening 78a. On the other hand, in the “probability change state” or the “time shortened state”, the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win in the variable display of the second symbol, The rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 is easily opened (in a tilted state) so that the right special figure winning opening 78a can be easily won.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, as described above, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed from the central portion of the game area to the right side area. The variable display device unit 80 synchronizes with the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 by using a ball (starting winning) in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a symbol variation effect, and a variable display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball at the second entrance 67. A second symbol display device 83 including an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having a size of 17 inches, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 7) described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Are displayed (see FIG. 6).

  Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the third symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is variably displayed. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on a rear symbol made of a wooden box, and odd numbers (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, In the main symbol with "9"), a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) are used for characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. on almost the front of a wooden box. An imitation accessory symbol is added, and even numbers are added to the lower right side of the accessory symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the accessory symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the first symbol by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation effect in which the same main symbol is arranged is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation effect ends. After the jackpot is completed, if the state shifts to the “probability change state (probability change state)” and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots are given, a fluctuation effect in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to the “probability change pattern”) is performed. Will be On the other hand, when shifting to the “time reduction state” after the end of the big hit, a variable effect in which the main symbols (corresponding to “time reduction symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are added is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds have a main display area Dm in which the third symbol fluctuates and a reserved area. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like is provided, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, a left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, a middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

  In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a scrolling effect is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of the numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the main symbol numbers may be arranged in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the main symbol numbers may be arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each variation effect, a third symbol is displayed on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped and displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a big hit symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "big hit display") is arranged on the pay line L1, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable effect (dynamic display) or the “slump effect” of the third symbol (the first symbol), the sphere moves to the left. When a ball is entered into the special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is displayed up to four times. Also, when a ball enters the dummy winning opening 75 while the third symbol display device 81 is performing the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” of the third symbol, the number of times of ball entry (dummy holding ball) Number) is displayed at most once. That is, when the ball enters the left special figure winning opening 77a, the right special figure winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75 while the fluctuation effect of the third symbol or the "slump effect" is being performed, The number of balls (the number of reserved balls) is displayed as a permanent reserved display and a dummy reserved display up to a maximum of five balls. In this case, it is possible for the player to recognize that the dummy hold display exists.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of times of ball entry into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, which is a chance for the third symbol (first symbol), is displayed in the cockpit display area Db. In addition to being displayed as the final hold display, the number of times the ball has entered the dummy winning opening 75 is displayed as a dummy hold display in the cockpit display area Db in conjunction with the final hold display or alone. . In addition, by displaying the permanent hold display based on the ball entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a and the dummy pending display based on the ball entering the dummy winning opening 75 in the same manner, Each is configured so that it cannot be distinguished. Then, based on the main hold display and the dummy hold display displayed in the cockpit display area Db, the third symbol display device 81 executes the conventional variable effect or the “slump effect” executed when the variable effect is interrupted. Or is configured to be executed.

  Conventionally, if a ball does not win in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a for a long time, a "slump state" in which the variable effect is not executed on the third symbol display device 81 occurs. Even though the player plays the game by firing the ball, the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can gain an interest in the jackpot lottery required by the player. I can not do it, I get excited about the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 does not allow a ball to easily enter the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a because the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, it is determined that it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the game with the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, once the slump state is reached, a ball wins in the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a, and the fluctuating effect is executed for the first time. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, in place of the regular variation effect, a “slump effect” that is executed for a longer time than the execution time of the acquired variation effect is performed, and is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect time is configured to be longer than the normal fluctuation effect execution time. In addition, along with the execution of the “Slump effect”, the dummy hold display is displayed in the same manner as the actual real hold display based on the winning in the dummy winning opening 75, and one of the “Slump effect” effects When the unit is executed, the dummy pending display is digested (erased).

  With such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a regular variable effect due to a ball entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a. By making the “slump effect” executed by the third symbol display device 81 longer, it is possible to make the effect time performed on the third symbol display device 81 longer than the time of the actual variable effect, while making it difficult to identify whether the effect is “effect”. it can. Therefore, the effect time of the effect on the third symbol display device 81 can be lengthened, and the interest of the game can be improved without making the player wake up.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of balls to be held in the variation effect of the third symbol (first symbol) is accurately indicated by the first symbol display device 37, while the variation effect of the third symbol and “ The number of reserved balls "Slump effect" is indicated in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 provided in the cockpit display area Db. In the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, one permanent reserved display and one dummy reserved display per one reserved ball (one reserved ball number) (in a normal display mode, a symbol “○” (white circle symbol)) In the following, the permanent hold display and the dummy hold display may be collectively referred to as “holding symbols”.), And the holding symbols displayed in the first to fifth holding symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are displayed. Depending on the number, the number of balls reserved for the variable effect and the “slump effect” is displayed.

  That is, in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the number of balls held in the variable effect and the “slump effect” is one. In the case where a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1 and Db2, the number of balls reserved for the variable effect and the “slump effect” is two. In the case where a total of three reserved symbols are displayed one by one in the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect and the “slump effect” is three. In the case where a total of four reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, the number of balls reserved for the variable effect and the “slump effect” is four. And the ~ If one at total of five pending symbols each of which is displayed in the fifth hold symbol display areas Db1～Db5, indicates that hold cell count fluctuation effect and "slump effect" is 5 times. In addition, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, the number of the reserved balls in the variable production and the “slump production” is 0, and the variable production and “the slump production” are held. Slump effect "does not exist.

  Also, on the left side of the cockpit display area Db, a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as an “executable symbol”) indicating that a variable effect or “slump effect” is being executed in the main display region Dm is displayed. An area Db0 is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to display an execution symbol larger than each of the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. In addition, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 moves (shift. Hereinafter, moving and displaying the reserved symbol may be referred to as "shift display"). And displayed as an execution symbol.

  The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when one effect unit of the variable effect or the “slump effect” is completed, and with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed held symbol is shifted to the lower side ( Moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left). Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased along with the end of one effect unit of the variable effect or “Slump effect”, the symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. The held symbol that has been moved is shifted and displayed as an execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db2. The reserved symbol displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db3. Furthermore, the reserved symbol displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Db5 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0 while the variable effect or the “Slump effect” is performed in the main display region Dm. ), Except for the “Special Reach” production element or the “Which Reach” production element). On the other hand, when one effect unit of the fluctuation effect or “Slump effect” is completed, or during the effect of “Super reach” effect element, “Special reach” effect element or “Which reach” effect element, In such a case, the configuration is such that the executed symbols are deleted. That is, when an execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” is being executed (continued) in the main display region Dm, If no execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” is not executed (not continued) in the main display region Dm, or “super reach”. , A “reach special” effect element or a “reach reach” effect element is being executed.

  Further, in the cockpit display area Db, a "preliminary change notice" can be executed by using the reserved symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. The “pending change notice” refers to the fluctuation effect executed in the main display area Dm or the jackpot expectation degree of one effect unit of “slump effect”, the fluctuation effect or one of “slump effect”. This is a notice suggested by changing the display colors of the held symbols and the executed symbols in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the effect unit to during the execution.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from the normal display mode of “white” to the blue display mode of “blue” and the green display as “hold change notice”. It is configured to be changeable to “green” in the mode or “red” in the red display mode. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the "big hit display" occurs in one effect unit of the floating effect or "slump effect" or the "reach display" occurs, the display colors of the pending symbol and the execution symbol are changed. Since the selection ratio is configured to be different, the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol changes from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”). It is possible to indicate to the player for each display color the possibility that a "reach display" or "big hit display" will occur in one effect unit of the floating effect or the "slump effect" indicated by the pending symbol and the execution symbol. it can.

  More specifically, in the “hold change notice”, the change in the hold symbol and the execution symbol when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the “blue” display mode compared to the normal display mode (“white”). The ratio of “reach display” or “big hit display” is set high in one effect unit of the effect or “slump effect”. In addition, when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the display mode of "green" rather than "blue", the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol indicate "reach display" or "big hit display". Is set high. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol and the execution symbol are in a display mode of “red” rather than “green”, the “reach display” is performed in one effect unit of the floating effect or the “slump effect” indicated by the reserved symbol and the execution symbol. Or "big hit display" is set high.

  In addition, when the display form of the pending symbol and the execution symbol is “green” or “red”, the “normal reach” in the variable effect or “slump effect” indicated by the “green” or “red” pending symbol or the execution symbol Is set so that the execution of the main production mode (the main production mode is referred to as “production mode”), the “super reach” production mode, or the “special reach” production mode is determined.

  In addition, in the state where the display state of the hold symbol is changed by the “hold change notice”, when the hold symbol shifts along with execution (digestion) of one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect”, The display mode of the changed reserved symbol is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected on the suspended symbol or the executed symbol at the shift destination. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, the changed reserved symbol is changed or another one of the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 or the execution symbol display area Db0 is executed with the execution of one effect unit of “slump effect”. Also, when shifting to, the display mode before the shift is configured to be maintained as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

  Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to “red” in the fifth reserved symbol display region Db5, the reserved symbol is changed from the fourth reserved symbol display region Db4 to the third reserved symbol display region Db3 → the second reserved symbol. When shifting from the display area Db2 → the first reserved symbol display area Db1 → the executed symbol display area Db0, the “red” reserved symbol or the executed symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the first embodiment, the number of balls to be held for a variable effect based on a ball entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a is configured to be held up to four times. The number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of reserved balls corresponding to one rendering unit of “Slump production” based on entering the dummy winning opening 75 is configured to be reserved up to once, but the maximum number of reserved balls is reduced to one. The number is not limited, and may be set to two or more times (for example, four times). Furthermore, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into five is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, a color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display information on the number of reserved balls (eg, reserved symbols), it is not possible to execute “preliminary change notice” using the reserved symbols, so that other character symbols and the like are additionally added. It may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the “suspension change notice” by appearing.

  In addition, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with five holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the variable effect and the maximum number of holdings for the “slump effect”, and displays the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state. You may do it. Alternatively, one of the executed symbols or the reserved symbols may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the other of the executed symbols or the reserved symbols may be displayed with a holding lamp other than the third symbol display device 81. In the case where the number of the reserved balls is displayed by the reserved lamp, by providing a plurality of types of display colors of the reserved lamp, it is natural to execute the look-ahead preview similar to the “preliminary change notice” of the first embodiment. It is possible.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 is an area for displaying a character and a preview effect image. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm.

  The cockpit display area Db is, as described above, one of the effect units of the fluctuation effect and the “slump effect” among the balls entered in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75. Is an area for displaying a reserved symbol indicating the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), and an executed symbol related to one effect unit of the variable effect or “Slump effect” being executed.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and the effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” performed in the main display region Dm is larger than usual. It is suggested to the player that the state easily transitions to the jackpot.

  Also, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in the first embodiment) performs a predetermined action, and a fluctuating effect performed in the main display area Dm or Performing a special action different from the predetermined action based on the "slump effect", changing the color of the normally black boy's hair, the color of the normally white hachimaki, or another character appears For example, a notice effect is performed.

  Further, in the sub display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level that indicates stepwise whether or not a big hit occurs in one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” performed in the main display region Dm. A meter (not shown) appears and is displayed. This level meter is a variable effect or a "reach display" in one effect unit of "slump effect" in execution of a variable effect or one effect unit of "slump effect" based on the appearance of a notice design or the like in one effect unit of "slump effect". It is configured to increase (add) each time the expected degree of occurrence and the expected jackpot increase, and to indicate that the jackpot is determined when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub display area Ds has a function of suggesting occurrence of “reach display” in the main display area Dm.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (normal symbol)) each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. The variable display is performed. When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “○” in the first embodiment), the pachinko machine 10 is operated for a time corresponding to the gaming state. (The rotating plate is rotated (tilted)).

  The number of reserved balls in the second entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is lit on a second symbol retaining lamp 84 provided on the center frame 86. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed based on the number of lit second symbol retaining lamps 84.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three or less, or The number may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the alternate sorting unit 71 when viewed from the front (below the second entrance 67) when viewed from the front. ) 65a are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol (third symbol) in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the big hit is determined. The 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is illuminated to display a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In the special game state, when a jackpot occurs as a result of the lottery in the first symbol, the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is set to the predetermined winning time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses, or the ball is played). Open until 10 prizes are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is provided with a larger value than usual at the time of giving a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the large winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The large winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. Then, at the time of a jackpot based on the lottery game of the first symbol, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, so that the ball fired by right-handing can easily enter the large winning opening 65a. A state is temporarily formed, and an operation is performed such that the open state and the closed state in a normal state are alternately repeated.

  That is, at the time of right-handing in the "probability variation state" or at the time of right-handing in the "time reduction state", the player enters the right special figure winning opening 78a, which is easy to enter by the electric auditors 79, and When a jackpot is won in the lottery game of the first symbol based on the ball, the large winning opening 65a is controlled to be opened and closed, and then the player enters the "probability changing state" or the "time shortening state" again. It is configured such that a subsequent game can be performed while the hitting game is continued.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the special winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the seven-segment display 37b corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the special winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the special winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins the inside of the special winning opening 65a. You may make it form as a special game state.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports (ball entry ports) 63, 65a, 75, 77a, 78a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 has a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a control stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the program, and an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display and the variable effect or “slump effect” in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a lottery, is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203b for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a suspended number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. Main controller 110 executes the above main control based on various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to set the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect or the “slump effect” of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the second symbol display device 83. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a lottery or the like of the display result. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and the variation effect or “slump effect” setting of the third symbol display device 81 include a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, A jackpot type counter C2 used to select a stop type of a jackpot symbol, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a fluctuating effect or a “slump effect” effect mode, and a second button used to set initial values of a jackpot random number counter C1. One initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  The random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time an update is performed, and the counter returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for the first symbol, and each of these areas has a left special area. Entering into the drawing winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a (hereinafter, the left special drawing winning opening 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a may be collectively referred to as "special drawing winning opening 77a, 78a"). The respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the ball timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 899”), and becomes a maximum value (for example, “899” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 is performed from the initial value. Done.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, the big hit random number counter is stored in any of the first to fourth areas of the holding area provided in the holding ball storing area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in area 203c1.

  The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved area. If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the big hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the big hit is made.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (a period other than the “probability fluctuation state”) of the first symbol, which is the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”. The high probability used in the case of the low probability state and in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “probability variation state (probable change)”, which is the high probability state of the first symbol having a higher probability of a big hit than the low probability state. There are two types, status and status. Then, the numbers of random numbers to be big hits included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value “7,307,582” is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the low probability state (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high-probability state, the number of the random numbers (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the big hit is nine, and the value “28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866” is It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the high probability state (that is, the “probability fluctuation state”) is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number values for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are respectively set so as not to be duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a jackpot may increase. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the big hit is achieved. Since it is possible to make the value of the random number difficult to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines a jackpot type when a jackpot is reached, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0 to 99”) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take the value of ".", It returns to "0" after reaching "99").

  The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, it is the same as the reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 of the reservation area.

  Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the value at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is a random number with a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of “0 to 99”. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the big hit type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first symbol stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9B, the big hit type table 202b is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a “probability change state” in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability state after a 15 round jackpot, and the “15R probability variable jackpot” shifts to a “high probability” state. Later, the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state, and shifts to the “time shortened state” during the 100 change times, “15R normal jackpot”, and shifts to the “probability change state” after the maximum number of rounds of two rounds. There is a “2R probable jackpot”. In the following description, the 15 round jackpot of “15R probability variable jackpot” and “15R regular jackpot” may be described as “common for 15R jackpot”.

  In the big hit type table 202b, the value of the big hit type counter C2 that determines the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. In the example of FIG. 9B, the value “0-39” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “15R probable jackpot”, and the value “40-39” of the jackpot type counter C2 for “2R probable jackpot”. 59, and the value "60-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "15R normal jackpot".

  When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probable jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “50”, “2R probable jackpot” is used as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the big hit type counter C2 is “90”, “15R normal big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, “15R probability variable jackpot” is selected with a probability of 40%, “2R probability variable jackpot” is selected with a probability of 20%, and “15R probability jackpot” is selected with a probability of 40%. Usually "big hit" is selected.

  In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

  Further, the probability of selecting the jackpot type may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to add, for example, "1" in order within a range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the first embodiment, the rough production mode of the fluctuation production at the time of the jackpot and the loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of the fluctuation productions suspended and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. More specifically, a “non-reach (long)” production mode in which “reach display” does not occur, a “non-reach (middle)” production mode, or a “non-reach (short)” production mode, and “normal reach” as “reach display” "Normal reach" production mode in which only the production element of "normal reach" is performed, and the "super reach" production mode in which the production element of "super reach" is developed from the production element of "normal reach", and the "normal reach" "Special reach" production mode in which the production element of "Special Reach" is executed by developing from the production element of "Special Reach", and "Special variation" production mode in which the production element of "Movie" dedicated to "2R probable big hit" is executed Are selected.

  Among the production modes, a “non-reach (long)” production mode, a “non-reach (middle)” production mode, and a “non-reach (short)” production mode (hereinafter, “non-reach (long)” production mode, The “non-reach (middle)” production mode and the “non-reach (short)” production mode are sometimes collectively referred to as “non-reach” production mode). After the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed in the regions Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6A), the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation” or the “pseudo fluctuation” except for the “non-reach (short)” production mode. Is performed, and the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the "reach display" is not generated. The effect element of "high-speed fluctuation", the effect element of "low-speed fluctuation", and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" will be described later in detail.

  In the production mode, the “normal reach” production mode is the same as the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 in the variable production of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the effect element of "normal reach" is executed, and "reach display" which does not evolve into another "reach display" (that is, "super reach" effect element or "special reach" effect element) Is one of the production modes. The effects of the “normal reach” effect element, the “super reach” effect element, and the “special reach” effect element will be described later in detail.

  Among the effect modes, the “super reach” effect mode is one of the effect modes of “reach display” in which the effect element of “super reach” is developed from the effect element of “normal reach”.

  Among the effect modes, the “special reach” effect mode is one of the effect modes of “reach display” in which the effect element of “special reach” is developed from the effect element of “normal reach”.

  In the production mode, the “special fluctuation” production mode is a production mode that is executed without fail when the “2R probability change jackpot” is won, and is a production mode in which the production element of “movie” is executed. The details of the effect element of “movie” will be described later.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The area is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to in accordance with the success or failure of the variable effect, the current game state, and the number of the variable effects currently on hold (the number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects in standby (the number of reserved balls) and the like.

  Specifically, when determining a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, first, based on the number-of-reservations table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the fluctuation effect is appropriate, the current game state, and the current fluctuation effect are determined. One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of the stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected differs for each of the stop pattern tables 202d. The reason why the plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect in accordance with the validity of the variable effect, the game state, and the number of retained balls. That is, (1) a jackpot occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction state”, or “normal game state”. This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to the number of the effected balls and (3) the number of the suspended balls of the variable effect that are suspended.

  The first reason is to change the degree of expectation to be a big hit for each effect mode. That is, in the case of winning in the jackpot lottery and in the case of losing the jackpot lottery, a stop pattern, that is, a “non-reach” production mode, a “normal reach” production mode, a “super reach” production mode, and a “special reach” production By configuring so that the selection ratio of the modes (excluding the “special fluctuation” production mode that is selected without fail in the case of winning the “2R probable big hit”) is made different, the degree of expectation to be a big hit for each production mode can be increased. Change.

  Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the “super reach” production mode or the “special reach” production mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the “non-reach” production The mode and the "normal reach" effect mode are configured to be easily selected. With such a configuration, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be a large-hit production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode and the “non-reach” production mode are hard to hit. It is possible to produce an effect that does not produce a big hit or a big hit, and it is possible to differentiate the degree of expectation of a big hit for each effect mode. Therefore, when an effect that easily hits the fluctuation effect appears, while the effect that easily hits is performed, it is suggested to the player that a jackpot is likely to occur, and the interest of the game is enhanced. I have.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a jackpot, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit and based on the stop pattern table 202d that is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit. An effect mode (stop pattern), which is a rough content of the variable effect, is selected. On the other hand, when the obtained lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit, and the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is based on the stop pattern table 202d that is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit. Configure to select.

  Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a jackpot is easily generated in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. In this case, a jackpot is less likely to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the jackpot expected value for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

  Also, as a second reason, when the number of standbys for the fluctuation effect of the third symbol (dynamic display of the first symbol; the same applies to the following) reaches the upper limit, the ball enters the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a. This is to reduce as much as possible useless balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow prize).

  More specifically, the upper limit is set to a maximum of four times for the fluctuation effect of the third symbol, and the fluctuation effect is performed at least for a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the right special figure winning opening 78a in the "state", the maximum number of reserved balls in the third symbol is easily reached. In these gaming states, if a fluctuating effect with a long fluctuating time is selected, the ball frequently enters the right special figure winning opening 78a in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is reached, and the corner and right special figure winning Even though the ball has entered the mouth 78a, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained.

  Also, in the “normal game state”, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached, during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is executed. Is not digested, and therefore, even if a ball enters the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during that time, it is not possible to acquire the chance of the lottery of the third symbol.

  In the state as described above, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is thrown into the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, and the variable effect is digested and the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The game is interrupted by stopping the firing of the ball until the state is reached. As a result, when the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, which affects the management of the game arcade.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls in the third symbol is easily reached or in the number of reserved balls close to (or coincident with) the maximum number of reserved balls, a short fluctuation time is selected. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the easy stop pattern table 202d. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

  Further, as a third reason, by setting a long execution time and delaying the end of the variable effect, the state in which the variable effect is executed is maintained for a long time.

  More specifically, if the number of reserve balls for the variable effect is small (not present), a ball must not be newly inserted into any of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a within the change time of the variable effect being executed. The next fluctuation effect cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the case where the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the player plays a game by firing a ball, it is possible to obtain an interest relating to the jackpot lottery required by the player. Instead, it gets excited to the game. In addition, since the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the ball is difficult to enter the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and it is difficult to obtain a game value. There is a possibility that the game with the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped by judging that it is a stand.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which the long change time is easily selected when the number of balls to be changed is small. I have. This makes it difficult for a situation in which the variable effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 to be maintained, and the execution state of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

  Here, the details of the number-of-reservations table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a fluctuating effect based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, whether or not the fluctuating effect is appropriate and the game at that time It is configured to refer to the number-of-suspension table 202c based on the state and the number of suspensions of the variable effect at that time, and to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 10, when the loss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "1", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 11 (a)) is selected.

  Further, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of retained balls is “2 or 3”, or when the loss is extracted in the “probability variation state” or the “time shortened state”, the number of retained balls is Is "one", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 11B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

  Furthermore, when the loss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "4", or when the loss is extracted in the "probability variation state" or the "time shortened state" and the retained ball number is " In the case of "two to four", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

  Also, at the time of extracting the “15R jackpot (“ 15R probable jackpot ”or“ 15R regular jackpot ”)”, the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 12A) Reference) is selected.

  Further, at the time of extracting the "2R probability change big hit", the E table 202d5 (see FIG. 12B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls.

  In other words, when any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4 or E table 202d5) is selected based on only the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, at the time of a loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2 or C table 202d3) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. .

  In addition, even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a jackpot is won, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is easy to be selected (for example, a “super reach” production mode in which the production element of “high-speed fluctuation” is 5 seconds or “ Special reach "production mode etc.) may be selected.

  In this case, in each effect mode in which "reach display" is executed, the effect mode in which only the time of the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, for example, when a variable effect is started in a state where the number of reserved balls is four, even if the effect element of “high-speed change” is performed in 5 seconds, the “high-speed change” for 5 seconds is performed. When the effect element of “fluctuation” ends (at the time when it is recognized as an effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds), in the fluctuation effect, “losing display” appears after the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation”, It becomes unrecognizable whether it will develop into "reach display". Therefore, even if the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, any of the "reach display" which is not the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode Is configured to be able to be executed, at the time of execution of the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds, it is not possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

  In the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”, when the jackpot is not won and the number of reserved balls is small, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table). 202d1) may be configured to be selected. With such a configuration, even in the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”, the state in which the fluctuation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily maintained. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the variable effect is not performed to maintain the execution state of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

  Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. . FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically illustrating the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and FIG. 12A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 12B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” production mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” production mode is “95” to “95”. 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “98”, “99”. In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect, and the “non-reach (middle)” effect The mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode are set so as not to be selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is not assigned. The "production mode" and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are set so as not to be selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is not assigned. The "production mode" and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are set so as not to be selected.

  That is, in the A table 202d1, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In the B table 202d2, the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. Further, in the C table 202d3, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

  Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the B table 202d2 instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. In the C table 202d3, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. I have.

  Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time of the variation effect selected as compared with the B table 202d2 or the C table 202d3, and the B table 202d2 is selected as compared with the C table 202d3. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect tends to be relatively long. In other words, the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter fluctuation time of the variable effect selected as compared with the A table 202d1, and the C table 202d3 has the fluctuation change of the variable effect selected as compared with the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2. It can be said that the time is easily shortened.

  The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect, the “super reach” effect, and the “special reach” effect with the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3 are set to be equal.

  In this way, when the loss lottery result is extracted, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the number of balls on hold for the variable effect on hold. For example, when the number of reserve balls in the variable effect is large, it is easy to select a “non-reach (short)” effect mode or a “non-reach (middle)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short. Thereby, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened, and the execution number of the variable effect is increased, whereby the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Further, for example, when the number of reserve balls for the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is set to be shorter than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. It is easy to select a long “non-reach (long)” effect mode or a “non-reach (middle)” effect mode. This makes it possible to perform a “non-reach (long)” or “non-reach (middle)” production mode in which the variable production time is longer than when the “non-reach (short)” production mode is selected. It becomes easy to secure the ball entry time into the figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and it is possible to increase the possibility that a new starting prize is generated during the execution time of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the “slump state” is the “non-reach” effect mode, the pachinko machine 10 adds to the variable time of the acquired variable effect. An extended production time (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “extended time”) for performing the production is acquired by lottery, and a series of “slump productions” is performed during the total time of the acquired fluctuation time and extended time. Is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, and the third symbol display device 81 performs the third symbol. By reducing the number of situations in which the dynamic effect of is not performed, the player can be prevented from getting up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is “40” to “40”. 99 ". In the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “special fluctuation” effect mode, and the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. The D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and since the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is allocated only to the “special fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other “reach display” is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the "2R probability change big hit" is won is always set to the "special change" effect mode. Since the E table 202d5 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, the “non-reach” effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the D table 202d4, the selection ratio is set such that the “normal reach” effect mode is 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 60%. In the E table 202d5, the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set to have a selection ratio of 100%.

  Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode> It is set so that the selection ratio increases in the order of “super-reach” effect mode> “special reach” effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode It is configured to be. Thereby, the degree of expectation to the big hit can be shown to the player by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy a feeling of uplifting to the big hit according to the effect mode of the executed variable effect.

  In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that is selected based on the number of retained balls for the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the loss effect variable effect. , 78a and a variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball and the variable effect determined based on the start of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball. I have. Specifically, in the case of a loss effect fluctuating effect, it is configured such that any one of the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, or the C table 202d3 is selected based on the number of pending balls of the fluctuating effect. In the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3, the stop pattern counter allocated to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode, or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode The value of C3 is the same, and the values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to the other presentation modes are also set to be the same.

  That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable effect, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode, a “non-reach (middle)” effect mode, or a “non-reach (short)” effect Since the only difference is whether the mode is selected, the same mode of the “reach display” effect is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even in the case of performing a pre-reading notice such as "preliminary change notice" based on the effect form selected at the time of the start winning prize, the content of the pre-reading notice is not included in the variable effect which is the target of the pre-read notice. An effect that does not cause inconsistency can be executed.

  As described above, the situation in which a game is played by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of executions of the variable effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

  In the case where the number of retained balls in the variable effect is large (for example, “4”), when “reach display” is selected, the stop pattern in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” of each “reach display” is shortened A table 202d may be provided. In addition, when the number of reserve balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of “low-speed change” is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d in which the selectivity of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of pending balls of the variable effect may be provided. However, in the case where the selectivity of each effect mode is different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading advance notice and There may be a case where the number of reserved balls at the time of execution of the fluctuation effect that is the target of the prefetch notice is different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, so that the process becomes complicated.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to add “1” in order within a range of “0 to 9” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “9”). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. In other words, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 for detailed information on the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The change mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the execution mode of the advance effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough change pattern of the change effect and determines only the change time. With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control of a preliminary lottery or the like necessary for executing the variable effect, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variable effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to prepare commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby performing the fluctuation effect. The degree of freedom for selection can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 determines whether or not a series of “slump effects” can be executed, and in the “slump effects”, the “pseudo consecutive” effects Even when only a single variation pattern is provided, a variation pattern of a plurality of “pseudo-ren” effects can be executed as a “slump effect”. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of effects while reducing the ROM capacity, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. In this pachinko machine 10, a loss variation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of a loss and a jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of a big hit are prepared as the variation pattern table 202e. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the loss variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 13, the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, as the production mode, “E0: non-reach (long)” and “non-reach (middle)” production mode that are referred to when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is determined are determined. "E1: non-reach (middle)", which is referred to when it is performed, and "E2: non-reach (short)", which is referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined. “Normal reach” effect mode is determined when “E3: normal reach” is referred, when “super reach” effect mode is determined, “E4: super reach”, and “special reach” effect It is classified into “E5: special reach” that is referred to when the mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a value (spot hit random value) that is a jackpot, that is, a value that results in a loss, the holding number table 202c is referred to. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d are selected. The effect mode is selected based on 202d. Then, a group to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the loss variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is used in the variation production suspended in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern.

  In the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E0: non-reach (long)" has "15 seconds" of the entire variation time, "the effect element of" high-speed variation (long) "+ the effect element of" low-speed variation "". (Variation time; it is of course possible to replace “variation pattern” with “variation time”).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “production element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ production of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for the "element", and only the "effect element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the effect mode of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, “high-speed variation (long)” is performed for all possible values (“0 to 9”) of the variation type counter CS1. )) And the effect state of “low-speed fluctuation”. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, only “effect mode of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ effect mode of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect of the “low-speed fluctuation” is the first half of the effect element of the “pseudo-ren”, and the chance-eye development symbol appears. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the effect of the "low speed fluctuation" to the "pseudo fluctuation", which is the same as the fluctuation time of the effect of the "pseudo fluctuation" indicating whether or not the chance eye symbol appears. "Can be replaced with the effect mode.

  More specifically, for example, in the main controller 110, “the effect mode of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the effect mode of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is selected, and the effect is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” effect mode + “low-speed fluctuation” effect mode as transmitted, or the “high-speed fluctuation” effect mode. The effect mode of “variation (long)” + the effect mode of “pseudo-variation” ”can be selected and executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that is equal to or more than the type of variable time selected by the main control device 110, and to reduce the number of variable times stored in the main control device 110 while enriching the effect variations. However, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, each effect mode will be described in detail while referring to each effect element constituting each effect mode. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect time of each effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” executed in each game situation. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing an example of the relationship between the fluctuation time and the extension time and the “slump effect”. FIG. 16A illustrates the “slump effect” at the time of a loss. FIG. 16B illustrates the “slump effect” at the time of the reach.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, during a state in which a “slump effect” can occur so as not to fall into a slump situation in which the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the fluctuation effect of the third symbol as much as possible. When the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is executed based on the winning in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state", a series of "slump effect" is executed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in a situation other than the “slump state” (ie, in the “normal state”), it is configured to perform a variable effect composed of predetermined effect elements. With this configuration, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, the possibility that the next start winning will occur during the execution of a series of “slump effects” is increased, and the third symbol display is performed. By reducing the number of situations in which no effect is performed by the device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from getting up.

  First, as an effect of the “normal state”, an effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” performed for “10 seconds”, an effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” performed for “5 seconds”, and “5 seconds” The effect element of “slow fluctuation” performed, the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” performed for “5 seconds”, the effect element of “normal reach” performed for “5 seconds”, and the “super reach” performed for “15 seconds” The effect element of “special reach” performed for “25 seconds”, the effect element of “re-change” performed for “5 seconds”, and the effect element of “movie” performed for “50 seconds” It is prepared. Also, as the “slump effect” of the “slump state”, an effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” performed for “5 seconds”, an effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” performed for “5 seconds”, and “0 seconds” An effect element of “development possibility effect” performed longer and shorter than “10 seconds” and an effect element of “reach reach” performed for “10 seconds” are prepared. The effect element of "fast fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" performed in the "normal state" and the "slump state" are equivalent effect elements.

  “High-speed fluctuation (long)” or “high-speed fluctuation (short)” (hereinafter, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” and “high-speed fluctuation (short)” are collectively referred to as “high-speed fluctuation”. The effect elements may be referred to as “variable effects” or “slump effects” performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6). The third symbol displayed in (a)) is an effect element scrolled at a high speed vertically downward on the display screen.

  In the "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the fluctuation effect previously stopped and displayed or the stop result of the "slump effect" is mixed irregularly. Performed as a (shuffle) effect. In the first embodiment, the difference between the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is the length of the high-speed shuffle effect time ("10 seconds" and "5 seconds"). ) Only (see FIG. 15).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” or the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is performed, a specific effect mode (“non-reach (short)” effect) is performed. Except for the mode or the “special fluctuation” production mode), the effect element of “slow fluctuation” or the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” is performed.

  The effect element of "low-speed fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6A). This is an effect element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. The effect element of the “low-speed fluctuation” is an effect mode other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, except for the case where “pseudo fluctuation” described later is executed. 5 seconds "(see FIG. 15).

  In this “low-speed fluctuation” effect element, the third symbol sequence Z1 → the right symbol sequence Z3 → the middle symbol sequence Z2 (see FIG. 6 (a)) in the order of making the player recognize the display content of the third symbol. Stop and display the symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, it is determined that "reach display" has occurred, and it develops into the effect element of "normal reach", while the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3. In the case where a different third symbol is stopped (except for the chance-eye-developed symbol described later), the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is terminated ("pseudo-ran" described later). Except when it develops). In the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", the time when "reach display" is established and the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates by several frames, and the time when the "reach display" is not established and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. Are configured to be the same time.

  Therefore, in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, after the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” is performed for “10 seconds” at the beginning of the fluctuation effect, the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation” is performed for “5 seconds”. Will be In the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode, after the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is performed for “5 seconds” at the beginning of the fluctuation effect, the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation” is changed to “5 seconds”. Will be Then, in the effect element of "low-speed fluctuation", each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) stops in order, "losing display" appears, and one fluctuation effect ends.

  On the other hand, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the “high-speed change (short)” is performed for “5 seconds”, the effect element of the “low-speed change” is not performed, and the “high-speed change (short)” effect is performed. After the end of the element, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6 (a)) stops at the same time, “losing display” appears, and the variable effect 1 ends. In other words, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is performed, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 rapidly changes without passing through the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation”. It is configured to stop (so-called "bitter stop").

  In the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", when "losing display" is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). The executed symbol is deleted.

  The effect element of “pseudo-variation” is, when the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, a third symbol having a number “+1” larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6A). When the symbol is stopped (for example, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol column Z1 and the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol column Z3 (see FIG. 6A)) ( In other words, “7８8 (○ is fluctuating)” is applicable.Hereinafter, an effect is performed as to whether or not the combination is to be referred to as a “chance eye development symbol”. When the third symbol is displayed, the same third symbol as the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 when the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped is displayed (for example, the left symbol column Z1). The third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, and the third symbol “8” is stopped in the right symbol column Z3. (That is, “778”). In the following, the combination is referred to as a “chance pattern” or “+1” from the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 in the middle symbol column Z2. The third symbol of a large number is stopped and displayed (for example, the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3. (That is, “788”), and refers to an effect element for which an effect of whether or not to perform the combination is referred to as a “Gasset chance pattern”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the above-mentioned chance symbol appears in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the effect element of “pseudo variation”, the “high-speed variation” is again performed. (Short), the fluctuating effect is terminated when the above-mentioned gassess chance symbol appears.

  The effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” may be performed “5 seconds” after the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” instead of the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation” (see FIG. 15). In the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation”, when the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped, the same as the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6A). When the third symbol (that is, the reach forming symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is configured to directly develop into the “reach display” (the effect element of “normal reach” or the effect element of “each reach”).

  Therefore, in the effect element of this "pseudo fluctuation", the chance element symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" start again from the chance element pattern, An effect as if the fluctuation effect was started once more (so-called “pseudo-ream”. Hereinafter, a combination of the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” and the effect element of “pseudo-fluctuation” is referred to as the “pseudo-ream”. "May be referred to as an effect.).

  In the first embodiment, at most one “pseudo-run” effect is executed (selected) in the fluctuation effect of “normal state”, and up to five “pseudo-run” effects can be executed in a series of “slump effects”. (Can be selected).

  Specifically, for example, when performing one “pseudo-sequence” effect in the “normal state”, after performing the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” or the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” The effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" is executed and the symbol pattern of the chance is pseudo-stop-displayed (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop"), and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" again Is executed, a reach forming symbol appears in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation”, and develops into an effect element of “normal reach” described later.

  On the other hand, when performing five “pseudo-run” effects in the “slump effect”, the “pseudo-fluctuation” effect element is executed after the “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element is executed, and the chance eye symbol is pseudo. After stopping, the second “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element and the “pseudo-variation” effect element are executed again, and the chance-eye symbol stops pseudo, and then the third “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect The element and the effect element of “pseudo-fluctuation” are executed, the chance symbol pattern is pseudo-stopped, and the effect element of “Fast variation (short)” and the effect element of “pseudo-fluctuation” are executed for the fourth time, and the chance element symbol is executed. Is pseudo-stopped, and the fifth “fast fluctuation (short)” effect element and the “pseudo fluctuation” effect element are executed, and a reach forming symbol appears in the “pseudo fluctuation” effect element. See “Which is Lee To develop into a production element of ".

  Also, in the case of performing three “gase pseudo consecutive” productions in the “slump production”, the “pseudo fluctuation” production element is executed after the “high speed fluctuation (short)” production element is executed, and the chance eye symbol is displayed. The Gasech chance pattern appears without stopping, and the second “High speed fluctuation (short)” effect element and the “Pseudo fluctuation” effect element are executed again, so that the Gasech time pattern without stopping Appears, and then the third-time “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element and the “pseudo-variation” effect element do not stop the chance-eye symbol. Appearance, and then a series of “slump effects” ends.

  Therefore, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a variation pattern managed by the main controller 110, even if only a variation pattern in which the number of times of the “pseudo consecutive” effect is executed only once is prepared, In the “slump effect” in the “slump state”, two or more (five or less) “simple consecutive” effects can be performed. Therefore, even when the variation pattern related to the “pseudo-run” effect stored in the main controller 110 is reduced, a plurality of “pseudo-run” effects can be executed, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. , You can enrich the variation of the production.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the “normal state” and the “slump state”, when a chance symbol pattern appears in the “pseudo ream” effect, at least some “reach display” (“normal state”) It is configured to always develop into an effect element of "normal reach" described later, and an effect element of "reach reach" described later in the "slump state".

  Therefore, in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation", after the end of the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation", whether the reach forming symbol appears (the middle symbol row Z2 is fluctuating) and develops into the effect element of "normal reach". It is possible to provide a game property such as whether a chance symbol appears and develops into a “pseudo-ren” effect again, or a variable effect appears and the variable effect ends.

  In the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation", when the gassess pattern is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation effect or "slump effect" ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6B) (Refer to FIG. 7) (hereinafter, the case where the gassess chance symbol stops and the variable effect or the “slump effect” ends is referred to as a “gasse pseudo-sequence” effect). On the other hand, when the chance symbol or the reach forming symbol (the middle symbol row Z2 is changing) is stopped and displayed, the variable effect or the “slump effect” continues, so that the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is displayed. The displayed execution symbol is also continuously displayed until the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” ends.

  In the first embodiment, in the “pseudo-run” effect in the “normal state”, the number of pseudo-stops is set to at most one. However, the “pseudo-run” effect in which the number of pseudo-stops is performed two or more times is executed. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, in the “pseudo-run” effect in the “slump effect”, the number of pseudo-stops is set to a maximum of five times, but the “pseudo-run” effect in which the number of pseudo-stops is performed six times or more may be performed. Good.

  The effect element of "normal reach" is the effect element of "slow fluctuation" or the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation", and the reach forming symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6A). In this case, it is an effect element that indicates whether or not a big hit occurs according to the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A). The effect element of "normal reach" is performed "for 5 seconds" after the effect element of "slow fluctuation" or the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" (see FIG. 15).

  In the effect element of "normal reach", the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the main display area Dm is displayed in an enlarged manner from the normal state. (Not shown). Also, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is scrolled down at a low speed in the vertical direction of the display screen so that the player can visually recognize the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. Is done. Further, in the effect element of “normal reach”, the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 6A) is deleted along with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) (not shown). ).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of “normal reach” is executed, a pattern that directly displays “losing display”, a pattern that directly displays “big hit display”, and a pattern of “super reach” There are prepared a pattern that evolves into an effect element, a pattern that evolves into an effect element of “special reach”, and a pattern in which “losing display” is once made and then the effect element of “re-change” is executed.

  In addition, when the "loss display" or the "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of "normal reach", the variable effect ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) The execution symbol displayed in () is deleted.

  The effect element of “super reach” is developed and executed when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6 (a)) is continued without stopping the “loss display” in the effect element of “normal reach”. , Is an effect element for performing a “battle effect” in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) to indicate whether a big hit occurs. The effect element of “super reach” is performed for “15 seconds” after the execution of the effect element of “normal reach” (see FIG. 15).

  In the “super-reach” effect mode, while the “super-reach” effect element is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is deleted from the display state of the “normal-reach” effect element. The reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which is the cause of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes from the effect element of "normal reach", and a "battle effect" is performed by causing a plurality of character designs to appear (not shown).

  In the first embodiment, it is configured to indicate whether or not a variable effect is appropriate based on the result (win / loss) of the “battle effect”. Specifically, for example, in the above "battle effect", when the character design on the player side wins the character design on the enemy side, it indicates that the variable effect is "big hit display", When the character design on the side loses to the character design on the enemy side, it is configured to indicate that the fluctuating effect is “losing display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of “super reach” is executed, a pattern for directly displaying “losing display”, a pattern for directly displaying “big hit display”, and a once “losing display” And a pattern for executing the effect element of "re-variation" after appearing.

  In the effect element of "super reach", when "losing display" or "big hit display" is stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6B) (See Reference) is deleted.

  The effect element of “special reach” is developed and executed when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is continued without stopping the “loss display” in the effect element of “normal reach”. , Is an effect element for performing a “competition effect” in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) to indicate whether or not a big hit occurs. The effect element of “special reach” is performed for “25 seconds” after the execution of the effect element of “normal reach” (see FIG. 15).

  In the production element of “special reach”, while the production element of “special reach” is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6 (a)) is erased, and the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which has caused the occurrence of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes from the effect element of “normal reach”, and a plurality of characters different from the effect element of “super reach” appear to “competitive effect”. (Not shown).

  In the first embodiment, it is configured to indicate whether or not a variable effect is appropriate based on the result (win / loss) of the “competitive effect”. Specifically, for example, in the above “competitive effect”, when the character design on the player side wins over the character design on the enemy side, while suggesting that the variable effect is “big hit display”, When the character design on the player side loses to the character design on the enemy side, it is configured to indicate that the variable effect is “losing display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of “special reach” is executed, a pattern for directly displaying “losing display” and a direct display of “big hit” are performed similarly to the production element of “super reach”. A pattern to appear and a pattern to execute the effect element of "re-variation" after once displaying "losing display" are prepared.

  In the effect element of "special reach", when "loss display" or "big hit display" is stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6B) (See Reference) is deleted.

  In addition, it is configured to develop into a “super-reach” effect element or a “special-reach” effect element after execution of the “normal-reach” effect element, but instead of the “low-speed fluctuation” effect element, Later, when the reach formation symbol stops, it may be configured such that it does not go through the effect element of “normal reach” and suddenly develops into the effect element of “super reach” or the effect element of “special reach”. Also, the configuration may be such that the “special reach” effect element is performed after the “super reach” effect element is executed.

  The effect element of "re-fluctuation" is an effect element which develops and is executed after "losing display" once appears in any of "reach display", and appears "big hit display". The effect element of "re-change" is performed for "5 seconds" after execution of any of "reach display" (see FIG. 15).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the effect element of "re-change", only the pattern in which "big hit display" appears is prepared. That is, when the effect element of “re-change” is executed, the “big hit display” always appears thereafter. In other words, in the case of “losing display”, the effect element of “re-change” is not executed. This is because the effect element of "re-fluctuation" is an effect element that changes the temporarily displayed "losing display" to one of the "big hits", so the "losing display" which has not been won for the big hit If this is done, inconsistencies in the production will occur. Therefore, the effect element of "re-change" is selected only in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, and is not selected in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1.

  In addition, when the “big hit display” is stopped and displayed in the effect element of “re-change”, the change effect is finished and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). The executed symbol is deleted.

  The effect element of “movie” is an effect element that is executed when “2R probable jackpot” has been won and causes “big hit display” corresponding to “2R probable jackpot” to appear. The effect element of this “movie” is performed for “50 seconds” as a whole (see FIG. 15), and a specific character pattern (for example, in the entire main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A)) from the start of the variable effect. An effect is performed in which the premier character speaks a predetermined message (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the effect element of “movie”, only the pattern in which “big hit display” corresponding to “2R probable big hit” appears is prepared. That is, when the effect element of “movie” is executed, the “big hit display” of “2R probable big hit” always appears thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect element of “movie” is configured to be executed (selected) not only in “normal state” but also in “slump state”.

  In addition, when the “big hit display” is stopped and displayed in the “movie” effect element, the variable effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). Executable symbols are deleted.

  Next, the effect of the “slump state” will be described. In the "slump state", when a ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, the effect element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (Including a “gasse pseudo-ren” effect; the same applies hereinafter) that is executed at least twice.

  Conventionally, when there is no pending ball count for a variable effect, the next variable effect is started unless a ball is newly inserted into any of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. Therefore, a demo screen or the like is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the case where the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the player plays a game by firing a ball, it is possible to obtain an interest relating to the jackpot lottery required by the player. Instead, it gets excited to the game. In addition, since the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the ball is difficult to enter the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and it is difficult to obtain a game value. There is a possibility that the game with the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped by judging that it is a stand.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is started in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during the "slump state", the "slump effect" is executed, and the obtained fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is executed. It is configured so that the dynamic effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be performed longer. This makes it unlikely that a dynamic effect of the third symbol (fluctuation effect and “slump effect”) is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The execution state of the dynamic effect can be maintained for a long time.

  In particular, when the fluctuation production acquired by the starting winning prize is in the “non-reach” production mode, the “slump production” that is longer than the fluctuation time of the obtained fluctuation production has a plurality of “gase pseudo reams” productions. It is configured to be executed once. With such a configuration, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, and the dynamic of the third symbol is changed by the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from getting up by reducing the number of situations in which a direct effect is not performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the “slump state”, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning is “non-reach” effect mode (ie, “15 seconds” because the number of reserved balls is 0). Is a “non-reach (long)” production mode), a time for performing an additional performance with respect to the obtained fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance (hereinafter referred to as “extended time”) is obtained by lottery. The “slump effect” is executed during the total time of the acquired fluctuation time and extension time. Specifically, when an extension time of “5 seconds” is obtained, two “gase pseudo-ren” effects are executed as “slump effects”, and an extension time of “10 seconds” is obtained. As the “slump effect”, an effect mode of “development possible / impossible effect” described later is executed for “5 seconds” in addition to the two “gasse pseudo-ream” effects.

  In the “slump state”, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning is the effect mode of executing “reach display” (ie, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, or “special reach” effect mode). ), The extra time is not drawn, and one or more “pseudo-ren” effects are executed according to the obtained fluctuation time, and the effect element of “reach reach” described later is executed. . The detailed contents of various effects performed in the “slump effect” will be described later.

  Furthermore, when the production mode of the variable production acquired by the start winning during the “slump production” is the “non-reach (long)” production mode, the extended time is not determined by lottery, and “extended time” is determined according to the acquired variation time. "Slump effect" is configured to be additionally set. This is because the already-executed "slump effect" has already acquired the extended time, and if the additional time is acquired in this state, the effect time of the "slump effect" will be longer than necessary. And the management of the production time becomes complicated. Therefore, when the variable effect (all the variable effects of the “non-reach” effect mode and the “reach display” effect mode) is acquired during the “Slump effect”, the additional extended time is not extracted. With this configuration, the processing load relating to the extraction of the extension time is reduced, and the management of the “Slump effect” effect time is facilitated.

  In particular, when a new starting prize occurs during the “Slump effect”, when the “Slump effect” being executed is not executing one effect unit of the “Slump effect” based on the extended time, ie, based on the extended time If the stage element before the stage element was being executed, an additional stage was created in order to match the series of "slump stages" in performing the additional "slump stage" based on the starting prize. In this case, the initially set extension time is once reset (that is, cleared to 0), and the effect contents of a series of “slump effects” are newly set. This is because if the effect element other than the effect element during the extended time, that is, the effect element at the previous stage of the effect element based on the extended time is being executed, the effect element corresponding to the acquired extended time is executed. This is because, even if the extended time is once reset and the production contents of a series of “slump productions” are set again, no inconsistency occurs in the production contents.

  In the “pseudo-ren” effect in the “slump state”, when the gassess chance symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, when the “pseudo-ren” effect is performed, one of a series of “slump effects” is performed. The effect unit ends, and at the same time, the execution symbol (final hold display or dummy hold display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased. Therefore, a "pseudo-run" effect equivalent to the fluctuation effect of the "normal state" is performed as one effect unit of the "slump effect", and as a result of the display, the gassess eye symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution symbol display area is displayed. By erasing the execution symbol displayed on Db0, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the variable effect 1 has ended.

  The effect element of “development enable / disable effect” is one of the effect elements executed in the “slump effect” in the “slump state”, and is stopped (pseudo-simulated) on the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect of whether or not the gaseline pattern is changed. The effect element of the “development possibility effect” is an effect element dedicated to “slump effect”. In the effect element of the “development possibility effect”, an effect is performed as if the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 was artificially cracked and the liquid crystal screen was broken (see FIG. 45).

  In the effect element of the “development effect”, when a pseudo crack is formed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, the liquid crystal screen is broken, the gaseous eye pattern becomes a chance. The next "pseudo-ren" effect is performed instead of the eye symbol, or the effect element of "Which reach" is executed by replacing the gassess eye symbol with the reach forming symbol. On the other hand, in the effect element of the “development possible / impossible effect”, if the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a pseudo crack, but the liquid crystal screen has not been pseudo-cracked, no such crack is generated. A series of "slump effects" is configured to end with the eye symbol.

  The effect element of the “development enable / disable effect” is executed during a period longer than “0 seconds” and shorter than “10 seconds” after the execution of the effect element of “pseudo variation” during the “slump effect” (see FIG. 15). The longer the number of seconds to be executed, the more the amount of cracks that enter the liquid crystal screen in a pseudo manner is configured to gradually increase. Specifically, from “0 seconds” to “3 seconds”, “first development possibility production” with a small amount of crack is executed, and from “3 seconds” to “7 seconds”, “first development possibility” is performed. The "second development possibility production" in which the amount of cracks is larger than the "production" is executed. From "7 seconds" to "10 seconds", the "third development possibility production" in which the amount of cracks is larger than the "second development possibility production". Is executed. The details of the “development possible or not” will be described later.

  In addition, in the effect element of the "development feasibility effect" in the "slump effect", if the effect that the display screen is broken in a pseudo manner is not executed, that is, if the effect does not evolve from the "development feasibility effect" effect element, One effect unit of “Slump effect” ends, and the execution symbol (final hold display or dummy hold display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db is erased. You. Therefore, the “development effect” is performed as the “slump effect”, and as a result of the display, the gassess eye symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted. It is possible to give an illusion to the user as if one variable effect was completed.

  The effect element of "Which reach" is one of the effects executed in the "Slump effect", and is "Reach display" one step before whether or not "Big hit display" appears. Also, the production element of “Which reach” is a production element dedicated to “Slump production”. In the effect element of this “reach reach”, a third symbol identical to the reach forming symbol and a third symbol different from the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 are provided at the center of the third symbol display device 81. An effect of competing whether or not to be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "which effect") is executed (see FIG. 47 (e)).

  The effect element of “Which reach” is performed “10 seconds” after the execution of the effect element of “pseudo variation” or the effect element of “development possibility” during the “slump effect” (see FIG. 15).

  In the effect element of "Which reach", the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is erased during the execution of the effect element of "Which reach", like the effect element of "Super reach". Then, the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which is a cause of the occurrence of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes to the background display dedicated to the effect element of "Which reach," and the above-mentioned "Which effect" is performed (see FIG. 47E). ).

  In the first embodiment, it is configured to indicate whether or not a “slump effect” (fluctuating effect) is appropriate based on the result (win / loss) of the “either effect”. More specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned “Which effect”, the third symbol identical to the reach forming symbol is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the position of the middle symbol row Z2). In this case, while it is suggested that the “slump effect” becomes “big hit display”, when a third symbol different from the reach forming symbol is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to indicate that the “slump effect” is a “loss display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the effect element of “reach reach”, a pattern of directly displaying “losing display” and a direct display of “big hit display” are performed similarly to the effect element of “super reach” and the like. , And a pattern in which the effect element of “re-variation” is executed after the “loss display” is once displayed.

  In the effect element of “Which reach”, when “Loss display” or “Big hit display” is stopped and displayed, a series of “Slump effects” ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6 (b) is deleted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the production time (variation time) of all the production elements of the variable production that can be executed in the “normal state” is an integral multiple of the production time in units of “5 seconds” ( That is, “5 seconds”, “10 seconds”, “15 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “25 seconds” or “50 seconds”). In the "slump state", the effect time of all effect elements other than the effect element of "development availability effect" is also configured as an integral multiple of the effect time in units of "5 seconds". The extended time selected in the “slump state” is also configured by an integral multiple of the effect time in units of “5 seconds”. With this configuration, when performing a series of “slump effects” in which a plurality of effect elements are executed in relation to one acquired variable effect, the fluctuation time (and extension time) of the variable effect and “extended time” It is possible to make it easy to match the slump effect with the effect time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the relationship between the execution time of the variable effect (dynamic display), the extension time acquired at the time of the “slump effect”, and the effect time of the executed “slump effect” will be described. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, in the “slump state”, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected and “5 seconds” is selected as the extension time, the effect total time is “ 20 seconds ", and as the" Slump effect ", the first" Gase pseudo ream "production (hereinafter the first" Gase pseudo ream "production, the" Gase pseudo ream 1 ", the second The “gase pseudo-ren” production is set to “gase pseudo-ren 2”,..., And the nth (n is a natural number) “gase pseudo-ren” production is called “gase pseudo-ren” “2 productions” is set to “Gase pseudo-run 2”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the “slump state”, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected and “10 seconds” is selected as the extension time, the total effect time Becomes "25 seconds", and as "Slump effect", "Pseudo-sequence 1" is set in "First effect", "Pseudo-sequence 2" is set in "Second effect", and "Third effect" The “development possible / impossible effect” corresponding to the remaining effect time of the “slump effect” (that is, “5 seconds”) is set.

  Then, each of the above-mentioned "slump effects" is performed, and the obtained stop effect of the variable effect ("non-reach (long)" effect mode, so "losing display") is a symbol corresponding to the gasscene eye symbol. The stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slump effects” ends. If a new starting prize is generated in the special figure prize port 77a, 78a while the "slump effect" is being performed, the state transitions to the "normal state", but no new starting prize is generated. In this case, the “slump state” is set again.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the “slump state”, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, the total effect time is “20 seconds”, and the “first effect” is set as the “slump effect”. , The first “pseudo-ren” production (hereinafter the first “pseudo-ren” production, “pseudo-ren 1”, the second “pseudo-ren” production, “pseudo-ren 2”,..., N The “pseudo-ren” effect for the first time (n is a natural number) is referred to as “pseudo-n”, and an effect element of “reach reach” is set to “second effect”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the “slump state”, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected, the total effect time is “30 seconds”, and the “slump effect” is “1st effect”. The effect is set to “pseudo ream 1”, the “second effect” is set to “pseudo ream 2”, and the “third effect” is set to the effect element of “reach reach”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the “slump state”, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected, the total effect time is “40 seconds”, and the “slump effect” is “1st effect”. “Direction” is set to “Pseudo-Ren 1”, “Pseudo-Ren 2” is set to “Second Direction”, “Pseudo-Ren 3” is set to “Third Direction”, and “Which” is set to “Fourth Direction” Production element is set.

  Then, each of the above-mentioned "slump effects" is performed, and "loss display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the acquired stop effect of the variable effect is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

  With such a configuration, the “slump effect” is performed longer than the obtained fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect, the effect time performed on the third symbol display device 81 is increased, and the effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to reduce situations that are not being performed and prevent the player from getting up.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. In the losing variation pattern table 202e1, “E1: non-reach (middle)” includes “production element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ production element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” with an overall fluctuation time of “10 seconds”. Is prepared. In the following, in the description of each effect element relating to the variation patterns of FIGS. 13 and 14, the word “effect element” will be omitted for convenience of explanation.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (middle)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “low-speed fluctuation”. 0-9 ", and only" "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" "is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1, ““ high-speed variation (short) ”is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. )) + “Low-speed fluctuation”]. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (middle)” effect, only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “low-speed fluctuation” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  In the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: non-reach (short)" has one variation pattern of "only high-speed variation (short)" with a total variation time of 5 seconds.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 9” for “only high-speed fluctuation (short)”. It is set so that only “only high-speed fluctuation (short)” can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, “high-speed variation (short)” is performed for all possible values (“0 to 9”) of the variation type counter CS1. ) And “only” are associated with each other. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, “only high-speed change (short)” is always selected as the change pattern.

  In the loss variation pattern table 202 e 1, “E3: Normal Reach” has “20 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ High-speed variation (long) ”+“ Low-speed variation ”+“ Normal reach ”” and the entire variation time Is prepared to be selectable from two fluctuation patterns of “30 seconds”, “High-speed fluctuation (long)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Normal reach” The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach”. 0 to 6 "and" 7 to 9 "for" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" normal reach ".

  That is, in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss, the variation pattern of “high-speed variation (long)” + “low-speed variation” + “normal reach” is 70%, and “high-speed variation (long)” + “pseudo variation” + "Fast variation (short)" + "Pseudo variation" + "Normal reach" "is selected so as to be selected at a rate of 30%. Therefore, in the fluctuation effect including the effect element of “normal reach” selected at the time of the loss, the fluctuation pattern of “high speed fluctuation (long)” + “low speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” is easily selected (70%). I have.

  In the losing variation pattern table 202e1, “E4: super reach” includes ““ high speed variation (long) ”+“ low speed variation ”+“ super reach ”” with an overall variation time of “30 seconds”. Two fluctuation patterns of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" with fluctuation time of "40 seconds" can be selected It is prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the “E4: super reach” effect mode is ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low speed fluctuation ”+“ super reach ””. "0 to 7", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach", "8, 9", It has become.

  That is, in the “super-reach” effect mode at the time of loss, the variation pattern of “high-speed variation (long)” + “low-speed variation” + “super-reach” is 80%, and “high-speed variation (long)” + “pseudo” The fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation” + “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “super reach” is set to be selected at a rate of 20%. Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern ““ high speed variation (long) ”+“ low speed variation ”+“ super reach ”” is easily selected.

  In the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: special reach" includes "" high-speed variation (long) "+" low-speed variation "+" special reach "" of the entire variation time of "40 seconds". Two fluctuation patterns of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach" with fluctuation time of "50 seconds" can be selected. It is prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “special reach”. "0-8", and "9" for "" fast variation (long) "+" pseudo variation "+" fast variation (short) "+" pseudo variation "+" special reach " .

  That is, in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “special reach” is 90%, and “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” The fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation” + “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “special reach” is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the loss, the fluctuation pattern of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “special reach” is easily selected.

  Although the variation pattern at the time of loss is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence or absence of advance notice or the like).

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the production mode, “E6: Normal Reach” is referred to when the “Normal Reach” production mode is determined, and “E7: Super” is referred to when the “Super Reach” production mode is determined. Reach "," E8: special reach "which is referred when the" special reach "production mode is determined, and" E9: special fluctuation "which is referred to when the" special fluctuation "production mode is determined Are classified into The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value (jackpot random number value), the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area, and the gaming state at the time of the start winning prize The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Is done.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, “E6: Normal Reach” includes “20 seconds” of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” for “20 seconds” and the entire fluctuation time. Is "25 seconds", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-variation", and "30-second" "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" "and" "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed" with a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" Variation (short) ”+“ pseudo variation ”+“ normal reach ”+“ re-variation ”” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. I have.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach”. 0 "," "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re- fluctuation" "," 1, 2 "," "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + " "3 to 5" for "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach", "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo fluctuation " + "Normal reach" + "Re-variation" ".

  That is, in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” is 10%, and “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + "Normal reach" + "re-variation" "fluctuation pattern is 20%," "Fast variation (long)" + "Pseudo variation" + "Fast variation (short)" + "Pseudo variation" + "Normal reach" 30% of the pattern, 40% of the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" It is set to be selected by.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot, ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ pseudo fluctuation ”+“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ pseudo fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”+“ re- fluctuation ”” Is easy to select (40% of the whole). However, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach", "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "+" re-fluctuation "", "" high-speed fluctuation " (Long) ”+“ Pseudo fluctuation ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ Pseudo fluctuation ”+“ Normal reach ””, so that you can expect a big hit from any fluctuation pattern Can be provided.

  In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, “E7: Super Reach” includes ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low speed fluctuation ”+“ super reach ”” with a total fluctuation time of “30 seconds”. The fluctuation time is ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ super reach ”+“ re-variation ”” of “35 seconds”, and the “high-speed fluctuation (long) ) "+" Pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" super reach "" and "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "with a total fluctuation time of" 45 seconds " ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ pseudo fluctuation ”+“ super reach ”+“ re-fluctuation ”” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, the association between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach". "0, 1", "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" super-reach "+" re- fluctuation "," 2-4 "," "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + " "Pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach", "5, 6", "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) )) + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “super reach” + “re-fluctuation” ”.

  That is, in the “super reach” presentation mode at the time of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “super-reach” is 20%, and “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” Fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation” + “super-reach” + “re-fluctuation” is 30%, ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ pseudo-fluctuation ”+“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ pseudo-fluctuation ”+“ super-reach ” 20%, and the variation pattern of "high-speed variation (long)" + "pseudo variation" + "high-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "super reach" + "re-variation" It is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern including the effect element of “re-variation” (that is, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “super-reach” + “re-reach” Fluctuation "and" Fast variation (long) "+" Pseudo variation "+" Fast variation (short) "+" Pseudo variation "+" Super reach "+" Re-variation "]) 60%). However, a fluctuation pattern that does not include the effect element of "re-fluctuation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super-reach") or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" "), it is possible to provide a gaming ability that can expect a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

  In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, “E8: special reach” includes ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ special reach ”” with a total fluctuation time of “40 seconds”. The fluctuation time is “45 seconds”, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “special reach” + “re-fluctuation”, and the overall fluctuation time is “50 seconds” “high-speed fluctuation (long) ) ”+“ Pseudo fluctuation ”+“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ pseudo fluctuation ”+“ special reach ”” and “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” with a total fluctuation time of “55 seconds” "+ High-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "special reach" + "re-variation" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is provided for each variation pattern. Are associated with each other.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 14, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “special reach”. "0, 2", "3, 4", "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Special fluctuation "+" Re- fluctuation " "5 to 7" for "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach", "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) )) + “Pseudo-fluctuation” + “special reach” + “re-fluctuation” ”.

  That is, in the “special reach” effect at the time of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “special reach” is 30%, and “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” Fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-fluctuation" is 20%, "" fast fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" fast fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" special reach " 30%, and the variation pattern of "high-speed variation (long)" + "pseudo variation" + "high-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "special reach" + "re-variation" It is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

  Therefore, in the “super reach” production mode selected at the time of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern that does not include the effect element of “re-variation” (that is, ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ super-reach ”” or , “" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" super reach "") (60% of the whole). However, a fluctuation pattern including the effect element of “re-fluctuation” (that is, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “super-reach” + “re-fluctuation” ”or“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach" + "Re-fluctuation"), so that you can expect a jackpot from any fluctuation pattern Can provide the nature.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, only one variation pattern of “movie” having an overall variation time of “50 seconds” is prepared for “E9: special variation”. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the association between the variation pattern in “E9: special variation” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 9” for “movie”, and only “movie” is associated with “movie”. It is set to be selectable. In other words, when the stop type of the big hit is “2R probable big hit”, “movie” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  When “movie” is selected by main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114 determine a detailed variation pattern corresponding to “movie”. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to “movie”, for example, “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6A). While displaying the character, the third symbol is finally specified in accordance with a fluctuation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol (for example, “341”), or the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp. Fluctuating pattern etc. which stops at the symbol of.

  In this way, when the jackpot is won, by configuring so that a relatively long variation pattern is easily selected, the entertainment content of the variation effect in which the jackpot occurs is enhanced, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to. In addition, in the case where the jackpot has not been won, that is, in the case of a losing, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the content of the variation effect at the time of the losing, and making the variation effect. It can be digested efficiently.

  The change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the change type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of change type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect to announce the start of a jackpot or “reach display” before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established. Alternatively, how many symbols are shifted to stop the third symbol to be stopped last (for example, a loss before and after the one symbol is shifted) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a group dedicated to “2R probability variable jackpot” is provided, but a group dedicated to “2R probability variable jackpot” is not provided, and “15R probability variable jackpot” or “15R” is included in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2. Only the association between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of "normal jackpot" may be defined. In this case, when the jackpot type is “2R probable jackpot”, “movie” may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, only “movie” is selected in the case of “2R probable jackpot”, but in the case of “2R probable jackpot”, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns. You may make it selected. In this case, the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the case of "2R probability variable jackpot" even in the group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" like the group of "15R jackpot common". In addition, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain holding area may be determined as a variation pattern in a variation effect held in the holding area.

  Further, among the effect modes selected by the main control device 110, an effect mode may be provided in which an effect element of “pseudo-variation” in which the number of pseudo stop times (the number of times of chance symbol design stop) is performed two or more times is executed. . In addition, the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” may not be executed, and a chance symbol pattern may appear in the effect element of “low-speed fluctuation” to develop into a “pseudo continuous” effect.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The hit random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within a range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching a maximum value (that is, “99”). Further, when the hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C4.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the hit random number counter C4 (value = “0 to 99”), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  In the first embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C4 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67. You. There are 50 random number values to be won, and the range is "5-54". That is, when the value of the obtained hit random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 54”, it is determined as a hit, and a symbol “O” is lit on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory 79 in the right special figure winning opening 78a is operated, and the right special figure winning opening 78a is opened for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, if the acquired value of the hit counter C4 is not in the range of “5 to 54”, that is, if it is in the range of “0 to 4” or “55 to 99”, it is determined that a loss has occurred and the second The symbol “x” is lit on the symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 79 does not operate.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with various tables. According to the tables 202a to 202e described above, the setting of the jackpot lottery and the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the display on the second symbol display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a lottery of a result, can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 203b illustrated in FIG. 8, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, input / output It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 33). The non-maskable interrupt (NMI) terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203c, a reserved ball execution area 203d, a main slump counter 203e, a reserved device drive flag 203f, and a reserved device drive timer 203g.

  The reserved ball number counter 203a enters a ball into the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter, special figure winning). Dynamic display of the first symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (executed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the entry of the ball into the mouths 77a and 78a may be referred to as “start winning”. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the third symbol corresponding to the first symbol.

  The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (S813 in FIG. 33) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time a start winning in any of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value "4". (See S204 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is decremented by one each time the dynamic display of the first symbol (the fluctuation effect of the third symbol) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 28).

  The value of the reserved ball counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number of the first symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 27). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the first symbol dynamic display (variable effect) retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first symbol is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a winning start is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball count command from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113, thereby dynamically displaying the first symbol managed by the sound lamp control device 113 (variation). Even if the number of retained balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of retained balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) retained in main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of retained balls to be received next The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command to notify the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of retained balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the sound ramp control device 113, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a obtained by adding 1 to the reserved ball number command in the reserved ball number command is used. However, with the start prize which triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8). Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

  That is, when a winning start is made, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the main controller 110 are stored in the holding ball. The number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sound ramp control device 113, a fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined in advance that the variable effect will be performed (whether or not a big hit will occur, and how long the variable time will change). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect content and the execution timing (timing) of the “pending change notice”.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the command of holding | maintenance ball number command which shows the holding | maintenance ball number of a fluctuation effect, and the command which shows the value of the big hit random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating a value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at a ball entering timing to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and based on the entered ball. A command similar to a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command (a pre-change pattern command and a pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. In this case, a program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command can be easily created by diverting the program of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203c stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern acquired from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the detection of the start winning in one of the special figure winning ports 77a and 78a. It is a memory for storing each value of the selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (starting winning) one of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), the MPU 201 reads the counters C1 to C3 from the counter buffer 203b. , CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas (reserved) so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning prize of the first symbol can be stored (reserved) up to four times. First to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203d starts the execution, or performs the jackpot lottery of the first symbol being executed, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in the processing such as the setting of the fluctuation effect.

  When detecting that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of a variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. For this reason, of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-mentioned holding ball storing area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the reserved ball execution. Shift to area 203d. Note that the shift in the first embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d will be described with reference to FIG. 8 again. The reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d are used to perform a jackpot lottery of the first symbol, a dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random determination counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is used for the setting of the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81. A jackpot type counter C2 used to determine a jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine a staging mode of a variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine a variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203c stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a.

  The reserved ball storage area 203c includes four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the like. , A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 are included in one reserved ball storage area 203c. However, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) one of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The data is stored up to a maximum of four times. In this case, among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), data are sequentially stored in the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Is stored. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning prize at the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the oldest special figure winning opening 77a, 77a in time is stored in the reserved first area. The data corresponding to the start winning prize at 78a is stored.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203d is composed of only one area. Like the reserved ball storage area 203c, the reserved ball execution area 203d has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. And a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203c to the reserved ball. Shift to the respective areas 203d1 to 203d4 of the execution area 203d. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 29), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 shifts the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved ball execution area 203d. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3. The random number value in the storage area 203c4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4.

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203d is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203c. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the areas (first to third) having the area number smaller by one. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203c.

  Here, a data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 203c will be described. For example, when the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time of determining the start of the variable effect is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203c. I do. In this state, the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203d, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth) to the respective areas. The area shifts to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third and fourth) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The main slump counter 203e is a counter configured to be updateable within a predetermined range (“0 to 2” in the first embodiment), and referred to in the MPU 201 to determine whether or not it is in a “slump state”. That is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0", the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recognizes that the "slump state" for executing the "slump effect" and sends the slump state to the special figure prize opening 77a, 78a. The “slump effect” is executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning start.

  In the first embodiment, the demonstration effect in which the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 is being performed, and a predetermined time (time equivalent to the extension time; In one embodiment, after a lapse of “10 seconds”, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to a predetermined value (ie, “2”), and the above-mentioned “slump state” is entered. Then, in the "slump state", when the ball starts winning at the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, the "slump effect" is executed on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the variable effect based on the start winning. It is configured to be.

  The value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when entering the “slump state”, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to “2”. On the other hand, the value of the main slump counter 203e is one by one based on the start winning at the special figure winning ports 77a and 78a during the "slump state" (that is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0"). Is subtracted. That is, when a value larger than “0” is set in the main slump counter 203 e, the MPU 201 determines the value of the main slump counter 203 e (ie, the value of the main slump counter 203 e) based on the winning of the ball into the special figure winning ports 77 a and 78 a. 2), and a “slump effect” is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, in the “slump state”, in the case of an effect mode in which “reach display” is performed as the fluctuation pattern of the obtained fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 clears the value of the main slump counter 203e to “0” and temporarily sets the “slump state”. Is eliminated so that the “slump effect” is not performed based on the subsequent winning prize. This is because a fluctuation pattern including “reach display” is performed for a relatively long fluctuation time, and a new prize may be generated during the fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously perform the “slump effect” based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a until such a case, the fluctuation pattern including the “reach display” is executed. In this case, until the effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed and the game enters the “slump state” again, the subsequent effects are performed not as the “slump state” but as the “normal state”.

  Here, after an additional “Slump effect” is set, if a new starting prize occurs during the execution of the “Slump effect”, if an attempt is made to set an additional “Slump effect”, “Slump effect” is set. Complicated processing is required to grasp the execution time of the effect and to ensure consistency of the effect, and the processing load may be increased. In addition, when the suspended number of the variable effects is “2” or more, the effect can be continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81, and thus the “Slump effect” longer than the acquired effect time of the variable effect is obtained. Is less effective.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if an additional starting prize occurs during the execution of the “slump effect” and the number of suspended variable effects becomes “2” or more, It is configured to execute a variable effect without performing a “slump effect” in the effect. With such a configuration, in a situation where the effect of executing the “slump effect” is poor (ie, in a state where the suspended number of the variable effect is accumulated to a certain extent), the variable effect is executed without executing the “slump effect”. Since it is not necessary to perform a complicated process for maintaining the consistency of the "slump effect", the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  The holding device drive flag 203f is a flag indicating that the holding device solenoid 73f of the holding device 73 is driven in the ON state. In the first embodiment, when a condition for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 and winning the dummy winning opening 75 is satisfied, the holding device driving flag 203f is set to ON, and the holding device driving described later is performed. The value of the timer 203g is set (“1250” in the first embodiment). Thereafter, every time the main controller 110 executes the timer interruption process (see FIG. 26), the value of the holding device driving timer 203g is subtracted, and when the value becomes a predetermined value (ie, “0”), The holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined time ("2000 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). When the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released and flows into the dummy winning opening 75 provided on the downstream side.

  The holding device drive flag 203f is set to an off value as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the first embodiment, the system enters the “slump state”, the value of the main slump counter 203e is a value larger than “0” (for example, “2”), and the ball is stored in the holding device 73 by the holding ball detection switch 73g. If the ball is started to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in a state where it is detected that the game is suspended, the effect mode of the variable effect based on the starting winning does not generate the "reach display". In the “slump effect”, a plurality of effect elements (for example, “pseudo-sequence” effect) in which the main hold display or the dummy hold display is consumed are executed. For this reason, in order to match the effect contents with the main hold display or the dummy hold display, the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on in order to make the ball held in the holding device 73 win the dummy winning opening 75. This is set (see S211 in FIG. 27).

  In the first embodiment, in the "slump state", no ball is detected by the reserved ball detection switch 73g, and in a state where no ball is retained in the retaining device 73, a ball to be won in the dummy winning opening 75 exists. Absent. Therefore, even if a ball wins in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state", when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the holding device solenoid 73f is not driven so that the holding device 73f is not driven. The drive flag 203f is kept off.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable effect acquired based on the winning of the ball to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during the "slump state" is "reach display", the "slump effect" is executed. However, since it is configured to execute the "pseudo-ren" effect that does not delete the execution symbol and does not execute the "gase pseudo-ren" effect that deletes one execution symbol, the dummy hold display is originally a hold. There is no need to display symbols. Therefore, even in the case where the ball starts and wins the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state", if the "reach display" is included in the fluctuation pattern of the obtained fluctuation effect, the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on. The suspension device drive flag 203f is kept off so as not to drive.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on, a value (“1250” in the first embodiment) is set in a holding device driving timer 203g described later. Then, in the holding device control process (see FIG. 30) executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of main controller 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, this holding device drive flag 203f is turned on. If there is, the value of the later-described holding device driving timer 203g is subtracted. Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device driving timer 203g becomes “0”, the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined period (“2000 milliseconds” in the first embodiment) (see S504 in FIG. 30). When the predetermined period of time is turned on, the ball held in the holding device 73 is reliably released, the ball flows into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding device drive flag 203f is set to off. (See S505 in FIG. 30).

  The holding device driving timer 203g is a timer for measuring the time from when the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on to when the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on. When the value of the suspension device driving timer 203g becomes “0” while the suspension device driving flag 203f is turned on, the MPU 201 determines that it is time to release the ball suspended in the suspension device 73. Thus, the holding device solenoid 73f is configured to be driven (that is, turned on) for a predetermined time.

  This holding device drive timer 203g is set to “0” as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the ball enters the “slump state” and the ball starts and wins in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in a state where the ball is held in the holding device 73, the effect mode of the variable effect based on the start winning is “ If the fluctuation pattern does not cause the “reach display”, the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on (see S211 in FIG. 27) while the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON so that the held ball is made to enter the dummy winning opening 75 (see S211 in FIG. 27). “1250” is set in the device driving timer 203g.

  Thereafter, in the suspension device control process (see FIG. 30) executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, the suspension device drive flag 203f is turned on. In this case, the value of the holding device driving timer 203g is decremented by "1". Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device driving timer 203g becomes “0” (that is, “5 seconds” from the start of the “slump effect”), the holding device solenoid 73f is set to the predetermined period (in the first embodiment, "2000 milliseconds") is turned on (see S504 in FIG. 30), the ball held in the holding device 73 is released, and after about "1 second" therefrom, that is, the "first effect" in the "slump effect". "6 seconds after" the start, the ball released from the holding device 73 flows into the dummy winning opening 75.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a series of “slump effects” are performed, the execution symbols and the holding symbols that are displayed, and the execution of the “slump effects” in which a plurality of effect elements are executed. In order to match with the number of times, when a predetermined time ("6 seconds" in the first embodiment) has elapsed since the ball started to win the special figure winning opening 77a and 78a and "Slump effect" was started, The ball held in the holding device 73 is made to win the dummy winning opening 75, and a holding symbol is displayed as a dummy holding display. Then, every time one effect unit (“Pseudo-sequence” effect) of a series of “slump effects” ends, the execution symbol is erased, and the holding symbol, which is a dummy holding display, is moved to the execution symbol and moved. By starting one effect unit in the next “slump effect” based on the executed symbol, it is as if one effect unit in the “slump effect” is completed as if the variable effect was completed once. Perform the production. With such a configuration, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, and the dynamic of the third symbol is changed by the third symbol display device 81. By reducing the number of situations in which a special effect is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting up and to improve the interest in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 have the same number of prize balls of three. With such a configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special figure winning opening 77a or 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based on the number of paid out prize balls alone. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is a fluctuating effect in the “normal state” or a “slump effect in the“ slump state ”based on the number of paid-out balls only. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and getting up in the game even when performing a "slump effect" that is performed for a longer time than the actual variable effect. can do.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a. A large winning opening solenoid for opening / closing drive to the front side, a solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid for an electric accessory for driving the electric accessory 79, and a holding device solenoid 73f provided in the holding device 73 described above are connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  As described above, the holding device solenoid 73f provided in the holding device 73 moves the lock piece 73e from the rear wall 73d (see FIG. 5) to the inside of the passage of the holding device 73 (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) in the off state, as described above. This is a drive mechanism for bringing the lock piece 73e into the rear wall 73d in the ON state while making it protrude.

  When the lock piece 73e driven by the holding device solenoid 73f projects from the rear wall 73d (that is, when the holding device solenoid 73f is off), the holding ball holding portion 73b is held by the holding portion lock portion 73e1 of the lock piece 73e. (See FIG. 5) is prevented from rotating downward, and the state in which the ball is retained in the retaining device 73 is maintained. On the other hand, when the lock piece 73e driven by the holding device solenoid 73f is immersed in the rear wall 73d (that is, when the holding device solenoid 73f is on), the holding ball holding portion by the holding portion lock portion 73e1 of the lock piece 73e. Since there is no support below the retaining ball 73b, the downward rotation of the retaining ball retaining portion 73b is allowed, and the ball retained in the retaining ball retaining portion 73b flows down to the downstream side of the retaining device 73. Flows into the dummy winning opening 75.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and a reserved ball detection switch provided in the reservation device 73. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The retaining ball detection switch 73g is an optical detection switch that detects whether a sphere exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element as described above, and the sphere exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element. When it is detected, an ON signal is output to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when it is detected that no sphere exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element, an off signal is output to the MPU 201. Therefore, the MPU 201 can recognize whether or not a ball is held in the holding device 73 based on the detection output of the held ball detection switch 73g.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect or continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the notice effect.

  The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. In the first embodiment, the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to transmit and receive commands to and from each other.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the back image of the “super reach” effect mode and the like, and the display based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed on the display control device 114 by the third symbol. Instruct the display device 81 to display.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation effect of the third symbol and “ Slump effect ", which controls a continuous notice effect.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Here, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 221 as well as fixed value data such as a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a pending change table. 222e and a slump effect table 222f are stored at least. Of these tables 222a to 222f, the tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. is there.

  The sound ramp control device 113 obtains a large hit random number counter C1, a large hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b in response to a start winning prize in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the reserved ball count command. Based on each value of the counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, a hold display setting process (see FIG. 38), which is a prefetch process, is executed. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a hold display setting process, which is also a prefetch process, based on the dummy hold command transmitted by the main control device 110 in accordance with the winning of the ball into the dummy winning opening 75.

  Then, as a result of the pending display setting process (see FIG. 38), the effect of the pending variable effect or “slump effect” that is the target of the prefetching process is determined (whether or not a jackpot is determined). , "Reach display", etc.) before executing the variable effect or the "slump effect" to determine the execution of various effects, or to refer to the hold change table 222e for "hold change". The control for determining the effect content (and the execution timing (timing)) of the “notification” is executed.

  In addition, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives a slump command (described later) indicating that the “slump state” has been started from the main control device 110, and receives a fluctuating pattern command thereafter, the slump effect table 222f , The control relating to the “slump effect” is executed.

  The details of the hold change table 222e and the slump effect table 222f will be described later.

  The RAM 223 includes a change start flag 223a, a sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, a pending change counter 223d, a reserved display information storage area 223e, a sub-slump flag 223f, a slump effect timer 223g, and a slump effect storage area 223h. , A suspension information storage area 223i and an execution information storage area 223j.

  The variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that a variation effect should be started in the ON state. The change start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1507 in FIG. 40). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect or “slump effect” is set on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1602 in FIG. 42).

  When the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, when there is a fluctuating effect or “slump effect” in standby, the fluctuating effect or “slump effect” in standby. Is performed (see FIG. 42).

  The sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), like the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the variable effect that are suspended in the main control device 110. That is, the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is configured so as to count only the number of times the variable effect is actually held, and not to count the number of executions of the effect unit of “Slump effect” 1.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the retained number of balls with the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b. I have.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of retained balls of the variable effect to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and adds the value of the retained ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110. In this case, when receiving the reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110, the value after addition of reserved ball number counter 203a of main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect that has been retained) is stored in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37).

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110, and Accordingly, when the mode of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1613 in FIG. 42). As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the holding ball number counter 203a. The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a.

  The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved symbol and the execution symbol on the third symbol display device 81 together with the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c described later. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37) or receives the dummy reserved command. The value of the dummy pending ball number counter 223c is updated based on the value of a slump effect timer 223g described later (see S1207 in FIG. 37 or S1113 in FIG. 36), and the sub-routine is changed in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. At the timing when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is updated (see S1613 in FIG. 42), the value of the stored or updated sub reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c described later are displayed. In order to notify the control device 114, a display pending ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Shin (refer S1615 in S1304 or Figure 42 of FIG 38).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub reserved ball number counter 223b and the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, The reserved symbol corresponding to the value and the executed symbol indicating one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6B). Control the drawing of the image.

  As described above, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, in a game state other than the “slump state”, that is, in the “normal state”, the number of pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 is also controlled by the main control. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the retained balls for which the variable effect is suspended.

  The dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has won the dummy winning opening 75 in the "slump state". That is, the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is configured to count only the reserved ball number of one rendering unit of “Slump production”, and not to count the reserved ball number of the variable production.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) based on the sum of the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c and the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b. In the display of the holding symbol and the execution symbol, if not in the "slump state", the execution of the variable effect and the number of remaining executions are indicated, while when the "slump effect" in the "slump state" is executed, a series of It is configured to indicate the execution of a plurality of effect units and the remaining number of executions in the “slump effect”.

  Upon receiving the dummy hold command transmitted from main controller 110, sound ramp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of dummy hold ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 37). Also, the sound ramp control device 113 ends the “first effect” (ie, the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation”), which is the first effect unit of “slump effect”. At the timing, when the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is a value larger than “0”, the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (see S1113 in FIG. 36).

  That is, when the “slump effect” is started in the “slump state” based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, “6” from the start of the “first effect” in the “slump effect”. After “sec”, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released toward the dummy winning opening 75 and wins the dummy winning opening 75. Then, when detecting the winning of the ball in the dummy winning opening 75, the main control device 110 transmits a dummy hold command to the audio lamp control device 113. The sound ramp control device 113 receives the dummy hold command from the main control device 110 at a stage when about “6 seconds” have elapsed from the start of the “first effect” in the “slump effect”, and based on the reception, the number of dummy hold balls The value of the counter 223c is incremented by one. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display reserved ball number command based on the sum of the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c and the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b, and displays the display control device 114. Send to

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 measures the timing at which one rendering unit ends from the start of the “slump rendering”, that is, the timing at which one “gasse pseudo-ren” rendering ends, with a slump rendering timer 223g described later, At the timing when the "gase pseudo-run" effect of 1 ends (according to the value of a slump effect timer 223g described later), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1. Then, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display reserved ball number command based on the sum of the value of the subtracted dummy reserved ball number counter 223c and the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b, and displays the display control device 114. Send to

  As described above, when the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the retained ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub reserved ball number counter 223b and the dummy reserved The reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223c and the executed symbol indicating the fluctuating effect or “slump effect” being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6B). Control the drawing of the image.

  With this configuration, the number of reserved symbols larger than the number of reserved balls in the actual variable effect can be displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B), and the actual variable effect is executed. Even when the “Slump effect” is performed a greater number of times, consistency between each effect unit of the “Slump effect” and the reserved symbol can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the effect in which the lottery was performed without any inconsistency in the effects was performed more than the actual number of times of the variable effects.

  Note that the value of the dummy pending ball number counter 223c is configured to be incremented only by one in a series of “slump effects”, and to be decremented by one with the execution of one effect unit in the “slump effects”. Is configured. That is, the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is set to "1" at the maximum with a series of "slump effects", and is not set to a value of "2" or more.

  The hold change counter 223d is a counter for randomly selecting whether to execute “hold change notice” in the hold symbol and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, the display color of the pending symbol and the execution symbol is changed from white, which is a normal display mode, to “blue”, a blue display mode, and a green display mode, as “preliminary change notice”. Or “red” in a red display mode.

  As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 according to the pending ball number command received from the main control device 110, The prefetching process can be executed based on the random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the pre-reading process based on the pending ball number command, the effect of the variable effect corresponding to the pending ball number command is grasped, and “suspension change notice” is performed by the pending change counter 223d and the pending change table 222e based on the produced mode. Whether or not is drawn.

  Further, based on the dummy hold command received from main controller 110, voice lamp control device 113 can execute a pre-reading process, similarly to the case where the hold ball count command is received. In the pre-reading process based on the dummy hold command, it is determined whether the “slump effect” to be executed is correct or not, and whether the “hold change notice” is performed by referring to the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e based on the match. Will be drawn. With such a configuration, the “suspension change notice” is executed even for the pending symbols related to the “slump effect”, and the effects can be enriched in variations.

  The hold change counter 223d is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1118 in FIG. 36) of the main process of the sound ramp control device 113, and the maximum value (Eg, “99” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 99”), and then returns to “0”. The value of the pending change counter 223d is updated (for example, 1 is added) once (see S1117 in FIG. 36) each time the main processing loops once.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a pending ball number command or a dummy pending command is received from the main control device 110, a later-described pending display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. The effect of the fluctuation effect indicated or the “slump effect” indicated by the dummy hold command is grasped, and based on the grasped contents, the value of the suspension change counter 223d and the suspension change table 222e are referred to, Whether or not to execute "change notice" and the display mode are determined. Then, the execution availability and the display mode of the determined “holding change notice” are stored in the holding display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c. You. The details of the hold display information storage area 223e will be described later.

  Here, the hold change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the pending change table 222e. When receiving the hold ball count command or the dummy hold command from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the hold change table 222e based on the value of the hold change counter 223d at that time, and executes the “hold change Whether or not to perform “notification” and a change color (display mode) of “pending change notification” are determined. As shown in FIG. 18, the hold change table 222e is grouped based on the success or failure of the effect to be executed and the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, for the `` slump effect '' at the time of the loss, for the `` non-reach '' effect mode at the time of the loss, for the `` normal reach '' effect mode at the time of the loss, and for the `` super reach '' at the time of the loss, For "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, for "slump production" at the time of big hit, for "normal reach" production mode at the time of big hit, for "super reach" production mode at the time of big hit, and at the time of "big special" The “reach” effect mode and the “special fluctuation” effect mode at the time of the big hit are classified. Then, the possible values of the pending change counter 223d are respectively associated with the divided groups.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of “green” of the “pending change notice” is an effect mode including any “reach display” (that is, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” In the case of a production mode, a "special reach" production mode, or a "slatch production" "reach element" or a production mode in which "big hit display" occurs (for example, a "special fluctuation" production mode) Is configured to be selected. In other words, as the "hold change notice", when the hold symbol or the execution symbol of the display mode of "green" is displayed, at least one of the variable effect or the "slump effect" corresponding to the hold symbol or the execution symbol is displayed. It is configured to determine that an effect mode including “reach display” is executed. With this configuration, when a hold symbol having a display mode of "green" appears as "hold change notice", the player is convinced that at least "reach display" in which a jackpot may occur is executed. Until the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” corresponding to the reserved symbol is started, the player's mood can be enhanced based on the sense of expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of “red” of the “pending change notice” is only in the case of the “super reach” effect mode, the “special reach” effect mode, or the “special fluctuation” effect mode. It is configured to be selected. In other words, when a pending symbol or an execution symbol in the display mode of "red" is displayed as the "pending change notice", in the variable effect or the "slump effect" corresponding to the pending symbol or the executing symbol, "super reach" It is configured such that it is determined that the “effect mode”, “special reach” effect mode, or “special fluctuation” effect mode is executed. With this configuration, when a hold symbol having a display mode of "red" appears as "hold change notice", the player is convinced that an effect mode in which a jackpot is likely to be executed will be executed. Until the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” corresponding to the reserved symbol is started, the mood of the player can be raised based on the expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the hold change table 222e, for the "slump effect" at the time of the loss, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol as the "hold change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Only one display mode is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the hold change counter 223d is associated with the display mode. That is, in the case of "slump effect" at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is selected without omission. In the first embodiment, when “None” in which the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol does not change is selected, the display state of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol remains “white”, and the “hold” symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol or the execution symbol. Notice of change "is not executed.

  In other words, in the "slump effect" at the time of the loss, the display pattern of "blue" changing to blue, "green" changing to green, and "red" changing to red in the color of the pending symbol or the execution symbol Is not associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d so that is not selected.

  The first reason is that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is “green” or “red” in the “preliminary change notice”, the reserved symbol is Alternatively, the specification is such that it is determined that any “reach display” is executed in the fluctuation effect indicated by the executed symbol. For this reason, in the "slump effect" at the time of losing, which does not necessarily mean that the "reach display" is executed, despite the display of the hold symbol or the execution symbol of the display mode of "green" or "red", If the "reach display" is not executed in the "slump effect" corresponding to the reserved symbol or the executed symbol, there is a possibility that the effect content may be inconsistent and confuse the player.

  Therefore, in the holding symbol or the execution symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of the loss, the holding symbol or the execution symbol of the display mode of "none (white)" in which no inconsistency occurs even if the "reach display" is not executed is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy to understand without causing unnecessary confusion to the player.

  Further, as a second reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the “slump state”, the variable effect acquired based on the winning of the ball at the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a is “reach display”. In the case of the effect mode including the ball, the ball held in the holding device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, so that the holding symbol or the execution symbol as the dummy holding display is not displayed. At a timing when a ball is likely to enter the ball at 75), the display mode of the “pending change notice” is increased by one rank (for example, the display mode of “none” is changed to the display mode of “blue”). I have. Therefore, if the highest display mode (that is, the display mode of “red”) is selected as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol, the display mode cannot be raised by one rank, and There may be inconsistencies in the content. When the display mode of “blue” changes to the display mode of “green”, or when the display mode of “green” changes to the display mode of “red”, the big hit expectation of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol is expected. There is a possibility that the player may excessively expect a jackpot despite the loss of the "reach display".

  Therefore, in the hold symbol or the execution symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of the loss, even if the display mode is raised by one rank, the display mode of the "blue" does not determine "reach display", and It doesn't overestimate the expectation of the jackpot. For this reason, by displaying a reserved symbol or an execution symbol in a display mode of "none (white)" in which there is no inconsistency in the content of the rendering, it is possible to provide a rendering that is easy to understand without causing unnecessary confusion to the player. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of effect units are executed in the “slump effect”, but the “hold change notice” of the “slump effect” is a hold symbol or a hold symbol corresponding to the plurality of effect units. The display mode of the execution symbol is configured to be determined collectively. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform a lottery of “hold change notice” for each effect unit of “slump effect”, and to simplify the control regarding “hold change notice” at the time of “slump effect”. This makes it easy to create a program and reduces the processing load.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the "hold change notice" in the "slump effect" at the time of the loss is "0 to 99" with respect to the display mode of "none". I have. In addition, since no value is assigned to the display modes of “blue”, “green”, and “red”, they are described as “−”.

  That is, when the “slump effect” at the time of the loss is selected, the display mode of “None” in the “pending change notice” is 100%, the display mode of “blue”, “green”, and “red” is 0%, Is set to be selected at the ratio of

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected at the time of the “slump effect” at the time of the loss, only the display mode of “none” is selected, and the “hold change” is displayed only when the display mode of the hold symbol or the execution symbol is raised by one rank. The "notice" is generated, and the "hold change notice" itself is hardly generated.

  In the hold change table 222e, the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is set to "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol as "hold change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). , And “blue” that changes to blue are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the hold change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

  It should be noted that the value of the hold change counter 223d is not associated with the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of loss, so that the “green” and “red” display modes are not selected. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol is “green” or “red” in the “pending change notice”, the reserved symbol or This is because the specification is such that it is determined that an effect mode including any of “reach display” is executed in the variable effect indicated by the execution symbol. Therefore, in the “non-reach” effect mode in which no “reach display” is executed, the “green” or “red” display mode of “pending change notice” is set so as not to be selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is “0 to 98” for the display mode of “none”, “99” is displayed for the display mode of “blue”. In addition, since no value is assigned to the display modes of “green” and “red”, the display mode is described as “−”.

  That is, when the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of loss is selected, 99% of the display mode is “none” for “preliminary change notice”, 1% is the display mode of “blue”, and “green” and “red”. Is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of “none” is easily selected (99%), and the “hold change notice” itself is unlikely to occur. It is set.

  In the pending change table 222e, three display modes of “None”, “blue”, and “green” of “pending change notice” are prepared so as to be selectable as the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss. Is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d. In the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss, the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode does not appear. For this reason, the value of the hold change counter 223d is not associated so that the display mode of "red" is not selected.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 79”, “ "80-89" for the "blue" display mode and "90-99" for the "green" display mode. Since no value is assigned to “red”, it is described as “−”.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of “none” in “preliminary change notice” is 80%, the display mode of “blue” is 10%, and the display mode of “green” is The display mode of “10%” and “red” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of loss, the display mode of “none” is easily selected (80%), but the “blue” display mode is more effective than the “non-reach” production mode at the time of loss. Is set to be easily selected (1% → 20%). In addition, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss, a display mode of “green” which is not selected in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of loss is selected. Therefore, it can be said that the "hold change notice" is more easily executed when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed than when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed.

  In the suspension change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" of "suspension change notice" are prepared to be selectable for the "super reach" presentation mode at the time of loss. The value of the hold change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is “0 to 19” for the display mode of “none”, "20-79" for the "blue" display mode, "80-89" for the "green" display mode, and "90-99" for the "red" display mode.

  That is, when the “Super Reach” production mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of “None” for “Preliminary change notice” is 20%, the display mode of “Blue” is 60%, and the display mode of “Green” Is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the display mode of “red” is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Therefore, in the “preliminary change notice” selected in the “super-reach” effect mode at the time of a loss, a setting (20% → 60%) in which the “blue” display mode is more easily selected than the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of a loss ). Further, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “super-reach” effect mode at the time of loss, a “red” display mode not selected in the “non-reach” effect mode and the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss is selected. It is set. On the other hand, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "super reach" production mode at the time of the loss, the display mode of "none" is selected than the "non-reach" production mode at the time of the loss or the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the loss The setting is difficult (99% or 80% → 20%). Therefore, in the case where the “super-reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is performed, compared with the case where the “non-reach” effect mode or the “normal-reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is performed, the “hold change notice” is easily executed. It can be said that there is.

  In addition, in the `` super-reach '' production mode at the time of losing, the `` hold change notice '' is selected as compared with the case where the `` non-reach '' production mode or the `` normal reach '' production mode at the time of losing is performed. The display mode of “red” is configured to be easily selected. As described above, the “super reach” production mode is a production mode in which the “big hit display” is more likely to appear than the “normal reach” production mode, and thus “green” or “red” as the “hold change notice” In the stage where the display mode of “appears” appears, it is foreseen that a “super reach” effect mode in which “big hit display” can be expected will occur, and the player can have a sense of expectation for “big hit display”. Can enhance the interest of the people.

  In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" of "hold change notice" are prepared to be selectable as the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss. The value of the hold change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is “0 to 9” for the display mode of “none”, "10-59" for the "blue" display mode, "60-79" for the "green" display mode, and "80-99" for the "red" display mode.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss is selected, 10% of the display mode is “none” for the “preliminary change notice”, 50% is the display mode of “blue”, and “green” is the display mode. Is set at a ratio of 20%, and the display mode of “red” is selected at a ratio of 20%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “special reach” production mode at the time of the loss, the display mode of “green” or “red” is more easily selected than the “super reach” production mode at the time of the loss (each 10% → 20%). In addition, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “special reach” production mode at the time of the loss, the “non-reach” production mode and the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the loss are not selected as in the “super reach” production mode. The display mode of “red” is selected. On the other hand, in the `` special reach '' production mode at the time of the loss, the `` hold change notice '' is selected, the `` non-reach '' production mode at the time of the loss, the `` normal reach '' production mode at the time of the loss or the `` super reach '' production mode The display mode of “none” is set to be difficult to select (99%, 80% or 20% → 10%). Therefore, when the "special reach" production mode at the time of the loss is performed, compared to the case where the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode or the "super reach" production mode at the time of the loss, the "hold change notice" is performed. Is easy to execute.

  In addition, the `` hold change notice '' selected at the time of the `` special reach '' production mode at the time of the loss is compared with the case of performing the `` non-reach '' production mode, the `` normal reach '' production mode, and the `` super reach '' production mode at the time of the loss. Thus, the display mode of "green" or "red" is easily selected. As described above, the “special reach” production mode is a production mode in which the “big hit display” is more likely to appear than the “normal reach” production mode and the “super reach” production mode, At the stage where the "green" or "red" display mode appears, foresee that a "special reach" effect mode, which is the "reach display" in which the "big hit display" can be expected, will occur. The player can have a sense of expectation of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the hold change table 222e, for the "slump effect" at the time of the jackpot, three display modes of "none", "blue", and "green" of "hold change notice" are prepared so as to be selectable. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated therewith. Since no value is assigned to the display mode of “red”, it is described as “−”.

  That is, when the “slump effect” at the time of the big hit is selected, the “holding change notice” is “none” in a display mode of 10%, the “blue” display mode is 80%, and the “green” display mode is 10%. The display mode of% and “red” is set so as to be selected at a rate of 0%, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the display mode of “red” is not selected.

  This is similar to the case where “Slump effect” at the time of losing is selected, and in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is obtained based on the winning of the ball to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the “Slump state”. In the case where the performed fluctuation effect is an effect mode including “reach display”, since the ball held in the holding device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, a held symbol or an execution symbol is displayed as a dummy held display. Instead, the display mode of the “pending change notice” is raised by one rank (for example, the display mode of “none” is changed to the display mode of “blue”). Therefore, if the highest display mode (that is, the display mode of “red”) is selected as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol, the display mode cannot be raised by one rank, and There may be inconsistencies in the content. Therefore, in the holding symbol or the execution symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of the loss, even if the display mode is increased by one rank, the display mode other than the highest level which does not cause inconsistency in the effect content (that is, "none (white)") , "Blue" or "green" display patterns or execution symbols are displayed so as not to cause unnecessary confusion for the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the "hold change notice" in the "slump effect" at the time of the big hit is "0-9" and "blue" for the display mode of "none". "And" 90-99 "for the display mode of" green ". Since no value is assigned to the display mode of “red”, it is described as “−”.

  That is, when the “slump effect” at the time of the big hit is selected, the “holding change notice” is “none” in a display mode of 10%, the “blue” display mode is 80%, and the “green” display mode is 10%. The display mode of% and “red” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the “holding change notice” selected at the time of the “slump effect” at the time of the big hit, the display mode of “blue” or “green” which is not selected at the “slump effect” at the time of the loss is set. On the other hand, in the “hold change notice” selected at the time of the “slump effect” at the time of the jackpot, the display mode of “none” is more difficult to be selected than the “slump effect” at the time of the loss (100% → 10%). I have. Therefore, it can be said that, when the “slump effect” at the time of the big hit is performed, the “suspension change notice” is more easily executed than when the “slump effect” at the time of the loss.

  In addition, in the “hold change notice” selected at the time of the “slump effect” at the time of the big hit, the display mode of “blue” or “green” that is not selected at the “slump effect” at the time of the loss is configured to be selected. . Therefore, by executing the “slump effect” after the “blue” or “green” display mode appears as the “hold change notice”, it is foreseen that the “big hit display” will occur, and the “big hit display” The player can have a sense of expectation of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as described above, the “slump effect” “hold change notice” determines collectively the display pattern of the hold symbol or the execution symbol corresponding to each of the plurality of effect units. It is configured to be. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform the lottery of the “holding change notice” for each of a plurality of rendering units in a series of “slump effects”, and the control regarding the “holding change notice” at the time of the “slump effect” can be simplified. This makes it easy to create a program and reduces the processing load. In addition, when a “slump effect” of a jackpot is performed, when a lottery of “holding change notice” is won, “holding change notice” may occur continuously in a plurality of holding symbols or execution symbols. Therefore, if a "hold notice" or the like does not occur in the effect element corresponding to the previous hold symbol due to the occurrence of "hold change notice" in a plurality of hold symbols or execution symbols, the "big hit" in the next effect element It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for "display", and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are prepared to be selectable for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of the jackpot. Is associated with the value of the hold change counter 223d.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the jackpot is “0 to 9”, “ "10-19" for the "blue" display mode, "20-49" for the "green" display mode, and "50-99" for the "red" display mode.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the jackpot is selected, the “hold change notice” is 10% in the display mode of “none”, the display mode of “blue” is 10%, and the display mode of “green” is It is set so that the display mode of 30% and “red” are selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the “red” display mode that is not selected in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the loss is set. On the other hand, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the jackpot, the display mode of “none” is more difficult to be selected than the “normal reach” production mode at the time of loss (80% → 10%). Has become. Therefore, it can be said that the “hold change notice” is more easily executed when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is performed than when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is performed.

  In addition, in the “hold change notice” selected at the time of the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the jackpot, the display mode of “green” or “red” is selected as compared with the case where the “normal reach” production mode at the time of loss is performed. The display mode is set so that the display mode of “red” which is not selected in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss is selected. Therefore, after the display mode of “red” appears as “preliminary change notice”, the variable effect does not evolve into the “super reach” effect mode in the target variable effect, and the variable effect ends only in the “normal reach” effect mode. In this case, "big hit display" is determined at that time. The display mode of “red” of “reservation change notice” is configured to be easily selected in the “super reach” production mode or the “special reach” production mode, and therefore, the player sets the “red” When the display mode is recognized, the occurrence of the “super reach” rendering mode or the like in which the “super reach” rendering element occurs after the “normal reach” rendering element is performed is foreseen. However, contrary to the prediction, by making the "big hit display" appear in the effect element of "normal reach", a surprising effect can be performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the effect element of “normal reach” is executed in a state where the display mode of “red” is appearing, the variable effect ends with the effect element of “normal reach”, and the display becomes “big hit display”. Therefore, during the execution of the “normal reach” effect element, the player does not develop into the “super reach” effect element, etc. Can enhance the interest of the people.

  In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are prepared to be selectable for the "super reach" presentation mode at the time of the jackpot. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the value.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the jackpot is “0-9” for the display mode of “none”, "10-19" for the "blue" display mode, "20-59" for the "green" display mode, and "60-99" for the "red" display mode.

  In other words, when the “Super Reach” production mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of “None” for “Hold change notice” is 10%, the display mode of “blue” is 10%, and the display mode of “Green” Is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the display mode of “red” is selected at a rate of 40%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “super reach” production mode at the time of the jackpot, the display mode of “green” or “red” is more easily selected than the “super reach” production mode at the time of loss (each 10% → 40%). That is, even in the same “Super Reach” production mode, the selection rate of “Hold change notice” is changed between the time of the loss and the time of the jackpot, and particularly, the display mode of “green” or “red” is lost at the time of the jackpot. It is configured to be easier to select. Then, after displaying the “green” or “red” display mode, by executing the “super reach” production mode in which “big hit display” can be expected from the “normal reach” production mode, the “hold change notice” Together with the display content, the player can have a sense of expectation for the "big hit display", and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are prepared so as to be selectable for the "special reach" production mode at the time of the jackpot. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated therewith.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the jackpot is “0-9” for the display mode of “none”, "10-29" for the "blue" display mode, "30-69" for the "green" display mode, and "70-99" for the "red" display mode.

  That is, when the “Special Reach” production mode at the time of the jackpot is selected, the display mode of “None” for “Preliminary change notice” is 10%, the display mode of “Blue” is 20%, and the display mode of “Green” Is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the display mode of “red” is selected at a rate of 30%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected at the time of the “special reach” production mode at the time of the jackpot, the display mode of “green” or “red” is more easily selected than the “special reach” production mode at the time of the loss (each 20% → 40% or 30%). That is, even in the same “special reach” production mode, the selectivity of “holding change notice” is changed between the time of the loss and the time of the jackpot, and particularly, the display mode of “green” or “red” is lost at the time of the jackpot. It is configured to be easier to select. Then, after displaying the “green” or “red” display mode, by executing the “special reach” rendering mode in which “big hit display” can be expected from the “normal reach” rendering mode or the “super reach” rendering mode. In combination with the display content of the "preliminary change notice", the player can have a sense of expectation for the "big hit display", and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are prepared so as to be selectable for the "special fluctuation" effect mode at the time of the jackpot. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the value.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the association between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “special change” effect mode at the time of the jackpot is “0 to 69” for the display mode of “none”, "70-79" for the "blue" display mode, "80-89" for the "green" display mode, and "90-99" for the "red" display mode.

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode at the time of the jackpot is selected (when the “2R probability change jackpot” is won), the display mode of “no change” in “hold change notice” is 70%, and “blue” is displayed. The setting is such that the display mode is selected in a ratio of 10%, the display mode of “green” is 10%, and the display mode of “red” is 10%.

  Therefore, in the “suspension change notice” selected in the “special fluctuation” effect mode at the time of the jackpot, the display mode of “none” is easily selected (70%), and “blue”, “green”, or “red” Are also set to be selected equally (10%), so that "preliminary change notice" is unlikely to occur, but when they occur, they are set so that they are almost equally selected.

  In this way, the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, grasps whether or not the variable effect indicated by the reserved ball number command is appropriate and the effect mode, and based on the hit / fail and the effect mode. Thus, it is configured to determine whether or not “hold change notice” is executed and a display mode for the hold symbol that is the main hold display. By configuring in this way, before the execution of the fluctuation effect, the result of the fluctuation effect is suggested to the player by a holding symbol, and until the fluctuation effect is executed, the fluctuation effect suspended by the player is performed. By predicting whether or not a jackpot will be achieved, the interest of the game can be increased.

  In addition, when receiving the dummy hold command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the same look-ahead processing as to the case where the hold ball number command is received, with respect to the hold symbol that is the dummy hold display. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute “pending change notice” and a display mode. With this configuration, in a series of “slump effects”, before executing the effect element corresponding to the dummy hold display, the result of the effect element is suggested to the player by the hold symbol, and the effect element is executed. In the meantime, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by predicting whether or not one effect unit of the “slump effect” held by the player will be a big hit.

  Furthermore, by performing the same “pending change notice” between the variable production and the “slump production”, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the variable production and the “slump production”, and the “slump production” is executed and acquired. Even if the dynamic effect time of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the variable time of the variable effect, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variable effect and the “slump effect”. Thus, the effect of executing the “slump effect” can be maintained.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The hold display information storage area 223e is an area for storing the hold change information indicating the display mode of the “hold change notice” of the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display region Db (see FIG. 6B). is there.

  Here, the details of the hold display information storage area 223e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold display information storage area 223e. As shown in FIG. 19, the hold display information storage area 223e has six areas of an execution hold display area 223e0 and first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5. The execution suspension display area 223e0 and the first to fifth suspension display areas 223e1 to 223e5 (hereinafter, the execution suspension display area 223e0 and the first to fifth suspension display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are referred to as “each suspension display area 223e0 to 223e5”. ) Stores the presence or absence of a variable effect or a “slump effect” and hold change information indicating a display mode of “hold change notice”.

  The execution pending display area 223e0 is an area for storing the pending change information corresponding to the currently executed variable effect or “slump effect”. Further, the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are areas for storing change effects corresponding to up to five held change effects and “slump effect”, respectively.

  Specifically, the execution suspension display area 223e0 is an area corresponding to the currently executed variable effect or “slump effect”. In addition, the first suspended display area 223e1 is an area corresponding to the temporally suspended fluctuation production or “Slump production” among the suspended fluctuation production or “Slump production”. Furthermore, the second suspended display area 223e2 is an area corresponding to the second-oldest temporally suspended floating effect or "Slump effect" of the suspended variable effect or "Slump effect". Further, the third hold display area 223e3 is an area corresponding to the third-time-oldest fluctuating effect or “Slump effect” of the held fluctuating effect or “Slump effect”. Furthermore, the fourth suspended display area 223e4 is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest temporally suspended floating effect or "Slump effect" of the suspended floating effect or "Slump effect". In addition, the fifth suspended display area 223e5 is an area corresponding to the fifth-oldest temporally suspended floating effect or "Slump effect" of the suspended floating effect or "Slump effect".

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113, upon receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, grasps whether or not the variable effect indicated by the retained number-of-balls command is appropriate and the effect mode. On the basis of this, a determination is made as to whether or not a “hold change notice” can be executed and a display mode for the hold symbol that is the final hold display is determined and stored. In addition, when receiving the dummy hold command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the same look-ahead processing as to the case where the hold ball number command is received, with respect to the hold symbol that is the dummy hold display. It is configured to determine and store whether or not to execute “pending change notice” and a display mode.

  Specifically, at the time of receiving the reserved ball number command, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is updated based on the reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command. The value of the counter 223c is updated. Then, based on the pending change table 222e and the value of the pending change counter 223d, the pending change information is extracted to determine the display mode of the "preliminary change notice", and the extracted suspended change information is updated as the updated sub reserved ball. The value is stored in any of the first to fifth reserved display areas 223e1 to 223e5 corresponding to the sum of the value of the number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c.

  In addition, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, or recognizes that it is the start timing of the “slump effect”, The shift processing is executed in the hold display areas 223e0 to 223e5.

  In other words, the effect unit of the suspended fluctuation effect or “Slump effect” is reduced by one, and the execution of the fluctuation effect or “Slump effect” suspended first in time is started. The pending change information stored in the first pending display area 223e1 corresponding to the fluctuating effect or “Slump effect” is changed to the execution pending display area 223e0 corresponding to the fluctuating effect being executed (starting execution) or the “Slump effect”. Move to

  Also, the hold change information stored in the second hold display area 223e2 is moved to the first hold display area 223e1, and the hold change information stored in the third hold display area 223e3 is moved to the second hold display area 223e2. Then, the hold change information stored in the fourth hold display area 223e4 is moved to the third hold display area 223e3, and the hold change information stored in the fifth hold display area 223e5 is moved to the fourth hold display area 223e4. Let it.

  Accordingly, the execution change display area 223e0 stores the change effect that is being executed (executed), that is, the change effect or the “slump effect”, and the first hold display area 223e1 stores the most temporally. On-hold change information corresponding to the old-pending fluctuating effect or “slump effect” is stored, and the second on-hold display area 223e2 corresponds to the second-oldest fluctuating effect or “slump effect” temporally second. The on-hold change information is stored, and the third on-hold display area 223e3 stores the on-time change information corresponding to the third-time-old fluctuating effect or “slump effect” in the third on-hold display area 223e4. Stores change information corresponding to the fourth-time-oldest fluctuating effect or “slump effect”, and stores the fifth change display area 223e. , The hold changing information corresponding to the temporally fifth variation old is held in the effect or "slump effect" is stored.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the “slump state”, the execution of the variable effect is suspended (that is, “slump effect”), in which the “slump effect” for performing more effect units than the acquired number of executions of the variable effect is executed. 1 ") and the maximum number of suspensions (ie," 4 ") (ie," 6 ", which is the maximum number of executions of each effect unit in a series of" slump effects "), which is greater than the total number (i.e.," 5 "). ) Are provided, and only information relating to the display mode of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol (that is, the pending change information) is stored in each of the reserved display areas 223e0 to 223e5. Then, based on the information stored in each of the reserved display areas 223e0 to 223e5, an execution symbol and a reserved symbol are displayed in the cockpit display region Db (see FIG. 6B). By configuring in this way, by performing more effects than the fluctuation effects actually acquired, the illusion of the player as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained, thereby improving the interest of the game can do. In addition, since the displayed symbols can be displayed while matching the execution symbol and the reserved symbol with respect to the number of the symbols, the dynamic symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 can be lengthened, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. Direction can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The sub-slump flag 223f is a flag for the audio ramp control device 113 to determine whether or not it is in the “slump state”. When the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can determine that it is in the “slump state”. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command related to the variable effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting status of the sub-slump flag 223f, and displays the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Or “slump effect” is executed.

  This sub-slump flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 receives a slump command described later from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON (see S1202 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, when the “Slump effect” (fluctuation effect) is executed for the first time in the “Slump state”, that is, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 with the sub-slump flag 223f turned on, The sub-slump flag 223f is set to off (see S1405 in FIG. 39).

  As described above, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 grasps the “slump state” using the sub-slump flag 223f. Then, when the MPU 221 receives the command related to the variable effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 determines whether to execute the variable effect or the “slump effect” on the third symbol display device 81, The effect control to be executed can be performed based on the determination result.

  The slump effect timer 223g is a timer for measuring an effect time since “Slump effect” was started. The MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 refers to the value of the slump effect timer 223g to grasp the entire effect time of a series of “slump effects”, and the first effect unit after the “slump effect” starts. (That is, “first effect.” Hereinafter, the effect unit of the “slump effect” performed after the “first effect” is referred to as “second effect,” and thereafter the nth (n is a natural number) The effect unit of the “slump effect” is referred to as “n-th effect”.

  The slump effect timer 223g is set to “0” as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the start of the “slump effect”, that is, when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the “slump state”, a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set in the slump effect timer 223g.

  Specifically, when the MPU 221 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 in the “slump state”, that is, in a state where the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is “ It is determined whether or not the variation pattern includes “reach display”. In the case of a variation pattern that does not include “reach display”, an extended time is randomly selected to set an additional effect time to be performed as “slump effect”. Then, a value corresponding to the extended time acquired by the lottery is set in the slump effect timer 223g (see S1408 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern including “reach display”, since it is a relatively long fluctuation pattern including “reach display”, there is no need to perform an additional effect. Is performed, the extended time is not selected by lot, and the value is not set in the slump effect timer 223g (see S1406 in FIG. 39: Yes).

  Next, the MPU 221 adds the fluctuation time of the obtained fluctuation pattern to the value of the slump effect timer 223g regardless of the presence or absence of the “reach display” (see S1410 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g set by the extension time and the fluctuation time, referring to a later-described slump effect table 222f, a "pseudo-response" effect or a "gase pseudo-response" effect in "slump effect" And / or select “development feasibility effect”. The selected “slump effect” is stored in a slump effect storage area 223h described later. The details will be described later.

  Further, during the “Slump effect”, that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than “0”, the MPU 221 performs the “Slump effect” The progress status is determined, and if an effect other than the extended time in the “slump effect” is being performed, the value of the extended time is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

  The reason for performing the above control is that if a new starting prize occurs during a series of “Slump effects”, additional “Slump effects” effect units will be added to the current “Slump effects” effect units. This is because, in order to match each effect element, the extension time set for performing the additional effect element is reset once, and the effect contents of the effect element are newly set. Further, in performing the above control, the reason that the effect is limited to the execution of the effect other than the effect during the extended time is that the effect other than the effect during the extended time, that is, during the effect before the effect based on the extended time. For example, the production of the part corresponding to the acquired extra time is not executed, and even if the extra time is reset and the production content of `` Slump production '' is set again, no conflict occurs in the production content. is there.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern acquired in the “slump state” includes “reach display”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set based on the value of the set slump effect timer 223g. , "0" are cleared (see S1413 in FIG. 39). This is because a fluctuation pattern including “reach display” is performed for a relatively long fluctuation time, and a new prize may be generated during the fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously perform the “slump effect” based on winning in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a thereafter, a fluctuation pattern including “reach display” is executed. In this case, after setting the “slump effect” based on the fluctuation pattern including the “reach display”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is initialized, and “slump state” is used instead of “slump state” until the slump state is entered again. The following effects are performed as "normal state". Also, at this stage, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223g, there is no need to grasp the progress of the “slump effect”, and it is no longer necessary to perform the shift control of the hold symbol including the dummy hold display, The control load on the MPU 221 can be reduced. In the first embodiment, since the fluctuation pattern not including the “reach display” has a maximum execution time of only 15 seconds and ends in a relatively short time, a new start winning prize may occur during that time. Is low, if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect that started first in the “slump state” is a “non-reach” mode that does not include the “reach display”, the “slump state” is maintained and the additional Even if a start winning is generated, an effect corresponding to a series of “slump effects” (ie, an additional “slump effect”) is executed.

  On the other hand, when a value is set in the slump effect timer 223g, that is, when the slump effect timer 223g is a value greater than “0”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is Every time 1 millisecond elapses in the processing (see S1101: Yes in FIG. 36), 1 is subtracted (S1110 in FIG. 36).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of the subtracted slump effect timer 223g becomes a predetermined value (in the first embodiment, a value obtained by subtracting “10000” from the set value), When a reserved symbol that is a dummy reserved display is displayed, that is, when the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is larger than “0”, one rendering unit in a series of “slump renderings” (that is, “gase pseudo”) Assuming that it is the end timing of the “run” effect, the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by one and a shift process is executed in the reserved display information storage area 223e. With this configuration, the start and end of one effect unit in a series of “slump effects” and the shift display of the pending symbol and the execution symbol are displayed while being matched, so that the variable effect is completed once. As a result, it is possible to execute a “slump effect” composed of effect elements having a greater number of times than the number of actual variable effects without a sense of incompatibility.

  The slump effect storage area 223h is an area for storing effect information on the effect contents and stop symbol information on stop symbols for each effect unit (effect element) constituting the entire series of “slump effects”. is there. The MPU 221 determines the effect contents of each effect unit in a series of “slump effects” and a stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) for each effect unit in a series of “slump effects” based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the “slump state”. (Including effect information and stop symbol information) are stored in the slump effect storage area 223h. The effect unit in the “slump effect” refers to a stop display (including a temporary stop display) of each third symbol displayed in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. The same applies to the following.) This means a unit of effect from when the fluctuation is started, when the fluctuation is stopped, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed again in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Here, the details of the slump effect storage area 223h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the slump effect storage area 223h. As shown in FIG. 20, the slump effect storage area 223h has seven storage areas from a first effect area 223h1 to a seventh effect area 223h7.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “slump effect” can be executed from the “slump state” based on the winning winning in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. The fluctuating production based on the winning start is the loss “non-reach (long)” production mode, and “15 seconds” which is the fluctuation time of “production element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ production element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” And the variable production based on the next start winning in the “slump production” is a “special reach” production mode of a jackpot, and the production element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + the production element of “pseudo fluctuation” + The total time of "55 seconds", which is the fluctuation time of the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" + the effect element of "special reach" + the effect element of "re- fluctuation", The best of "Slump production" The production possible time. In the first embodiment, when the “slump effect” is performed, each effect unit is configured to be within “10 seconds”. Therefore, in order to configure a series of “Slump effects” so that a maximum of “70 seconds” of effects can be executed, the slump effect storage area 223h stores the entire series of “Slump effects” (ie, the first effect to the seventh effect). ) Are provided with first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 for storing effect information of seven effect units and stop symbol information, respectively.

  Specifically, the first effect area 223h1 is an area corresponding to the “first effect” executed first in the “slump effect”, and the effect contents of the first effect (“gase pseudo-ren” effect, “ Direction information on any of "simulated continuous production", "development directability" or "reach reach". The same applies hereafter. And the stopped symbol information relating to any of the symbols. The second production area 223h2 is an area corresponding to the “second production” performed after the “first production”, and production information on the production contents of the “second production” and a stop in the production contents. The stop symbol information relating to the symbol is stored. Further, the third production area 223h3 is an area corresponding to the “third production” performed after the “second production”, and production information on the production contents of the “third production” and a stop in the production contents. The stop symbol information relating to the symbol is stored. The fourth production area 223h4 is an area corresponding to the "fourth production" performed after the "third production", and relates to production information on the production contents of the fourth production and the stop symbols in the production contents. The stop symbol information is stored. Further, the fifth production area 223h5 is an area corresponding to the “fifth production” performed after the “fourth production”, and production information on the production contents of the “fifth production” and a stop in the production contents. The stop symbol information relating to the symbol is stored. The sixth production area 223h6 is an area corresponding to the “sixth production” performed after the “fifth production”, and production information on the production contents of the “sixth production” and a stop in the production contents. The stop symbol information relating to the symbol is stored. Further, the seventh production area 223h7 is an area corresponding to the “seventh production” performed after the “sixth production”, and production information on the production contents of the “seventh production” and a stop in the production contents. The stop symbol information relating to the symbol is stored.

  As described above, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the “slump state”, the audio ramp control device 113 sets the value of the slump effect timer 223g and sets the set slump effect timer 223g. , And the slump effect table 222f, the effect status at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command based on the start winning (for example, whether or not the “slump effect” is already being executed, the extended time portion in the “slump effect”, etc.) ) And a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command (that is, whether or not the fluctuation time and the “reach display” are included), determine the effect content of the “slump effect” and the stop symbol, and determine the determined effect. The information on the contents and the stop symbols (ie, the effect information and the stop symbol information) is stored in the slump effect storage area in the order of the effect execution. It is configured to store in the first to seventh effect area 223h1~223h7 of 23h.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24, the slump effect table 222f and the “slump effect” selected based on the slump effect table 222f will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the slump effect table 222f.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a fluctuation effect and a “slump effect” when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the “slump state”, and FIG. FIG. 22B is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variable production and the production time of the “slump production” when the fluctuation production of the “non-reach (long)” production mode is acquired based on the winning, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect and the fluctuation time of the “slump effect” when the fluctuation effect of various reach is acquired based on the winning start in the “slump state”.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a variation effect and a “slump effect” when a “slump effect” is being executed and a variation pattern command is received at a timing during the effect execution other than the effect based on the extended time. FIG. 23 (a) shows a variation effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode based on the winning start during the “slump effect” other than the extended time. FIG. 23B is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production and the production time of the “Slump production”. FIG. 23B shows the timing of various reach based on the start winning in the “Slump production” other than the extension time. It is the timing chart which showed the fluctuating time of the said fluctuating production when the fluctuating production was acquired, and the production time of "Slump production".

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a variation effect and a “slump effect” when the “slump effect” is being executed and a variation pattern command is received at a timing at which the effect based on the extended time is being executed. FIG. 24A shows a case where a fluctuation effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired based on the winning start during the “slump effect” based on the extended time. 24B is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production and the production time of the “Slump production”. FIG. 24B shows the fluctuation of various reach based on the winning start during the “Slump production” based on the extension time. It is the timing chart which showed the fluctuation time of the said fluctuation production when the production was acquired, and the production time of "Slump production".

  As described above, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the “slump state” or the “slump effect”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command. Is set (updated), and with reference to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the slump effect table 222f, the effect contents of "Slump effect" and the stop symbol are determined. As shown in FIG. 21, the slump effect table 222f is divided into groups based on the effect status at the time of receiving the change pattern command, and “Slump effect table 222f” is determined based on the change pattern (change time) based on the change pattern command for each group. The effect contents of the entire "slump effect" are associated with each other.

  Specifically, as the effect state at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command, the “slump state” for the “slump state” and the “slump effect” during the execution of the effect other than the extended time are being executed. It is classified into a "slump effect (except for the extended time)" and a "slump effect (during the extended time)" during which the effect based on the extended time is being performed during the "slump effect". Then, for each of the divided groups, an effect mode based on the received fluctuation pattern command (“non-reach (long)” effect mode, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, or “special reach” For each "effect mode", a series of effect contents of "slump effect" are associated with each other.

  In the first embodiment, if the received fluctuation pattern command indicates the “special fluctuation” effect mode, the “slump effect” is not executed. There is no “slump effect” item corresponding to the “fluctuation” effect mode. In the first embodiment, in the “non-reach” effect mode acquired during the “slump state” or during the execution of the “slump effect”, the number of pending balls for the variable effect is “0” or “1”. Therefore, it is configured to be in a “non-reach (long)” effect mode. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 21, the “slump effect” in the fluctuation pattern including the “pseudo-response” effect and the effect mode of “re-change” merely increases the number of effect elements. The “slump effect” corresponding to the variation pattern excluding the “effect” and the “re-variation” effect mode will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the setting contents of the “slump effect” when the variation pattern command is received during the “slump state” will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 (a), for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected, and “5 seconds” is selected as the extension time. In this case, the total effect time is "20 seconds", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set to "20,000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, "first effect" is set to the first "gasse pseudo-run 1", and "gasse pseudo-run 2" is set to the "second effect". Is set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, an effect element of "gase pseudo-run 1" (that is, an effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + an effect element of "pseudo fluctuation". ) And stop symbol information related to a gassess eye symbol (for example, “788”; the same applies hereinafter). In addition, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information relating to “Gase pseudo-ream 2” and stop symbol information relating to the gaseline eye symbol are stored.

  Then, a “slump effect” is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first and second effect areas 223h1 and 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h (see FIG. 43 (a)) and acquired. The stop symbol of the gassess eye symbol which is the symbol corresponding to the stopped symbol of the fluctuating effect ("non-reach (long)" effect mode is "loss display") is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump" The “effect” ends (see FIG. 43 (f)). If a new starting prize is generated in the special figure prize port 77a, 78a while the "slump effect" is being performed, the state transitions to the "normal state", but no new starting prize is generated. In this case, the “slump state” is set again.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a stage at which approximately "6 seconds" elapses after the execution of the "slump effect" "gase pseudo-run 1" (that is, before the execution of the "gase pseudo-run 2"). In step (stage), the ball held in the holding device 73 described above is configured to win the dummy winning opening 75, and with the winning, a held symbol that is a dummy holding display is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6B )) (See FIG. 43A). With this configuration, it is possible to display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6 (b)) a number of pending symbols that are greater than the number of times of execution of the obtained variable effect, and to calculate the number of times of execution of the obtained variable effect. Even when the “Slump effect” of the number of executions of the many effect units is performed, consistency between the effect unit in the “Slump effect” and the reserved symbols can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the number of effect units in which the winning / rejecting lottery is performed without inconsistency of the effects was greater than the number of obtained variable effects. In the following, when "Pseudo-sequence 1" in "Slump effect" is executed, the same effect and control as in "Pseudo-sequence 1" described above are executed, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each effect unit of a series of “slump effects” is constituted by “10 seconds”, and among them, the effect element of “5 seconds” of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” And the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation". Therefore, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation effect ends (that is, when “15 seconds” have elapsed from winning 1), the effect of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” of “Gase pseudo-ren 2” in “Slump effect” When the element ends, the variation of the third symbol in the left symbol row Z1 is stopped (hereinafter, referred to as “first stop”). That is, the end timing of the fluctuation effect is synchronized with the timing of the first stop of the “pseudo-sequence 2”. Therefore, the stop timing of any third symbol (that is, the third symbol in the left symbol column Z1) of the “slump effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are performed. Stop timing can be synchronized. That is, in the “normal state”, the stop timings of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and the stop timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are synchronized to have a relationship. It is configured. Therefore, in the same manner as the fluctuation effect and the dynamic display in the “normal state” are synchronized, the “slump effect” of the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 also in the “slump state”. Relevance can be given (synchronized), and it is possible to make the player recognize the end of the variable effect even during the execution of the “slump effect”. In the following, the effect and the control are executed such that the first stop timing of the “gase pseudo-run 2” in the “slump effect” is synchronized with the end timing of the variable effect, but the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 (a), for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected, and “10 seconds” is set as the extension time. When selected, the effect total time is “25 seconds”, and “25000” is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. And, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, “first effect” is set to “gase pseudo-run 1”, “second effect” is set to “gase pseudo-run 2”, In the “third effect”, “development possibility effect” corresponding to the remaining effect time of “slump effect” (ie, “5 seconds”) is set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, effect information relating to "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and stop symbol information relating to the gassess chance symbol are stored. In addition, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information relating to “Gase pseudo-ream 2” and stop symbol information relating to the gaseline eye symbol are stored. Further, in the third production area 223h3, production information relating to a production element which is a production element of “production development possibility” and fails to develop into the next production (hereinafter referred to as “development failure”), Stop symbol information relating to the symbol is stored.

  Then, a “slump effect” is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h (see FIGS. 46A to 46E). ), The stop symbol of the gasscene eye symbol corresponding to the acquired stop symbol of the variable effect ("non-reach (long)" effect mode, "loss display") is finally stopped and displayed, A series of “slump effects” ends.

  The effect time of the effect element of the “development feasibility effect” of the development failure as the “third effect” is “5 seconds”, so the “second development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “second development possibility production” of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second production” “gase pseudo ream 2”. The third symbol stopped and displayed with the given gassess chance symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22B, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, the effect total time is “20 seconds” and the slump is “20 seconds”. “20000” is set as the value of the effect timer 223g. Then, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the first “simulated ream 1” is set in the “first effect”, and the effect element of “reach reach” is set in the “second effect”. Is set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, an effect element of "pseudo-run 1" (that is, an effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + an effect element of "pseudo fluctuation". ), And stop symbol information related to a chance symbol (for example, “778”; the same applies hereinafter). In addition, in the second effect area 223h2, the effect information relating to the effect element of “Dochda Reach” and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect (the stop symbol corresponding to the “loss display” or the “big hit display”) are displayed. Corresponding stop symbol. The same applies hereinafter.).

  Then, “slump effect” is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first and second effect areas 223h1 and 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and corresponds to the acquired stop effect of the variable effect. The "losing display" or "big hit display" is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fluctuating effect acquired based on the winning of the ball in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is an effect mode including "reach display". In this case, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy winning opening 75. By configuring in this way, in the "slump effect", a "pseudo ream" effect that does not consume the pending symbol, but a "pseudo ream" effect that consumes the pending symbol is performed. Even if the same number of “Slump effects” are performed, consistency between the number of “Slump effects” effects and the number of pending symbols can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without any inconsistency in the effect.

  In the first embodiment, even if the "slump effect" is won in the "big hit display", in the case of the variable effect including the "reach display", the extended time is not acquired, and the "slump effect" Is the same as the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation effect. That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the “slump effect” are synchronized. Therefore, even if a command (that is, an opening command) related to an effect related to a jackpot (that is, an opening effect) or the like is transmitted from the main control device 110 at the end timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, In the three-symbol display device 81, it is possible to match the end of the "slump effect" with the start of the big hit effect, and it is possible to provide an effect without discomfort from the end of the "slump effect" to the start of the big hit effect. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22B, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, the effect total time is “30 seconds”, “30000” is set as the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, “pseudo-run 1” is set in “first effect”, “pseudo-run 2” is set in “second effect”, The production element of "Which reach" is set in "3 productions".

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, effect information on “simulated ream 1” and stop symbol information on a chance symbol design are stored. In addition, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information relating to “pseudo-ren 2” and stop symbol information relating to a chance symbol symbol are stored. Further, in the third effect area 223h3, effect information relating to the effect element of “Which reach” and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored.

  Then, “Slump effect” is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and corresponds to the acquired stop effect of the variable effect. The "losing display" or "big hit display" is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (b), when the “special reach” effect mode is selected for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, the effect total time is “40 seconds”, “40000” is set as the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, “pseudo-run 1” is set in “first effect”, “pseudo-run 2” is set in “second effect”, The “3 productions” is set to “simulated ream 3”, and the “4th production” is set to the production element of “Which reach”.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, effect information on “simulated ream 1” and stop symbol information on a chance symbol design are stored. In addition, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information relating to “pseudo-ren 2” and stop symbol information relating to a chance symbol symbol are stored. Further, in the third effect area 223h3, effect information on “pseudo consecutive 3” and stop symbol information on a chance symbol symbol are stored. Further, in the fourth effect area 223h4, effect information relating to the effect element of "Which reach" and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored.

  Then, “Slump effect” is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h (see FIG. 44 (a)) and acquired. The "losing display" or the "big hit display" corresponding to the stopped symbol of the fluctuating effect is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effect" ends (see FIG. 44 (f)).

  As described above, when the fluctuation lamp command is received during the “slump state”, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the extension time (including the presence or absence) based on the fluctuation pattern command, and determines the extension time and the fluctuation. Based on the fluctuation time based on the pattern command, the effect time of the entire “slump effect” is set. Then, based on the total production time of the "slump effect", the detailed effect contents of the "slump effect" and each stop symbol are set, and the "slump effect" is executed based on the set contents. I have. With such a configuration, the “slump effect” is performed longer than the obtained fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect, the effect time performed on the third symbol display device 81 is increased, and the effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to reduce situations that are not being performed and prevent the player from getting up.

  Next, referring to FIG. 21 and FIG. 23, the “non-reach (long)” which is executed based on the start winning prize (hereinafter referred to as “prize 1”) to the special figure prize opening 77a, 78a in the “slump state”. ) "Production mode (the" non-reach (long) "production mode executed based on winning 1 is referred to as" non-reach (long) 1 ") and the extension time" 5 seconds "is selected. During the execution of the “slump effect” (that is, the “gase pseudo-run 1” and the “gase pseudo-run 2”) executed when the “Slump effect” is being performed other than the effect based on the extended time, The setting contents of the “slump effect” when a new fluctuation pattern command is received at the timing (that is, the first half of “the pseudo-sequence 1” or “the pseudo-sequence 2”) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23 (a), the effect other than the extended time of the “Slump effect” executed based on the prize 1 is used for “Slump effect (other than the extended time)” in the slump effect table 222f. 23 (in the example of FIG. 23 (a), during “Pseudo-sequence 2”), based on a new starting prize (hereinafter referred to as “prize 2”) to the special figure prize opening 77a, 78a, When a variable effect in the “reach (long)” effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “non-reach (long) 2”) is acquired, “non-reach (long) 2” additionally acquired based on the prize 2 Is "15 seconds", and "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning prize 1, the “slump effect” other than the extended time is being executed, so in performing the additional “slump effect” based on the prize 2, In order to match the production time of the “slump effect” with the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, the extension time set based on the winning prize 1 is once reset, and the effect based on the “slump effect” based on the extension time The effect content of the subsequent “slump effect” is set again for the variable time of the variable effect obtained based on the winning 1 and the winning 2 without executing the element. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value of the extension time set based on the winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). Further, the MPU 221 adds the value of the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2 (that is, “15000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23A, the total effect time of the entire “Slump effect” converted from the start of the first effect element of the “Slump effect” is “30 seconds”, and the “Slump effect” The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g converted from the start is “30000”. Then, as the effect unit of a series of “slump effects” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, “gase pseudo-run 3” is additionally set to “third effect”.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information is stored respectively, at this stage, the effect information relating to the “gasse pseudo-ream 3” and the stop symbol information relating to the gaseline pattern are stored in the third effect area 223h3. Further, the hold symbol corresponding to the effect element of “Pseudo-sequence 3” is displayed in the cockpit display area Db at the timing when the winning 2 occurs.

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h. The stop symbol of the gassess eye symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol ("non-reach (long) 2", so "losing display"), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23 (b), the “Slump effect” executed based on the winning 1 in the “Slump state” for “Slump effect (other than the extended time)” in the slump effect table 222f. In the case where the fluctuation effect of the “normal reach” effect mode is acquired based on the prize 2 during the execution of the effect other than the extension time of ”, the effect time additionally acquired based on the prize 2 is“ 20 seconds ”. Yes, “20,000” is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning 1, the “slump effect” other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the “gase pseudo-ream 2” is being executed). In performing an additional “slump effect” based on the winning prize 2 from that state, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired to match each “slump effect” (FIG. 23 (a) As in the case of (1), the extended time set based on the prize 1 is once reset, and based on the prize 1 and the prize 2, the effect contents of the subsequent "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value of the extended time set based on winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). . In addition, the MPU 221 adds the value of the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2 (that is, “20000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23B, the total production time of the entire “Slump effect” calculated from the start of the “Slump effect” is “35 seconds”, which is calculated from the start of the “Slump effect”. The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g is “35000”. Then, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the “first effect” and the “second effect” (that is, the “gase pseudo ream 1 already performed” and the “gase pseudo ream 1” being executed) 2)), “Development effect” is set as “third effect”, and an effect element of “Which reach” is set as “fourth effect”.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. Therefore, the effect time of the remaining “slump effect” is “15 seconds”. Therefore, first, in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, the effect information relating to the effect element of "Dochda Reach" performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired variable effect are displayed. Information is stored. Then, as the production of the remaining “5 seconds”, in the third production area 223h3, the development to the next production (that is, the production element of “Which Reach”), which is the production element of the “development feasibility production”, is described. The effect information relating to a successful effect (hereinafter referred to as “success in development”) and the stop design information relating to the reach forming symbol indicating that the effect will develop into the next effect are stored.

  The effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect” of the success of the development as the “third effect” is performed for “5 seconds”, so the “second development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “successful development of the second development” of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second performance” of the “gase pseudo ream 2”. The given gath chance pattern is replaced with a reach formation symbol (for example, “788” → “7 ○ 7 (○ is fluctuating)”), and becomes a “fourth production” “deach reach” production element. Develop.

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h. “Loss display” or “big hit display” corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slump effects” ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23 (b), the “Slump effect” executed based on the winning 1 in the “Slump state” for “Slump effect (other than the extended time)” in the slump effect table 222f. In the case where the fluctuation effect of the “super reach” effect mode is acquired based on the prize 2 during the execution of the effect other than the extension time of “”, the effect time additionally acquired based on the prize 2 is “30 seconds” And “30000” is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning 1, the “slump effect” other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the “gase pseudo-ream 2” is being executed). In performing an additional “slump effect” based on the winning prize 2 from the state, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode or a “normal reach” effect mode is acquired to match each “slump effect”. As in the case (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)), the extended time set based on the winning 1 is once reset, and the subsequent “Slump effect” is performed based on the winning 1 and the winning 2 It is configured to reset the contents. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value of the extended time set based on winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). . In addition, the MPU 221 adds the value of the variable time acquired based on the winning prize 2 (that is, “30000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the total effect time of the entire “Slump effect” converted from the start of the “Slump effect” is “45 seconds”, which is converted from the start of the “Slump effect”. The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g is “45000”. Then, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the “first effect” and the “second effect” (that is, the “gase pseudo ream 1 already performed” and the “gase pseudo ream 1” being executed) 2)), “development effect” is set as “third effect”, “pseudo-ren 1” is set as “fourth effect”, and “either one” is set as “fifth effect”. Production element is set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. Therefore, the effect time of the remaining “slump effect” is “25 seconds”. Therefore, first, in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, the effect information relating to the effect element of "Which reach" performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired variable effect Information is stored. Next, as the production of the remaining “15 seconds”, in the fourth production area 223h4, production information on “pseudo ream 1” performed for “10 seconds” and the production element of the next production (that is, “reach reach”) ) Is stored. Then, as the production of the remaining “5 seconds”, the production information on the “expansion feasibility production” of the development success and the development of the next production (that is, “pseudo-ren 1”) are suggested in the third production area 223h3. Stop symbol information relating to the chance symbol to be performed is stored.

  The effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect” of the success of the development as the “third effect” is performed for “5 seconds”, so the “second development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “second development possibility production” of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second production” “gase pseudo ream 2”. The given gas eye chance symbol is replaced with a chance eye symbol (for example, “788” → “778”; see FIGS. 46 (e) and (f)), and to “pseudo ream 1” which is the “fourth effect”. (See FIG. 47 (c)).

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fifth effect areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump effect storage area 223h. The "losing display" or the "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23 (b), the “Slump effect” executed based on the winning 1 in the “Slump state” for “Slump effect (other than the extended time)” in the slump effect table 222f. In the case where the fluctuation effect of the “special reach” effect mode is acquired based on the prize 2 during the execution of the effect other than the extended time of “”, the effect time additionally acquired based on the prize 2 is “40 seconds”. And “40000” is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning 1, the “slump effect” other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the “gase pseudo-ream 2” is being executed). In performing an additional “slump effect” based on the winning prize 2 from that state, in order to match each “slump effect”, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode, a “normal reach” effect mode, or a “super reach” As in the case where the effect mode is acquired (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)), the extension time set based on prize 1 is once reset, and thereafter based on prize 1 and prize 2 The effect contents of "Slump effect" are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the value of the extended time set based on the winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the total effect time of the entire “Slump effect” calculated from the start of the “Slump effect” is “55 seconds”, which is converted from the start of the “Slump effect”. The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g is “55000”. Then, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the “first effect” and the “second effect” (that is, the “gase pseudo ream 1 already performed” and the “gase pseudo ream 1” being executed) 2)), the “third production” is set to “development possibility”, the “fourth production” is set to “pseudo-ren 1”, and the “fifth production” is “pseudo-production”. "Rend 2" is set, and the effect element of "Which reach" is set as the "sixth effect".

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. Therefore, the effect time of the remaining “slump effect” is “35 seconds”. Therefore, first, in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, the effect information relating to the effect element of "Dochida Reach" performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired variable effect are displayed. Information is stored. Next, as the production of the remaining “25 seconds”, in the fifth production area 223h5, production information on “pseudo ream 2” performed for “10 seconds” and the production element of the next production (that is, “reach reach”) ) Are stored as stop symbol information relating to the reach forming symbol that suggests that the symbol will be developed. Next, as the production of the remaining “15 seconds”, in the fourth production area 223h4, the production information on “pseudo ream 1” performed for “10 seconds” and the next production (that is, “pseudo ream 2”) are developed. And stop symbol information relating to a chance symbol symbol indicating that the symbol symbol is to be executed. Then, as the production of the remaining “5 seconds”, the production information on the “expansion feasibility production” of the development success and the development of the next production (that is, “pseudo-ren 1”) are suggested in the third production area 223h3. Stop symbol information relating to the chance symbol to be performed is stored.

  The effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect” of the success of the development as the “third effect” is performed for “5 seconds”, so the “second development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “second development possibility production” of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second production” “gase pseudo ream 2”. The given gas eye chance symbol is replaced with a chance eye symbol (for example, “788” → “778”; see FIGS. 46 (e) and (f)), and to “pseudo ream 1” which is the “fourth effect”. (See FIG. 47 (c)).

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to sixth effect areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump effect storage area 223h. The "losing display" or the "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

  As described above, in the “slump effect” executed based on the prize 1 to the special figure prize opening 77a, 78a in the “slump state”, the audio ramp control device 113 other than the extension time of the “slump effect” When the variable effect is acquired based on the new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during the execution of the effect of, the "Slump effect" other than the extended time based on the winning 1 is being executed. For this reason, in performing the additional “Slump effect” based on the prize 2, the extension time set based on the prize 1 is reset once to match the respective “Slump effects”, and the prize 1 and the prize are awarded. 2, the effect contents of the subsequent "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, even when a variable effect is added due to a new start winning in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized. Thus, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without inconsistency in the effect. As a result, when the “Slump effect” is executed based on the winning start in the “Slump state”, a difference occurs between the end timing of the series of “Slump effects” and the end timing of the obtained variable effect, Even if a new start winning prize occurs during the production, it is possible to match the production contents, so even if the "Slump production" is executed longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation production, the production It is possible to execute an effect that is longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, while configuring so as not to cause inconsistency in the content.

  In addition, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured so that each effect unit performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect" is reset, and when the setting is reset, The remaining remaining time less than the execution time of one production element (that is, less than "10 seconds") is a production that does not cause a sense of incongruity even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and the production time is flexible. (There is a range.) Set to complement with “Development availability effect”. With this configuration, even when a variable effect is added due to a new start winning in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" Can be synchronized, and an effect can be provided in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without any inconsistency in the effect.

  Next, referring to FIG. 21 and FIG. 24, “Slump effect” (that is, “Slump effect”) executed when “non-reach (long) 1” and extension time “5 seconds” are selected based on winning 1 "Gase pseudo-run 1" and "Gase pseudo-run 2"), and the "Slump effect" is at the timing of the execution of the effect based on the extended time (that is, the second half of "Gase pseudo-run 2"). The setting contents of “Slump effect” when a new fluctuation pattern command is received will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24 (a), in the “slump effect (during extended time)” in the slump effect table 222f, based on the winning 1 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the “slump state”. During the performance of the effect based on the extended time of the “slump effect” being executed (in the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), during “gase pseudo-ream 2”, when “4 seconds” of the extended time has elapsed) When a variable effect of “non-reach (long) 2” is acquired based on a new winning 2 to the winning ports 77a and 78a, “non-reach (long)” additionally acquired based on the winning 2 The effect time of “2” is “15 seconds”, and the value “15000” of the slump effect timer 223g is added (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning prize 1, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed because the “slump effect” in the extended time is being executed. In performing the additional “slump effect”, the remaining amount of the extra time acquired based on the winning 1 is temporarily stored in order to match each “slump effect” (see S1422 in FIG. 39). Then, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the effect contents of the “slump effect” are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value of the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2 (that is, “15000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24A, the “Slump effect” performed from the start time of the “Slump effect” to Win 2 is “19 seconds”, and the remaining “Slump effect” at the time of Win 2 Is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after the value of the slump effect timer 223g is stored in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is “15 seconds”, “15000” is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this time. Then, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (ie, “1000”), the “third effect” is “development enable / disable effect”, and the “fourth effect” is “gase effect”. "Pseudo-run 3" is additionally set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the point of winning 2 until the end of the running “Gase pseudo-run 2”, the remaining “Slump effect” is completed at the end of the “Gase pseudo-run 2”. The value is determined to be “14000” obtained by subtracting “1000” from “15000”. Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 sets the “slump effect” performed after the “third effect” first in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed for “10 seconds”. The effect information of “Gase pseudo-run 3” to be performed and the stop symbol information related to the Gasech chance symbol are stored. Then, as an effect of the remaining “4 seconds”, in the third effect area 223h3, the effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect”, and the development to the next effect (that is, “gase pseudo ream 3”) fails. The effect information on the development failure and the gasscene pattern that suggests that the next effect will not be developed are stored.

  Since the effect element of the “development feasibility effect” of the above-mentioned development failure as the “third effect” is performed for “4 seconds”, the “second development feasibility effect” is performed. The liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not quasi-broken at the end timing of the “second development possibility effect” of the development failure, and is stopped and displayed at “gase quasi-ren 2” as the “second effect”. The displayed gassed eyes pattern continues to be displayed as it is.

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h. The stop symbol of the gassess eye symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol ("non-reach (long) 2", "miss display"), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends. .

  With this configuration, even when a variable effect is added due to a new start winning in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" Can be synchronized, and an effect can be provided in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without any inconsistency in the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24 (b), in the "slump effect (during the extended time)" in the slump effect table 222f, the prize 1 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is obtained. During the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the “slump effect” that is being executed based on the above (in the first embodiment, during “gase pseudo-ren 2”), based on a new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a When the variable production in the “normal reach” production mode is acquired, the production time additionally acquired based on the prize 2 is “20 seconds”, and the value “20000” of the slump production timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning prize 1, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed because the “slump effect” in the extended time is being executed. In performing the additional “slump effect”, the remaining amount of the extra time acquired based on the winning 1 is temporarily stored in order to match each “slump effect” (see S1422 in FIG. 39). Then, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the effect contents of the “slump effect” are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value of the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2 (that is, “20000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the “Slump effect” performed from the start time of the “Slump effect” to Win 2 is “19 seconds”, and the remaining “Slump effect” at the time of Win 2 Is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after the value of the slump effect timer 223g is stored in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is “20 seconds”, “20,000” is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this time. Then, as the “slump effect” corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (that is, “1000”), the “third effect” is “development enable / disable effect”, and the “fourth effect” is “anyway”. And the effect element of "reach" are additionally set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running “gasse pseudo-ren 2”, the remaining “slump effect” is completed at the time of the end of the “gasse pseudo-ren 2”. The value is determined to be “19000” obtained by subtracting “1000” from “20,000”. Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets “slamp effect” performed after “second effect” in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed for “10 seconds”. The effect information related to the effect element of “Which reach” to be performed and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored. Then, as the effect of the remaining “9 seconds”, in the third effect area 223h3, the effect information relating to the “expansion feasibility effect” of development success and the next effect (that is, the effect element of “reach reach”) are developed. And the stop symbol information relating to the reach forming symbol indicating that the symbol is reached.

  The effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect” of the above-mentioned development success as the “third effect” is performed for “9 seconds”, so the “third development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “third development possibility effect” of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second effect” “gase pseudo ream 2”. The performed gassess eye symbol is replaced with the reach forming symbol (for example, “788” → “7 ○ 7 (○ is fluctuating)”; see FIGS. 46 (d) to (f)), and “fourth effect”. (See FIG. 47 (e)).

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h. “Loss display” or “big hit display” corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slump effects” ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24 (b), in the "slump effect (during the extended time)" in the slump effect table 222f, the prize 1 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is obtained. During the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the “slump effect” that is being executed based on the above (in the first embodiment, during “gase pseudo-ren 2”), based on a new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a In the case where the variable production in the “super reach” production mode is acquired, the production time additionally acquired based on the prize 2 is “30 seconds”, and the value “30000” of the slump production timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning prize 1, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed because the “slump effect” in the extended time is being executed. In performing the additional “slump effect”, the remaining amount of the extra time acquired based on the winning 1 is temporarily stored in order to match each “slump effect” (see S1422 in FIG. 39). Then, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the effect contents of the “slump effect” are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value of the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2 (that is, “30000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the “Slump effect” performed from the start time of the “Slump effect” to Win 2 is “19 seconds”, and the remaining “Slump effect” at the time of Win 2 Is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after the value of the slump effect timer 223g is stored in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is “30 seconds”, “30000” is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this time. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (that is, "1000"), the "third effect" is "development enable / disable effect", and the "fourth effect" is "pseudo effect". A staging element of “reach 1” and “fifth effect” are additionally set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running “gasse pseudo-ren 2”, the remaining “slump effect” is completed at the time of the end of the “gasse pseudo-ren 2”. The value is determined to be “29000” obtained by subtracting “1000” from “30000”. Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 sets the “slump effect” performed after the “second effect” first in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop symbol is finally displayed for “10 seconds”. The effect information related to the effect element of “Which reach” to be performed and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored. Next, as the remaining “19 seconds” effect, the fourth effect area 223h4 includes effect information on “pseudo ream 1” performed for “10 seconds” and an effect element of the next effect (that is, “way reach”). ) Is stored. Then, as the production of the remaining “9 seconds”, the third production area 223h3 suggests that the production information on the “expansion feasibility production” of the development success and the next production (that is, “pseudo-ren 1”) will be developed. Stop symbol information relating to the chance symbol to be performed is stored.

  The effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect” of the above-mentioned development success as the “third effect” is performed for “9 seconds”, so the “third development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “third development possibility effect” of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second effect” “gase pseudo ream 2”. The given gas eye chance symbol is replaced with a chance eye symbol (for example, “788” → “778”; see FIGS. 46 (d) to (f)), and to “pseudo ream 1” which is the “fourth effect”. (See FIG. 47 (c)).

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fifth effect areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump effect storage area 223h. The "losing display" or the "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24 (b), in the "slump effect (during the extended time)" in the slump effect table 222f, the prize 1 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is obtained. During the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the “slump effect” that is being executed based on the above (in the first embodiment, during “gase pseudo-ren 2”), based on a new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a In the case where the variable production in the “special reach” production mode is acquired, the production time additionally acquired based on the prize 2 is “40 seconds”, and the value “40000” of the slump production timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

  In this case, in the “slump effect” of “20 seconds” based on the winning prize 1, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed because the “slump effect” in the extended time is being executed. In performing the additional “slump effect”, the remaining amount of the extra time acquired based on the winning 1 is temporarily stored in order to match each “slump effect” (see S1422 in FIG. 39). Then, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the effect contents of the “slump effect” are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value of the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2 (that is, “40000”) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the “Slump effect” performed from the start time of the “Slump effect” to Win 2 is “19 seconds”, and the remaining “Slump effect” at the time of Win 2 Is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after the value of the slump effect timer 223g is stored in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is “40 seconds”, “40000” is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this time. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (that is, "1000"), the "third effect" is "development enable / disable effect", and the "fourth effect" is "pseudo effect". The effect element of "run 1", the "fifth effect", "pseudo-response 2", and the "sixth effect" of "reach reach" are additionally set.

  Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and "Gase pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbols relating to the gaseline pattern are already provided. Since the information and the information are respectively stored, the effect of “20 seconds” is already set at this stage. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running “gasse pseudo-ren 2”, the remaining “slump effect” is completed at the time of the end of the “gasse pseudo-ren 2”. The value is determined to be “39000” obtained by subtracting “1000” from “40000”. Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets “slump effect” performed after “second effect” in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop symbol is finally displayed for “10 seconds”. The effect information related to the effect element of “Which reach” to be performed and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored. Next, as the production of the remaining “29 seconds”, in the fifth production area 223h5, production information on “pseudo-ren 2” performed for “10 seconds” and the production element of the next production (that is, “reach reach”) ) Is stored. Then, as the effect of the remaining “19 seconds”, in the fourth effect area 223h4, the effect information on “pseudo ream 1” performed for “10 seconds” and the next effect (ie, “pseudo ream 2”) are developed. And the stop symbol information relating to the chance symbol symbol indicating that the symbol symbol is displayed. Next, as the effect of the remaining “9 seconds”, the third effect area 223h3 suggests that the effect information relating to the “expansion feasibility effect” of the successful development and the next effect (that is, “pseudo ream 1”) be developed. Stop symbol information relating to the chance symbol to be performed is stored.

  The effect element of the “expansion feasibility effect” of the above-mentioned development success as the “third effect” is performed for “9 seconds”, so the “third development feasibility effect” is performed. Then, at the end timing of the “third development possibility effect” of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is broken in a pseudo manner, and is stopped and displayed in the “second effect” “gase pseudo ream 2”. The given gas eye chance symbol is replaced with a chance eye symbol (for example, “788” → “778”; see FIGS. 46 (d) to (f)), and to “pseudo ream 1” which is the “fourth effect”. (See FIG. 47 (c)).

  Then, “Slump effect” is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to sixth effect areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump effect storage area 223h. The "losing display" or the "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

  As described above, in the “slump effect” executed based on winning 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the “slump state”, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the time period of the “slump effect” as an extension. When the variable effect is acquired based on the new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during the execution of the effect based on the winning, the “slump effect” of the extended time based on the winning 1 is being executed. For this reason, in performing the additional “slump effect” based on the prize 2, in order to match each “slump effect”, the remaining amount of the extra time once acquired based on the prize 1 is stored ( Then, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the effect contents of the “slump effect” are set again. Therefore, even when a variable effect is added due to a new start winning in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized. Thus, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without inconsistency in the effect.

  In addition, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured so that each effect unit performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect" is reset, and when the setting is reset, The remaining remaining time of less than one production unit is supplemented by the "development feasibility production", which is a production that does not cause a sense of incongruity even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and has a flexible (with a wide range) production time. Set as follows. In addition, the maximum effect time of the “development possibility effect” is configured to be equal to the obtainable extended time. With this configuration, a situation in which a “slump effect” longer than the acquired variable effect is being performed, that is, during the execution of the “slump effect” based on the extended time, a new Even if a variable production is added due to the start winning, the development time can be made consistent by the "development feasibility production" that can be executed with a width less than the extension time, and the acquired fluctuation production Since the end timing and the end timing of the entire “slump effect” can be synchronized, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without inconsistency in the effect.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The hold information storage area 223i contains information for performing the prefetching process, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b along with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. It is an area for storing respective values of C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform a prefetch process (hold display setting process ( 38) is performed.

  The execution information storage area 223j is information for performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, that is, a jackpot acquired from the counter buffer 203b along with the start winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the reserved ball number command. This is an area for storing respective values of a random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1.

  When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the start timing of the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 221 executes the setting of the variable effect and the like in the above-mentioned hold information storage first area of the hold information storage area 223i (FIG. 25). The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for performing the variable effect stored in the execution information storage area 223j is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j.

  Here, the details of the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j.

  The execution information storage area 223j includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223j1 storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 223j2 storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223j4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored is provided.

  The hold information storage area 223i has four areas of the hold information storage first to fourth areas, and each of the hold information storage first to fourth areas has a big hit similarly to the execution information storage area 223j. A jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1 storing the value of the random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 223i2 storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. At least a storage area 223i3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223i4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  More specifically, the execution information storage area 223j is an area corresponding to the currently-running fluctuation effect, and the suspension information storage first area is the first temporally-sustained fluctuation effect among the suspended fluctuation effects. An area corresponding to the effect, and the hold information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second-oldest fluctuating effect temporally retained among the fluctuated effects held, and the on-hold information storage third area is: This is an area corresponding to the third-time-old fluctuating effect of the suspended fluctuating effects, and the fourth area of the on-hold information storage is the fourth-fourth temporally fluctuating suspended-floating effects. It is an area corresponding to the fluctuation production.

  When the sound ramp control device 113 receives the command of the number of retained balls from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 converts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the large hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 from the reserved number of balls command. Extract. Then, the sound ramp control device 113 compares the extracted values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 with the values of the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command among the reserved information storage first to fourth areas. They are stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the variation type counter storage area 223i4.

  Specifically, if the number of retained balls included in the retained ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects suspended at that time is X, and Since the values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the X-th temporally suspended fluctuation effect among the suspended fluctuation effects, each counter storage area in the suspension information storage X-th area The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223i1 to 223i4 are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the reserved X-th area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. That is, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved X area of the main control device 110 is stored in the reserved information storage X area.

  In the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a pre-reading process (a hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage X area. ) Is performed, and the pending change information generated based on the result of the prefetch processing is stored in the above-mentioned pending display information storage area 223e (see FIG. 19). That is, the information on the fluctuation effect is stored in the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j, and the effect information of the “slump effect” and the stop symbol information are stored in the above-described slump effect storage area 223h. The number of holdings of the “effect” and the holding change information are stored in the holding display information storage area 223e.

  On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a shift process in the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j. In other words, the number of the suspended floating effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the floating performance that is temporally first suspended is started. Therefore, the suspended information storage first area corresponding to the first suspended floating performance is performed. The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the respective storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j corresponding to the currently executed fluctuation effect.

  Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage first area, and the hold information storage is performed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area, and the respective values of the hold information storage fourth area are stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third area for storing the hold information.

  As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223j. Also, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored in the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the sound ramp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and being held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223j and the hold information storage area 223i. You.

  When performing the pre-reading process (holding display setting process (see FIG. 38)), the sound ramp control device 113 grasps the number of the variable effects (the number of the retained balls) from the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b. Then, based on the number of the reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variable effects are held among the hold information storage first to fourth areas are read in advance, and the variable effects are read. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a big hit is achieved in one effect unit (ie, the effect element to be executed last) in the “slump effect”, and a fluctuating time. For example, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is “1”, the number of retained balls in the variable effect is one, and therefore, for the reserved information storage first area, the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 Pre-read the value and make a decision. Further, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of retained balls in the variable effect is four, so that for the reserved information storage fourth area, the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 Pre-read the value and make a decision.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 only in one direction, and the audio ramp control device 113 accesses the RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can not. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 has a hold information storage area 223i, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects held by the main control device 110 also in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, by referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, the pre-reading process can be executed by the sound lamp control device 113.

  That is, when the suspended floating effect or “Slump effect” is executed, what is the result of the floating effect or “Slump effect” (whether a big hit or not, and how long the changing time will be) The sound lamp control device 113 can perform the control related to the determination before the execution of the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” and the execution of various effects.

  The above-described shift processing in the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j is based on the number of balls to be held when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the update based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command is performed). Based on the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before the change, the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect held among the first to fourth areas for holding information storage.

  For example, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is “4”, and all the areas of the holding information storage area 223i (holding information storage first to fourth areas) ) Is assumed to store data. In this case, the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j, the data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data in the hold information storage third area is held. The data is shifted to the information storage second area, and the data in the hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the hold information storage third area.

  On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is “2”, the data of the reserved information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. Then, the data in the second area for storing the hold information is shifted to the first area for storing the hold information, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the hold information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effects are not held, so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

  Regardless of the presence / absence of data, the respective data in the first to fourth areas of the hold information storage are shifted to the area having the area number smaller by 1 (the execution information storage area 223j or the first to third areas of the hold information storage). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in each of the first to fourth areas for storing the hold information, so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The effect conversion flag 223k is a flag for changing one “gase pseudo-ren” effect in the “slump effect” in the ON state to an effect element of “development enable / disable effect”. In the first embodiment, when a series of “slump effects” is performed, when a ball is not held in the holding device 73, the ball is not made to win in the dummy winning opening 75, and the dummy symbol that is the dummy holding display is not displayed. . For this reason, if the “slump effect” including the “gase pseudo-ream” effect of digesting one pending symbol as it is is executed, the number of effects in the “slump effect” and the number of pending symbols cannot be matched. . Therefore, in the case where no ball is won in the dummy winning opening 75 based on the fact that the ball is not held in the holding device 73, a “slump effect” that is a “slump effect” that digests one held symbol is held. The system is configured to convert a symbol into an effect element of “developability effect” that does not digest and execute a series of “slump effect”.

  The effect conversion flag 223k is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a hold rank-up command for raising the display mode of the hold symbol or the execution symbol by one rank is received from the main control device 110, that is, the start winning in the “slump state” (the previous start winning (win 1), and In the case of a later start winning (including any of the winning 2), when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect based on the starting winning includes "reach display", or when the ball is not held in the holding device 73. The effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, the effect conversion flag 223k is configured to be set to OFF after setting the effect contents in “Slump effect” in the change setting process (see FIG. 39) (see S1418 in FIG. 39).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect content of the “slump effect” is set based on the winning start in the “slump state”, when the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON, When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the winning does not include the “reach display”, the effect information of the “gase pseudo ream” effect set in the slump effect storage area 223h is changed to “development availability”. It is configured to convert to production information of the production element of “production”. With this configuration, it is possible to achieve consistency between the number of productions (the number of production units) of the “slump production” and the number of pending symbols, and to provide a production that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. it can.

  The effect conversion flag 223k is turned on when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, and is also output when the fluctuation pattern of the obtained variable effect includes “reach display”. Since it is set to ON also when a command is received (see S1205 in FIG. 37), it is initialized every time the effect contents of “Slump effect” are set, regardless of whether or not “reach display” is included (see FIG. 37). That is, it is configured to be turned off). More specifically, in the fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 39), the “flux display” is included in the fluctuation pattern of the obtained fluctuation effect, and the “slump effect” in which the “pseudo pseudo-ren” effect is not executed. Even if there is no “reach display” in the fluctuation pattern of the obtained fluctuation effect, and even if the “slump effect” in which the “pseudo-sequence” effect is executed, the “slump effect” Is set to be turned off after the setting of the effect contents (see 1418 in FIG. 39). With such a configuration, even when a new starting prize (that is, prize 2) occurs during the execution of the “Slump effect” and the content of the “Slump effect” is additionally changed (updated), Since the setting contents of the effect conversion flag 223k are initialized at that timing, when the effect contents based on a new start winning (ie, winning 2) are reset, the previous starting winning (ie, winning 1) is set. The effect setting can be made consistently without being affected by the setting contents of the “slump effect” based on the above.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  The command storage area is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command (for example, setting of a command for the display control device 114) is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect on the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 or “ Slump effect ", or" hold change notice "in the hold symbol and the execution symbol.

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 instructs the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 via the input port 238. The command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the input port 238 via the bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a video RAM 236 and an output port 239 via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as that of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 controls display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on a command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs.

  The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area (not shown) in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area, the above-mentioned image data is stored in the form of compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 megabytes, and the image data of about 1024 megabytes is compressed to about 768 megabytes and stored in the character storage area.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing one frame of image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 generates one frame of image data according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and writes the one frame of image data written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified by the drawing list from the character storage area (not shown) in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and decompresses the image data ( Then, the image data of the sprite is written into one of the frame buffer areas of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified by the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

  The writing of one frame of image data into one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in “20 milliseconds”. I do. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the reading of the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is performed. The image data for the next one frame is written to the frame buffer area of the next frame.

  As described above, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data between the one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 33) started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 34) executed after the start-up process, and a periodic process (the first embodiment). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) started at a period of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then the startup processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound ramp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, a command for the number of retained balls set in a start winning process (see FIG. 27) described later is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command, and the like set in the variation process (see FIG. 28) and the variation start process (FIG. 29), which is one process of the variation process, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball firing signal set when a ball is fired in a later-described firing control process (see S110 in FIG. 26) is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then a big hit process for executing a process at the time of the big hit of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed (S103). .

  Next, a second symbol control process for executing a variable display of the second symbol and a process relating to the drive control of the electric accessory 79 is executed (S104). In brief, the second symbol display is variably displayed on the second symbol display device 83 on condition that the ball has passed the second entrance 67, and as a result of the variable symbol display, the second symbol is displayed. When a winning symbol (for example, a symbol “○”) appears and enters a winning state, the electric accessory 79 is opened and driven for a predetermined time.

  Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the state of the various switches 208 and 73g connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the states of the switches 208 and 73g are determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of obtained balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next. In addition, based on the detection information of the held ball detection switch 73g, after recognizing whether or not a ball is held in the holding device 73, a start winning process (S108) and a holding device control process (S111) described later are performed. Execute.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches a maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the hit random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the first embodiment, , "99", "99", "99", "199", and "99", respectively, are cleared to "0". When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is initialized by the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the hit random number counter C4. The value is read as a value, and the initial value is set in the big hit random number counter C1 or the hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated value of each of the counters C1 to C4 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with winning in the special figure winning ports 77a and 78a (S108). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process (S108), a process for dynamically displaying the first symbol by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device based on the content of the above-mentioned start winning process (S108). A variation process for setting a variation effect of the third symbol or a variation pattern (effect pattern) of “slump effect” by the CPU 81 is executed (S109). The details of the change processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the fluctuation process (S109), a firing control process is executed (S110). This firing control process (S110) detects the player touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and performs the ball control on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining the on / off of the firing of. When the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  After executing the firing control process (S110), a holding device control process is executed (S111). In the holding device control process, a process of determining whether or not to release (release) the ball held in the holding device 73 based on the setting content of the holding device driving flag 203f and the value of the holding device driving timer 203g. Will be Details of the holding device control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the holding device control process (S111), a dummy winning process is executed (S112). In the dummy winning process, a prize ball command for the payout control device 111 and a dummy hold command for the audio lamp control device 113 are set according to whether or not a ball has won the dummy winning opening 75. The details of the dummy winning process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the dummy winning process (S112), other processes to be executed periodically are further executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S108), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, and if a winning has occurred, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (reserved). Do) process. Further, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  In the start winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start win) the special figure winning ports 77a and 78a (S201). Here, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a read in the switch reading processing of the timer interruption processing (see S105 in FIG. 26). Is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26) based on the output signal of the special drawing winning port 77a, 78a.

  When it is determined that the ball has won the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the three prize balls instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out three prize balls. The command is set (S202), and the process proceeds to S203. The three prize ball commands set in the process of S202 are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are used for the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the next timer interrupt process. Inside, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the special figure winning ports 77a and 78a and the dummy winning port 75 have the same number of prize balls of three. With such a configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special figure winning opening 77a or 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based on the number of paid out prize balls alone. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is a fluctuating effect in the “normal state” or a “slump effect in the“ slump state ”based on the number of paid-out balls only. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and getting up in the game even when performing a "slump effect" that is performed for a longer time than the actual variable effect. can do.

  In the processing of S203, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number N of operation-reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first symbol (variable effect of the third symbol) held in the main control device 110) is set to the upper limit (first value). In the embodiment, it is determined whether the value is less than “4”) (S203). Then, even if there is a prize in the special figure prize port 77a, 78a, if the number of active balls is not N <4 (S203: No), the start prize processing (S108) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 26) See).

  On the other hand, if the number N of active balls is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the value of the number-of-active balls counter 203a (the number N of active balls) is incremented by 1 (S204). Then, the process proceeds to S205.

  In the process of S205, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Of the reserved first to fourth areas, a jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and a variation type counter storage of an area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the area 203c4 (S205).

  Specifically, for example, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after the addition in the processing of S204 based on the winning in the special drawing winning opening 77a, 78a is "1", each storage area of the reserved first area is provided. 203c1 to 203c4 hold the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, respectively. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a after addition is "2", the value is stored in each of the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the reserved second area. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the third area, the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the reserved fourth area are stored in the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 respectively. The value is reserved.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of activated reserved balls N) after the addition in the processing of S204, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (reserved) in the processing of S205, and the jackpot type counter C2 In order to transmit the number-of-remaining-balls command including the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound ramp control device 113, the number-of-remaining balls command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. (S206). As a result, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S101 of the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S206 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203b in the processing of S205, or may be used in the processing of S205. A value read from the value stored (held) in the area 203c may be used.

  After the execution of the processing of S206, it is determined whether or not the starting winning is the starting winning during the “slump state”, that is, whether or not the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than “0” (S207). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is not a value larger than "0" (S207: No), that is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is "0", the starting winning is determined. Is not a start winning prize in the "slump state" but a start winning prize in the "normal state". Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform the control related to the “slump effect” based on the start winning, the start winning process (S108) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, in the process of S207, if it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than “0” (S207: Yes), the starting winning is the starting winning during the “slump state”. The process shifts to S208 in order to perform the control related to the “effect”.

  In the process of S208, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the main slump counter 203e (S208), and then it is determined whether or not the hold ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209). As a result of the determination, if the hold ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209: Yes), since the ball is held in the hold device 73, a hold symbol compatible with the "slump effect" is displayed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S210 in order to determine whether or not the fluctuating pattern causes the held ball to win the dummy winning opening 75.

  In the processing of S210, it is determined whether or not “reach display” is included in the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the start winning, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern counter acquired this time. It is determined whether the variation effect selected based on the value of C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is a “normal reach” effect mode, a “super reach” effect mode, a “special reach” effect mode, or a “special fluctuation” effect mode. (S210).

  If the result of the determination is that the fluctuation pattern does not include the “reach display” (S210: No), each production unit of a series of “slump productions” to be executed will be based on the acquired number of executions of the fluctuation production (the number of pending symbols). Since the “gase pseudo-ream” effect is performed one more times (ie, two times), the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON to ensure consistency in the display of the holding symbol (S211), and the holding is performed. The value of the device drive timer 203g is set to "1500" (S212), and the start winning process (S108) is ended. With this configuration, the balls held in the holding device 73 can be flown into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbol, which is a dummy holding display, can be displayed. Consistency between the number of effects and the number of pending symbols can be obtained. After the end of the start winning process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the process of S209, if the ball retention detection switch 73g is not turned on (S209: No), since no ball is retained in the retaining device 73, there is no ball flowing into the dummy winning opening 75. Without performing the processing of S210 to S212, a pending rank up command is set (S213), and the start winning processing (S108) ends.

  Also, in the process of S210, if the variation pattern includes “reach display” (S210: Yes), “pseudo ream” in which the reserved symbols are not digested in “slump effect” is performed, and “reach reach” is performed. Since the effect element is executed, also in this case, the processing of S211 and S212 is not performed, and first, the subsequent game state is returned to the “normal state”, and the setting of “Slump effect” is set based on the additional start winning. The value of the main slump counter 203e is cleared to "0" so as not to perform the operation (S214). Then, similarly to the case where the ball is not held in the holding device 73, a holding rank up command is set (S213), and the start winning process (S108) is ended.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the voice ramp control device 113 that has received the hold rank-up command, if the variation pattern includes “reach display”, displays the number of “Slump effects” effects and the number of display of hold symbols. Therefore, the “slump effect” is executed with the effect contents set initially. On the other hand, if the variation pattern does not include the “reach display”, the number of “Slump effect” effects does not match the number of display of the reserved symbols, so that one reserved symbol is consumed in the initially set effect contents. It is configured to execute a series of “slump effects” by changing the “gase pseudo ream” effect to an effect element of “development feasibility effect” that does not digest one reserved symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to match the number of productions of the “slump effect” with the number of displayed symbols, and even if the “slump effect” is performed longer than the actual fluctuation time, the player may feel uncomfortable. No directing can be provided.

  Next, a variable process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this variation processing. This variation processing controls dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 and control on the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and when the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, The setting of the demonstration display and the setting of the "slump state" are performed.

  In the fluctuation processing (S109), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that a jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the fluctuation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  If it is not a jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed. If it is not in the middle (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after stopping the dynamic display (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the motion of the first symbol retained in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the target display (variable effect) operation pending ball count N) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not “0” (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol (the fluctuation effect of the third symbol). The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display of the first symbol (fluctuation effect of the third symbol) is started by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c toward the reserved ball execution area 203d, and executes the reserved first area → reserved ball execution. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the area 203d, the reserved second area → the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area, and so on.

  After the data shift processing of S306, the variation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the data shift process. (S307), and returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). The change start process (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number of activated balls N) is “0” (S304: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether it is in the state, that is, whether it is in demonstration (S308). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, until the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of activated balls) is determined to be larger than “0”. Is determined as a demonstration.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 26).

  The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the next timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the demonstration command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display demonstration command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs a demonstration on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demonstration command. Control is performed to display the effect.

  Here, the demonstration command is set when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation stop, as described above. Therefore, if the fluctuating effect is not started even after the elapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation is further performed. After the execution and the fluctuation stop, the process of S309 may be executed after the second predetermined time has elapsed to set the demonstration command. Thereby, when there is no pending ball after the fluctuation stop, the player can show the stopped design of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is being performed (S308: Yes), then, after the demonstration, the maximum extension time (ie, the maximum extension time) of the extension times selected in the “slump effect” is determined. It is determined whether or not “10 seconds” have elapsed after the demonstration period has started (S310). As a result of the determination, if the maximum extension time has elapsed (S310: Yes), the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "2" in order to set the gaming state from the "normal state" to the "slump state". (S311). Here, by setting the value of the main slump counter 203e to “2”, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the state is “slump state” at the subsequent start winning timing. Then, a slump command to be transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 is set to notify the audio ramp control device 113 of the entry into the "slump state" (S312), and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is performed. Return. It should be noted that the audio ramp control device 113 can recognize the occurrence of the “slump state” by receiving the demo command, and therefore may be configured not to set the slump command itself.

  The slump command set in the process of S312 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the next timer interrupt process. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the slump command, the audio ramp control device 113 sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON, and while the sub-slump flag 223f is set to ON, the audio ramp control device 113 also responds to the “slump state”. Processing can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S310, if it is determined that the maximum extension time has not elapsed after the entry of the demonstration (S310: No), the processing of S311 and S312 is skipped and the “slump state” is set. This variation processing (S109) is terminated without performing.

  This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a series of “slump effects” is performed during the maximum extension time acquired after the demonstration period after the end of the fluctuation output, which is the execution trigger of the “slump effects” ( That is, it is configured to be executed for a maximum of "10 seconds". Therefore, during the execution of the “slump effect” based on the extended time of the series of “slump effects”, that is, during the demonstration period, at the timing when a new start winning is generated, a new “slump effect” is set as the “slump state”. Is necessary, a setting process for obtaining consistency with the currently executed “Slump effect” is required, and the setting process for obtaining the consistency may be complicated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the “slump effect” is started, the “slump state” is renewed on the main controller 110 side until the extension time in the “slump effect” ends. Without setting, when the series of "slump effects" is completed, the state is changed to "slump state". In other words, while a series of "slump effects" are being executed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuating effects has elapsed, and even if the state is in the demonstration effect internally, the state changes to the "slump state" for a while. Is waiting. Therefore, the main control device 110 is configured to complete a series of “slump effects” and then set the “slump effects” to the “slump conditions” again. There is no need to perform complicated control on the consistency with the effect, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced even when performing the slump effect.

  Next, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed. (S313). The display time during the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the dynamic display is performed. If the time (fluctuation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the first embodiment, for example, in the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37, for example, the center segment of the 7-segment display 37b blinks until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display is started. Is set.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is set (S315). The stop symbol is set in advance by a fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the process of S306, and if it is a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined. It is determined whether the symbol will be “15R probable big hit” after the big hit, “15R normal big hit” or “2R probable big hit”.

  In the first embodiment, the symbol "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b when "15R probable big hit" occurs after the big hit, and the 7-segment display 37b when the "15R normal big hit" occurs. , The symbol "3" is displayed, and when "2R probability change big hit" is reached, the symbol "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. In the case of a loss, only the central segment of the seven-segment display 37b is displayed (that is, "-").

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S316) in order to perform a confirmation display in synchronism with the display of (1), and this fluctuation processing (S109) is terminated. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When receiving the confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 if the end timing of the “normal state” or the “slump effect” is performed, and executes the “slump effect”. If the timing is on the way (ie, during the execution of the “pseudo-sequence 2”), the first stop command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and to confirm and display the stopped symbol. On the other hand, by receiving the first stop command for display, the third symbol display device 81 stops the left symbol column Z1 of the “slump effect” of the third symbol, and the stop causes the “slump effect” to be performed. It is configured to indicate the end of the fluctuation effect in. In this way, by associating the end of the fluctuating effect with the contents of the “slump effect”, it is possible for the player to recognize the end of the fluctuating effect even while the “slump effect” is being executed. Becomes

  Next, a variation start process (S307), which is one of the variation processes (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S307).

  In the change start process (S307), based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, a lottery or a loss lottery (big hit lottery) is performed, and the dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37 is performed. , The dynamic pattern and the stop type, and the variable pattern and the stop type of the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the change start process (S307), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A). A jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed to determine whether or not (S401).

  Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307” , 582 ”is defined as the jackpot random number value. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability variation state”), “28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866” is a big hit. Defined as a random value.

  In the process of S401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is determined. As a result of the processing in S401, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 9B). Based on this, the display mode (big hit type) at the time of the big hit is set (S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the “probability variation state” after the maximum hit of 15 rounds "15R probable jackpot" to move to "," or "15R normal jackpot" to shift to "time reduction state" after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or to "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds It is determined whether the transition is “2R probability change big hit”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (lighting state of the light emitting diode 37a) on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type as the display result of the variable effect or the “slump effect”, the jackpot types (“15R probability variable jackpot”, “2R probability variable jackpot”) are displayed. , "15R normal big hit") as it is as the stop type, thereby setting the display mode at the time of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d are determined. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, the fluctuating time of the fluctuating effect is determined from the selected fossil mode. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, a stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11 or FIG. 12) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

  If “15R probable big hit” or “15R normal big hit” is set as the big hit type in the process of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4). An effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the “normal reach” effect mode, the “super reach” effect mode, and the “special reach” effect mode is selected (see FIG. 12A).

  Specifically, when the “normal reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, the normal ball is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the “E6: normal reach” group of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). The change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” for “20 seconds”, ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”for“ 25 seconds ” "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" "" """""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" |||| , "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" (see Fig. 14) . Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 14).

  Further, when the “super reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the “E7: super reach” group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “super reach” for “30 seconds”, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “35 seconds” "Super reach", "40 seconds" of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" "or" 45 seconds " A fluctuation pattern of “" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo fluctuation "+" super reach "+" re- fluctuation "is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 14).

  Further, when the “special reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the “E8: special reach” group of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" special reach "" of "40 seconds", "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" 45 seconds " Special Reach ””, “50 sec” “High Speed Fluctuation (Long)” + “Pseudo Fluctuation” + “High Speed Fluctuation (Short)” + “Pseudo Fluctuation” + “Special Reach” ”or“ 55 sec ” A variation pattern of “high-speed variation (long)” + “pseudo variation” + “fast variation (short)” + “pseudo variation” + “special reach” + “re-variation” is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 14).

  In the case where “2R probability changing big hit” is set as the big hit type in the process of S402, in the selected stop pattern table 202d (E table 202d5), the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is selected. The effect mode corresponding to the value is selected. That is, when the "2R probability variation big hit" is won, the "special variation" effect mode is selected without exception. Then, with reference to the selected effect mode and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is selected. In the first embodiment, in this case, only “movie” is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 14).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that the winning is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the reserved ball number counter 203a Based on the value of the game and the current game state, the non-reach (long) effect, the "non-reach (middle)" effect, and the "non-reach (short)" ) ", A" normal reach "effect, a" super reach "effect, or a" special reach "effect. In the first embodiment, as described above, each effect depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “probability changing state”, the “time reduction state”, or the “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2 or C table 202d3) is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the mode is different.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variation time until the stop symbol is displayed with the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “normal gaming state”, the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2 or the A table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. One of the C tables 202d3 (see FIGS. 11A to 11C) is selected. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “time reduction state” or the “probability variation state”, the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Alternatively, one of the C tables 202d3 (see FIG. 11B or 11C) is selected.

  Then, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203d in the “E0: non-reach (long)” group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” for “15 seconds” is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 13).

  When the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203d is set in the “E1: non-reach (middle)” group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “low-speed fluctuation” for “10 seconds” is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 13).

  If the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S404, the pending ball execution area 203d is set in the “E2: non-reach (short)” group in the loss variation pattern table 202e1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only “high-speed fluctuation (short)” of “5 seconds” is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 13).

  When the “normal reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the “E3: normal reach” group of the loss change pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13). Is selected. That is, in this case, “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” ”for“ 20 seconds ”or“ “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “30 seconds” A fluctuation pattern of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “normal reach” is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 13).

  When the “super reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, in the “E4: super reach” group in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13), the change type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d. A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" super reach "" of "30 seconds" or "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "of" 40 seconds " + “High speed fluctuation (short)” + “super reach” ”(see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 13).

  If the “special reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, the change type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the “E5: special reach” group in the loss change pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13). A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" special reach "" of "40 seconds" or "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo fluctuation "of" 50 seconds " + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “special reach” ”(see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (see FIG. 13).

  Thus, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number value C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps at the time of development can be reduced.

  Next, in the process of S406, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. (S406). Specifically, for example, a jackpot lottery is won, and the jackpot is “15R probable variable jackpot”, and the variation pattern of the “super reach” effect mode of “30 seconds” (that is, “high-speed variation (long )) + “Low speed fluctuation” + “super reach” ”), a fluctuation pattern command indicating“ super reach ”of“ big hit ”,“ 15R probability change big hit ”, and“ 30 seconds ”is set. In addition, if a loss pattern has been selected for a jackpot lottery and a variation pattern of “30 seconds” “Super Reach” production mode has been selected, a variation pattern command indicating “Loss” and “Super Reach” for “30 seconds” is set. Is done.

  As described above, even if the fluctuation effect is the same fluctuation time, by setting the fluctuation pattern command together with the validity of the fluctuation effect and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform , And the variation time of the variation effect or “slump effect” can be determined in detail based on the information.

  In addition, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 is set (S407), and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 28).

  Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “15R sure-change jackpot”, without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol), A stop type command indicating "15R probability change jackpot" is set. If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “15R normal jackpot”, the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “4” symbol etc.) is not specified and “15R normal jackpot” is specified. Set the stop type command indicating that

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the “Super Reach” production mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787”) of the third symbol is not specified and “ A stop type command indicating a “super reach” effect mode (so-called front-back loss) is set. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A stop type command is set to indicate that it is in the effect mode (so-called loss other than before and after). Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258” or the like) is not specified and “ A stop type command indicating a non-reach effect state (so-called complete loss) is set.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success / failure, and In detail, the stop effect of the variable effect or the “slump effect” can be determined based on the information of the above.

  These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are included in a next timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command, or a display slump fluctuation command and a display slump design command based on the command, and performs display control. Transmit to device 114.

  Next, a holding device control process (S111), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the holding device control processing.

  In the holding device control process (S111), as described above, during the “slump effect”, the timing at which the ball held (stored) in the holding device 73 is released (flows down) is counted, and the timing is reached. In this case, the holding device solenoid 73 f is driven to release the ball held in the holding device 73, and the ball flows into the dummy winning opening 75.

  In the holding device control process (S111), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the holding device driving flag 203f is not turned on (S501: No), since the condition for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 is not satisfied, this holding device control is performed. The process ends, and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the suspension device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the suspension device drive timer 203g (S502), and then the subtracted suspension device It is determined whether the value of the drive timer 203g has become "0" (S503). By executing these processes, the conditions for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 (that is, the start of the “slump effect”, the ball holding in the holding device 73, and the acquired fluctuation effect When the variation pattern does not include “reach display”, the timing at which the ball held in the holding device 73 flows into the dummy winning opening 75 can be counted.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the value of the holding device driving timer 203g is not “0” (S503: No), the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 has not yet been reached. In order to continue counting the release timing, the processes of S504 and S505 are skipped, the holding device control process (S111) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S503 that the value of the suspension device driving timer 203g is “0” (S503: Yes), it is the release timing of the ball suspended in the suspension device 73, The holding device solenoid 73f is set to be turned on for "2000 milliseconds" (S504), the holding device drive flag 203f is set to off (S505), and the holding device control process (S111) is ended. .

  As described above, by controlling the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 based on the holding device driving flag 203f and the holding device driving timer 203g, during the execution of the "slump effect", A ball is flowed into the dummy winning opening 75 before the execution of the effect element (that is, “Gase pseudo-ream 2”), and before the execution of the corresponding effect element, a holding symbol that is a dummy hold display corresponding to the effect element is displayed. Can be displayed.

  Next, the dummy winning process (S112), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the dummy winning process.

  In the dummy winning process (S112), it is determined whether or not a ball has flowed (winned) into the dummy winning opening 75, and if a ball has won the dummy winning opening 75, the ball is transmitted to the payout control device 111. And a dummy hold command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the dummy winning process (S112), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has won the dummy winning opening 75 (S601). Here, based on an output signal of a dummy winning opening switch (not shown) which detects a ball (winning) entering the dummy winning opening 75, which is read in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see S105 of FIG. 26). Then, a ball entering the dummy winning opening 75 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the ball has not won the dummy winning opening 75 (S601: No), the dummy winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that the ball has won the dummy winning opening 75 (S601: Yes), based on the winning in the dummy winning opening 75, the prize equivalent to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a. In order to pay out the ball, a three-prize-ball command is set to instruct the payout control device 111 to pay out three award balls (S602), and the process proceeds to S603. The three prize ball commands set in the processing of S602 are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are used in the external output processing (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the next timer interrupt processing. Inside, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  With such a configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special figure winning opening 77a or 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based on the number of paid out prize balls alone. Further, in playing the game, the player uses the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 to perform the effect (fluctuating effect, “slump effect”, or hold) performed on the third symbol display device 81. Pay attention to the symbols, etc., and do not pay much attention to the manner in which the balls enter the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect (reserved symbol) corresponding to the winning ball corresponds to the variable effect in the “normal state” or “slump state” only in the “slump state” based on the number of paid-out balls. It cannot be determined whether or not it corresponds to the effect unit of "Slump effect". As a result, even when performing a “slump effect” in which the effect time is longer than the obtained change effect and more than the number of obtained change effects, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the game from getting aroused without the need.

  In the process of S603, a dummy hold command instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to display a hold symbol corresponding to the dummy hold display is set (S603), and the dummy winning process (S112) is terminated, and the timer reset is performed. The process returns to the loading process (see FIG. 26). The dummy hold command set in the process of S603 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process of the next timer interrupt process (see S101 of FIG. 26). Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the dummy hold command, the sound ramp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c, and calculates the difference between the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c after the addition and the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b. The display control device 114 transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 based on the total value, and the display control device 114 transmits the cockpit display region Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display reserved ball count command. In FIG. 6B, control is performed so as to display the display of the reserved symbol (and the executed symbol).

  With this configuration, it is possible to display, in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6 (b)), one more reserved symbol than the number of reserved balls in the actual variable effect, and to execute the actual variable effect. Even when the “Slump effect” is performed more times than the number of times, consistency between the number of effect units in the “Slump effect” and the reserved symbol can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the effect in which the lottery was performed without any inconsistency in the effects was performed more than the actual number of times of the variable effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like.

  By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The MPU 201 to which the power failure signal SG1 has been input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the power-off occurrence information setting (S701). ), End the NMI interrupt processing.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, the MPU 201 first executes an initial setting process when the power is turned on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, an initial operation is performed to determine whether or not electronic components such as the holding device solenoid 73f normally operate. Even when the holding device solenoid 73f performs the initial operation, the initial operation is performed in such a manner that the ball is held in the holding ball holding portion 73b of the holding device 73. It is configured. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state, a wait process (“1 second” in the first embodiment) is performed. ) Is executed (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805). If it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S811 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S811 in such a case.

  Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described in S906 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S811, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S811). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S812, S813).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing (S812, S813) of the RAM 203 is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S812, S813) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S812, S813), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S812), and thereafter, an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S813). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S804: No). S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the ball payout control while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S810, an interrupt is permitted (S810). Then, the flow shifts to a main process described later (see FIG. 34).

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are roughly performed.

  In the main processing, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S901: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S902, S903).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S902). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899", "99" in the first embodiment). , "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 26) (S903), and the process proceeds to S901.

  Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 26 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt processing, different processing is executed according to the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, execution is performed to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a, and if a ball passes through the second entrance 67, the second symbol display device 83 relates to the variable display of the second symbol. Display control is performed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 depends on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. It will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

  The processes of S902 and S903, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the random number counter C1 and the random number counter C4, which use these as initial values for the update, have randomness. Can be provided.

  In addition, in the process of S901, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 32 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S904 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S904), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S905). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S906), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S907), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S901 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S902 and S903 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is completed. Thereby, in the main processing of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed, the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S901 after the startup processing (see FIG. 33) ends. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S801). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S901. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  In the first embodiment, a process to be executed periodically is executed by a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and in the main process (see FIG. 34), each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is added to the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Has been described, but part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. May be. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the abnormal payout signal reading process (S102), the jackpot process (S103), the second symbol control process (S104), and the switch reading process (S102) which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment. S105), part or all of the start winning process (S108), the variation process (S109), the launch control process (S110), the holding device control process (S111), and the dummy winning process (S112) are performed instead of the timer interrupt process. , May be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing.

  In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, is processing executed every predetermined time And updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the processing executed at predetermined time intervals, but the processing executed at predetermined time intervals is executed in accordance with the state of the game. , The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated randomly even in such a configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 35) started when the power is turned on, and a main process (see FIG. 36) executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 35, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, the MPU 221 first executes an initial setting process when the power is turned on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1122 (see FIG. 36). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1119 in FIG. 36), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1122. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1122 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S1122 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1122 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started in step S1003, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1122, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to “0”.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1122 (see S1121 in FIG. 36). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1122 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1122 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 36). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of step S1008 is performed via steps S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), the process skips S1009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1011), and shifts to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

  The reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is that when the process from S1004 to the process in S1008 is performed via the process in S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  When the main processing is executed, the MPU 221 first determines whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the processing of S1101 was executed (S1101). : No), the flow shifts to the processing of S1116 without performing the processing of S1102 to S1115. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. Unlike S1102 to S1115, which need not be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the command determination processing of S1116. This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation effect processing in S1117 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1116 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1117 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay. Further, by executing the processing of S1102 to S1115 every millisecond, it becomes possible to accurately count various control timings.

  In the process of S1101, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S1101 was performed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 35, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1102.

  In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1117 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect and the “slump effect” are not executed or during the period of the “high-speed fluctuation” effect element, a process of changing the stage is performed, and the frame button operation command is executed. Instead, a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed.

  In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation effect or “Slump effect”, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the “reach display”. Thus, the effect may be changed to an effect that has a sense of expectation for the jackpot, or the frame button 22 may be a determination button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects presented on the screen. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1105 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1105) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1106), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the variable effect or “slump effect”). In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1107, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1108), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect or “slump effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / outputting process of S1107 is also performed by the variable effect or “slump effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81. It is executed in a time synchronized with the required time.

  In the processing of S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than “0” (S1109). This determination is for grasping the progress status of the “slump effect” and performing the shift processing of the held symbols in synchronization with the start of the next effect unit at the timing when one effect unit of the “slump effect” ends. .

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is not a value larger than "0" (S1109: No), that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "0", "Slump effect" , The process skips steps S1110 to S1115 and shifts the processing to step S1116.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than “0” (S1109: Yes), it is during “Slump effect”, and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is changed. One is subtracted (S1110), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is determined, and it is determined whether "10 seconds" have elapsed since the start of the "slump effect" (S1111).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “slump effect” may occur when the variable effect of the third symbol is not suspended and the variable effect is not executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is. Therefore, when the fluctuation effect of the “non-reach” effect mode that does not include the “reach display” is acquired based on the winning start during the “slump state”, the effect mode of the “five seconds” The "reach (long)" effect mode is selected.

  Here, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected based on the winning start in the “slump state”, at least two effect elements “gasse pseudo-run 1” and “gasse pseudo-run 2” "Slump effect" is executed. Also, since each effect unit in the “slump effect” is performed based on “10 seconds”, “10 seconds” from the start of the first effect unit in the “slump effect” (that is, “gase pseudo ream 1”) When the "" has elapsed, the first effect unit ends, and the execution of the next effect unit in "Slump effect" (that is, "Pseudo-sequence 2") is started.

  Therefore, when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is selected, the end of the first production unit in the “slump production” and the start of the next production unit are suggested, and the execution status of each production unit and The execution displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6 (b)) of the third symbol display device 81 along with the execution status of the above-mentioned effect unit in order to ensure consistency with the display contents of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol. It is necessary to delete the symbols and shift the display of the reserved symbols (hereinafter, the process of deleting the displayed active symbols and shifting the display of the reserved symbols is simply referred to as “shift display”). Therefore, the end timing of the first effect unit in the “slump effect” is measured by the process of S1111. When the end timing is reached, the display contents of the held symbol and the executed symbol are changed by the process of S1114.

  Further, when an effect mode including “reach display” is selected based on the winning start in the “slump state”, the holding symbol and the execution symbol are set as “slump effect” corresponding to the effect mode including the “reach display”. A “pseudo-ren” effect that does not consume is performed.

  Therefore, when the effect mode including “reach display” is selected, the holding symbol and the execution symbol are not consumed in the effect unit in the “slump effect”, and the execution status of each effect unit and the display contents of the holding symbol and the execution symbol are performed. In order to ensure consistency with the execution pattern, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed as they are in accordance with the execution state of the above-mentioned effect unit. Keep doing.

  With this configuration, it is possible to match the execution status of each effect unit in the “slump effect” with the display contents of the pending symbol and the executed symbol. As a result, even when a series of “slump effects” performed for a longer period of time than the actual fluctuating effects is performed, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the process of S1111, it is configured to determine whether “10 seconds” have elapsed since the start of the “slump effect” based on the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the acquired extension time. ing. Specifically, when the acquired fluctuation effect is the “non-reach (long)” effect mode of “15 seconds” and the obtained extension time is “5 seconds”, the slump effect timer 223g Is determined to be “10 seconds” after the start of the “Slump effect” at the stage when the value of the “Slump effect” becomes “10000”, that is, at the timing when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223g set to “20000”. It is configured to be. In addition, when the acquired fluctuation effect is the “non-reach (long)” effect mode of “15 seconds” and the obtained extension time is “10 seconds”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is At the stage when the remaining time is "15000", that is, at the timing when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223g set to "25000", it is determined that "10 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect". It is configured.

  Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that “10 seconds” have not elapsed from the start of the “slump effect” (S1111: No), the shift timing of the reserved symbol (that is, the “gase pseudo ream 1”) has not yet been reached. Since the (end timing) has not arrived, the processing of S1112 to S1115 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1116.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that “10 seconds” have elapsed from the start of the “slump effect” (S1111: Yes), then, is the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c greater than “0”? No, that is, it is determined whether or not a hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is being displayed (S1112). This is because when the ball is not held in the fluctuation pattern including the “reach display” or the holding device 73, the dummy holding command is not received from the main control device 110, and the holding symbol which is the dummy holding display is displayed. In such a case, the shift display of the held symbol and the executed symbol is not performed.

  In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is not larger than “0” (S1112: No), that is, when the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is “0”, When the hold symbol which is the hold display is not displayed, the process of S1113 to S1115 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1116.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is greater than “0” (S1112: Yes), a reserved symbol that is a dummy reserved display is displayed. Since it is the shift display timing of the reserved symbol, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c (S1113), and the data stored in the reserved display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1114).

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 toward the execution hold display area 223e0, and the first hold display area 223e1 → execute hold display. Area 223e0, second hold display area 223e2 → first hold display area 223e1, third hold display area 223e3 → second hold display area 223e2, fourth hold display area 223e4 → third hold display area 223e3, fifth hold display area The data in each area 223e0 to 223e5 is shifted, for example, 223e5 → fourth hold display area 223e4.

  After the data shift processing in S1114, a display reserved ball count command is set based on the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b and the pending change information stored in the reserved display information storage area 223e by the data shift processing. Then, the process proceeds to S1116. The display reserved ball count command set in the processing of S1115 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the next command output processing (S1102). Sent to.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6B), the number of reserved symbols indicated by the display reserved ball count command is displayed. In addition to displaying the execution symbols, the display mode (display color) of the corresponding hold symbol or execution symbol is controlled based on the hold change information included in the display hold ball count command.

  In the process of S1116, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1116), and the process proceeds to S1117. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1117, after the processing of the command determination processing (S1116), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110 to display the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” on the third symbol display device 81. And performing a variable effect process, which is a process for starting a variable effect or a “slump effect”, based on. Details of the fluctuation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a counter updating process for updating various counters such as the hold change counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1118), and the process proceeds to S1119. In this counter update process, specifically, for example, the hold change counter 223d is incremented by one, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches a maximum value (both are "99" in the first embodiment). . The hold change counter 223d updated in this way is used for executing “hold change notice” and selecting a display mode.

  In the processing of S1119, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1119). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1119 (S1119: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1121), and the power-off process is executed (S1122). After the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1123), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1119 (S1119: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1120), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1120: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1120: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1116) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing. This command determination process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  In the command determination process (S1116), first, the MPU 221 reads and analyzes the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and analyzes the command. It is determined whether a slump command has been received (S1201). If it is determined that the slump command has been received (S1201: Yes), the sub-slump flag 223f is set to ON (S1202), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). By setting the sub-slump flag 223f to ON based on the reception of the slump command, the MPU 221 can recognize the “slump state” on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that a slump command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not a hold rank-up command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1203). If it is determined that the hold rank-up command has been received (S1203: Yes), the hold change information in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the dummy holding ball number counter 223c is displayed. One rank is raised (S1204).

  In the process of S1204, specifically, for example, the hold change information corresponding to “none (white)” is stored in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the dummy holding ball number counter 223c. Is stored, the pending change information is updated to the pending change information corresponding to “blue”. Further, when the pending change information corresponding to “blue” is stored in the pending display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b and the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, the reserved change information is displayed. Update to the pending change information corresponding to "green". Further, when the pending change information corresponding to “green” is stored in the pending display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b and the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, Update to the pending change information corresponding to "red".

  With this configuration, it is possible to raise the display pattern of the holding symbol and the execution symbol corresponding to each effect unit of the “Slump effect” by one rank, and to display the number of effects of the “Slump effect” and the holding symbol and the execution symbol. While maintaining consistency with the displayed number, the variation of the effect contents can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  After the processing in S1204, the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (S1205), the command determination processing (S1116) ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). By setting the effect conversion flag 223k to ON based on the reception of the hold rank-up command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes a “slump effect” effect in which the “holding pattern” can be digested in the “slump effect”. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the reserved symbol is converted into the effect element of “development availability effect” that does not digest. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain consistency between the content of the effect unit in the “slump effect” and the consumption status of the pending symbol and the execution symbol, and to prevent inconsistency in the content of the effect. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S1203 that the hold rank-up command has not been received (S1203: No), then it is determined whether a dummy hold command has been received (S1206). As a result of the determination, if the dummy hold command has been received (S1206: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c (S1207), and then the hold display setting is performed to set the display mode of the hold symbol. The process is performed (S1208), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). In the suspension display setting process, control relating to “reservation change notice” is performed based on the value of the dummy suspension ball number counter 223c updated in S1206 and the value of the sub-reservation ball number counter 223b at that time. Details of the hold display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1206, when it is determined that the dummy hold command has not been received (S1206: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S1209). As a result of the determination, if the reserved ball number command has been received (S1209: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the suspended variation effect The number of reserved balls is extracted and stored in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1210).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a. Therefore, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S1210 is performed. Thus, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 detects the start winning. Can be adjusted to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S1210, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received ball count command is extracted, and the hold information storage area 223i is held. Of the information storage first to fourth areas (see FIG. 25), the information is stored in the first to fourth areas of the suspended information storage corresponding to the value of the sub-reserved sphere number counter 223b updated by the processing of S1210 (S1211).

  That is, when the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b (reserved ball number) is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the variation type counter storage area 223i4 of the hold information storing X-th area.

  The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 when the ball wins the special figure winning opening 77a or 78a (start winning). When the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X, the value is the value stored in the reserved X-th area of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110. That is, the same information (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 is stored in the reserved information storage area 223i of the audio lamp control device 113.

  By referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute a prefetch process in a hold display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later. ing. That is, when the suspended fluctuation effect or “Slump effect” is executed, what is the result of the fluctuation effect or “Slump effect” (whether it is a big hit or not, and how long the fluctuation time will be) Is determined before the execution of the fluctuating effect or the “slump effect”, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs control to determine the execution of various effects and to determine whether or not to execute “hold change notice” and the display mode. Can be executed.

  After the process of S1211, a hold display setting process (S1208) is performed as in the case of receiving the dummy hold command, in order to determine the display mode of the hold symbol based on the various information indicated by the hold ball count command received this time. Then, the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1209 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1212: Yes), a variation setting process is performed to set a variation effect or “slump effect” based on the variation pattern command (S1213), and a main process is performed. (Refer to FIG. 36). In this fluctuation setting process, a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command, and detailed effect contents of the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” are set based on the fluctuation pattern. This change setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1212 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). As a result of the determination, if a stop type command has been received (S1214: Yes), a symbol setting process is performed to set a variable effect or a "slump effect" stop symbol based on the stop type command (S1215). It returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). In this symbol setting process, a stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, and detailed stop symbols of the variable effect or “slump effect” are set based on the stop type. This symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1214, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1214: No), it is next determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1216). As a result of the determination, if a decision command has been received (S1216: Yes), a decision setting process is performed to perform a variable effect or a “slump effect” display process based on the decision command (S1217), and the main process (FIG. 36). In the finalization setting process, based on the received finalization command, if the floating effect is being executed, the floating effect is confirmed and displayed. If the “slump effect” is being executed, the left symbol row is displayed in the “slump effect”. The stop display of Z1 is performed. This confirmation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1216, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1216: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1218), and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1218, temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and then executed as a command output process of the main process (FIG. 36 is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the hold display setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process. As described above, this hold display setting process is executed when a hold ball number command or a dummy hold command is received from the main control device 110, and determines whether or not to execute “hold change notice” in the hold symbol. At the same time, a display hold ball count command is set according to the determined content.

  In the hold display setting process (S1208), the MPU 221 first executes the “Slump effect” which is executed based on various information indicated by the currently received pending ball count command or at the timing when the currently received dummy pending command is received. It is determined whether or not the lottery of “hold change notice” has been won based on the success or failure of the next production unit of the production unit of “” (S1301). As described above, in the execution lottery of the “pending change notice”, as described above, in the “normal state”, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4). Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223i1 to 223i4, the success / failure and the effect form are extracted. Then, based on the extracted success / failure and effect form, the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e (see FIG. 18) are referred to, and the execution and display of “preliminary change notice” are displayed. Determine the mode.

  If the “slump effect” based on only one start winning (ie, winning 1) is being executed, the success or failure of the “slump effect” being executed is stored in each counter storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. It is extracted based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In addition, if a “slump effect” based on an additional start prize (ie, prize 2) after the start prize of one (ie, prize 1) is being executed, it is determined whether or not the “slump effect” being executed is correct. Extraction is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 and 223i1 to 223i4 of the first area for storing the hold information. Then, based on the extracted success / failure, with reference to the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e, it is determined whether or not the "preliminary change notice" can be executed and the display mode.

  As a result of the processing in S1301, if the execution lottery of “hold change notice” has been won (S1301: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, “blue”) that is the execution lottery result of “hold change notice” The change information is stored in the suspended display information storage area 223e indicated by the sum of the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1301, if the execution lottery of “Hold change notice” has not been won (S1301: No), the hold change information (that is, Null data) indicating that the “Hold change notice” is not executed is The value is stored in the suspended display information storage area 223e indicated by the sum of the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. Thus, it is possible to store in the hold display information storage area 223e whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" for each effect unit of the "normal state" change effect and the "slump effect".

  In the processing of S1303, by writing Null data in the corresponding hold display information storage area 223e, for example, the overlapping use of the information about “hold change notice” stored in the hold display information storage area 223e before writing can be prevented. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production (for example, "red-holding change notice" in the "non-reach" production mode in spite of the fluctuating production). it can.

  Next, in the process of S1304, the display controller 114 displays the total value of the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, and the pending change information stored in the reserved display information storage area 223e. A display reserved ball count command for notifying the user is set (S1304), the reserved display setting process (S1208) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

  The display pending ball count command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 36). Sent. Accordingly, the display control device 114 that has received the display reserved ball number command displays the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number and the reserved change information indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the cockpit display of the third symbol display device 81. A process for displaying the image in the area Db (see FIG. 6B) is executed.

  Next, the change setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the change setting process. As described above, this variation setting process is performed when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37) and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the gaming state at that time (that is, , “Normal state” or “slump state”), the effect contents of the variable effect or “slump effect” are set.

  In the change setting process (S1213), the MPU 221 first extracts a change pattern (change time) from the change pattern command (S1401), and shifts the processing to S1402. The variation pattern extracted in the process of S1401 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1402 to S1418 are performed based on the variation pattern.

  In the process of S1402, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 is a variation pattern indicating “2R probability variation big hit”, that is, a “special variation” effect mode (S1402). As a result of the determination, if the fluctuation pattern indicates “2R probable change jackpot” (S1402: Yes), the processing of S1404 to S1423 is performed to execute the fluctuation effect with the fluctuation pattern in any game state. Instead, the sub-slump flag 223f is turned off (initialized) (S1403), and the fluctuation setting process (S1213) ends. After the change setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1402, if it is not a fluctuation pattern indicating “2R probability change big hit” (S1402: No), then it is determined whether or not the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404). As a result of the determination, if the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404: Yes), the variation pattern command is received during the "slump state", so that the sub-slump flag 223f is set to off (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted in S1401 includes “reach display” (S1406).

  In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not include the “reach display” (S1406: No), that is, when it is determined that the “non-reach (long)” rendering mode is set, the “slump rendering” The extended time is drawn by lot (S1407), the extracted extended time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1408), the extracted extended time is stored in the RAM 223 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1406 that the variation pattern includes “reach display” (S1406: Yes), the processes of S1407 to S1409 are skipped in order to perform the “slump effect” without acquiring the extension time. Then, the process proceeds to S1410. With this configuration, an extended time is acquired for the “slump effect” in the fluctuation pattern that does not include the “reach display”, and the dynamic effect of the third symbol longer than the fluctuation time of the actual fluctuation effect is executed. be able to.

  In the process of S1410, the variation time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1401 (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is “15 seconds” of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “low-speed fluctuation”, “15000” is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. , If the fluctuation pattern is “50 seconds” of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “special reach”, “50000” is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. In the first embodiment, a series of “slump effects” is executed based on the value set in the slump effect timer 223g in S1408 and the value added to the slump effect timer 223g in S1410.

  In the process of S1411, it is determined again whether or not “reach display” is included in the fluctuation pattern extracted in S1401 (S1411). If the result of the determination is that the fluctuation pattern includes the “reach display” (S1411: Yes), the “slump effect” newly set or additionally set is developed from the “pseudo ream” effect. In order to execute “reach display”, the situation at the time of winning (at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command) (ie, “slump state”, “slump effect” based on other than the extended time, or “slump based on the extended time” Whether or not the “effect” is being executed. The same applies to the following.), The value of the slump effect timer 223g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and / or S1410, and the “slump effect (extended time)” in S1422 described later. Only when it is a variation pattern command during execution, based on the remaining value of the extended time stored in the RAM 223, Alternatively, the effect elements of the effect element of “development possibility effect” and the effect element of “Reach reach” are respectively set in the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 of the slump effect storage area 223h (S1412), The process moves to S1413. In the process of S1412, if the winning situation is “slump state” or “slump effect” based on a time other than the extension time is being executed, the remaining value is not set. The contents of the “slump effect” are set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223g.

  Next, in the process of S1413, since the “reach display” is performed in the “slump effect”, an additional “slump effect” is set based on the reception of a new fluctuation pattern command during the execution of the “slump effect”. In order to prevent this, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1413), and the process shifts to S1417.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the variation pattern does not include the “reach display” (S1411: No), a prize is won in the “Slump effect” that is newly set or additionally set this time. Time (at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command), the value of the slump effect timer 223g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and / or S1410, and the fluctuation during execution of “Slump effect (extended time)” in S1422 described later. Only in the case of a pattern command, based on the remaining value of the extended time stored in the RAM 223, each effect unit of the effect element of the "gase pseudo-run" effect and / or the "developability effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h. The first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 are respectively set (S1414), and the processing is performed in S To migrate to 415. In the process of S1414, if the winning situation is “slump state” or “slump effect” based on a time other than the extended time is being executed, the remaining value is not set. The contents of the “slump effect” are set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223g.

  Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether or not the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415). As a result of the determination, if the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415: Yes), in the “Slump effect” set this time, the 1 “gase pseudo consecutive” effect that consumes the hold symbol (execution symbol) is held. The slump effect storage area 223h is updated by converting the effect into a “developability effect” effect element that does not consume symbols (executable symbols) (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1417. On the other hand, if the effect conversion flag 223k is not turned on (S1415: No), the process of S1416 is skipped without converting the set “slump effect”, and the process proceeds to S1417. With such a configuration, the number of executions of the effect unit in the “slump effect” and the number of display of the reserved symbols are made to match, and by providing a consistent effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable and comfortable. A game can be executed.

  In the process of S1417, the remaining value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 is cleared to “0” only in the case of a variation pattern command during execution of “Slump effect (extension time)” in S1422 to be described later (S1417). Then, the effect conversion flag 223k is set to off (S1418), and the change setting process (S1213) ends. After the change setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37). As described above, when one variation pattern command is received, the residual value and the effect conversion flag 223k obtained (set) based on the reception of the variation pattern command are initialized, so that each received variation pattern command is initialized. In this case, it is possible to execute an accurate fluctuation effect or a “slump effect” setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1404 that the sub-slump flag 223f has not been turned on (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1419). ). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than “0” (S1419: Yes), the change pattern command is received during the execution of the “slump effect”. The starting prize (that is, prize 2), which is a factor of the pattern command, is performed during the fluctuation time of the variable effect based on the previous variable pattern command (that is, prize 1) in the "slump effect" (including during the final display. The same applies hereinafter). ) Is determined (S1420). This determination is made when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is smaller than the value corresponding to the extension time stored in the RAM 223 in S1409 at the timing of the variation pattern command received this time, It is determined that it is not during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, at the timing of the fluctuation pattern command received this time, if the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than the value corresponding to the extension time, the fluctuation effect based on the previous fluctuation pattern command in the “slump effect” It is determined that the time is fluctuating.

  As a result of the determination in S1420, when it is determined that the reception timing of the variation pattern command received this time is within the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: Yes), the determination is based on other than the extension time. Since the variation pattern command is received while the “Slump effect” is being executed, the extended time stored in S1409 is set in order to set an additional “Slump effect” based on the received variation pattern command. (S1421) is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1421), and the process proceeds to S1410.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1420, when it is determined that the reception timing of the variation pattern command received this time is not within the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: No), that is, “ Since the change pattern command is received in the situation where the “slump effect” is being executed, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is temporarily used to additionally execute the “slump effect” based on the received change pattern command. The remaining value of “Slump effect” is stored in the RAM 223 (S1422), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to “0” (S1423), and the process proceeds to S1410.

  Then, in the processing after S1410, first, in S1410, a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is newly added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g reset in S1421 or S1423 (S1410), and in S1412 or S1414 or the like. An additional “slump effect” is set based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g added in S1410 and the remaining value of “Slump effect” stored in the RAM 223 in S1422.

  In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is not a value larger than “0” (S1419: No), that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is “0”, “ Since the “slump state” and the “slump effect” are not being executed, but the “normal state”, the fluctuation setting process (S1213) is terminated in order to execute the fluctuation effect based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. The process returns to the determination processing (see FIG. 37).

  As described above, the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the extension time or the remaining value of the extension time are set for each situation at the time of winning (at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command), and "Slump effect" is performed by common processing based on those set values. The effect can be set, and the program capacity stored in the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  Next, the symbol setting process (S1215) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the symbol setting process. In the symbol setting process, as described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110, the stop type is extracted from the stop type command, and the stop type is extracted. Based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the command and the setting status of the slump effect storage area 223h, a stop symbol in the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” is set.

  In the symbol setting process (S1215), first, a stop type (effect mode) is extracted from the stop type command (S1501), and the process proceeds to S1502. The stop type extracted in the process of S1501 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1502 to S1506 are performed based on the stop type.

  In the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the stop type extracted in S1501 is a stop type indicating "2R probability change big hit", that is, a "special fluctuation" effect mode (S1502). As a result of the determination, if the stop type indicates “2R probable big hit” (S1502: Yes), the process of S1503 to S1506 is performed in order to execute the variable effect with the stop type in any situation. The process proceeds to S1507.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is not the stop type indicating “2R probability change big hit” (S1502: No), it is then determined whether or not data on “Slump effect” is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h ( S1503). As a result of the determination, if the data regarding the “slump effect” is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: No), the stop type command in the “normal state” is received, so the process regarding the “slump effect” is performed. The processing shifts to S1507 without performing the processing of S1504 to S1506.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if data on “Slump effect” is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: Yes), the fluctuation setting process is performed to set the stop symbol of each effect unit in “Slump effect”. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 in S1401 in (see FIG. 39) includes “reach display” (S1504).

  As a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that the variation pattern includes “reach display” (S1504: Yes), a slump effect design corresponding to the number of “pseudo consecutive” effects in the “slump effect” is stored. In addition to the setting in the area 223h, a stop symbol (small hit symbol or a loss symbol) in the effect element of "Which reach" is set in the slump effect storage area 223h according to the stop type extracted in S1501 (S1505), and the process is performed in S1507. Move to.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1504, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not include the “reach display” (S1504: No), that is, when the variation pattern is the “losing display”, the “gase pseudo ream” production A gath chance pattern corresponding to the number of times is set in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507. With this configuration, a stop symbol can be displayed for each effect unit of “Slump effect”, and even when a “Slump effect” is performed, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command is displayed. Can be displayed.

  In the process of S1507, in the variation effect process (see FIG. 42) described later, the variation in the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the setting contents in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) and the symbol setting process (S1215). In order to start an effect or a “slump effect”, the change start flag 223a is set to ON (S1507), and the symbol setting process ends. After the symbol setting process ends, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, the confirmation setting process (S1217) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the confirmation setting process. As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), when the finalization command is received from the main control device 110, the finalization setting process is performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the finalization command is received. The third symbol to be stopped and displayed is set based on the situation (that is, during the fluctuating effect or during the “slump effect”).

  In this confirmation setting process (S1217), first, it is determined whether or not “Slump effect” is being executed (S1601). This determination is made based on whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0". If the result of the determination is that the “slump effect” is not being executed (S1601: No), the confirmation command is received during the execution of the variable effect. Is set (S1602), the determination setting process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

  The display determination command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). . The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and corresponds to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command described later. By stopping and displaying the third symbol, the third symbol in the variable effect is confirmed and displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1601 that the “slump effect” is being executed (S1601: Yes), the “slump effect” is being executed and the first stop timing of the “gase pseudo-run 2” , The first command for display to instruct the display control device 114 to perform a first stop of the “gase pseudo-run 2” of the “slump effect” (that is, a stop of the left symbol column Z1). A stop command is set (S1603), this determination setting process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

  The first stop command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Is done. By receiving the first stop command for display, the display control device 114 receives the first stop command for display, and causes the third symbol display device 81 to change the left symbol column Z1 in the left symbol column Z1 in the “slump pseudo-run 2” of the “slump effect”. Stop 3 symbols. Then, after the "slump effect" is performed for a predetermined time according to the effect information and the stop symbol stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, the right symbol column Z3 → the middle symbol column Z2 and the third symbol are stopped and displayed. Thus, the third symbol in the “slump effect” is confirmed and displayed.

  As described above, when the determination command is received from the main control device 110, the effect corresponding to the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 depends on whether the variable effect is being executed or whether the “slump effect” is being executed. The transmitted command can be transmitted to the display control device 114, and an effect that does not cause inconsistency in the effect content and that does not cause discomfort can be provided.

  Next, the variable effect process (S1117) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation effect processing. This fluctuation effect processing is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and includes the above-described fluctuation setting processing (see FIG. 39) and the symbol setting processing (see FIG. 40). And a process for starting the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” set in the step (1).

  In the fluctuation effect processing (S1117), the MPU 221 first determines whether the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the change start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1710: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. After the rendering process, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the fluctuation start flag 223a is ON (S1701: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, either the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” is performed. To start this, first, the change start flag 223a is turned off (S1702), and then the data included in the first hold information storage area provided in the hold information storage area 223i is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. (S1703) Further, the data included in the second to fourth areas of the hold information storage provided in the hold information storage area 223i are respectively shifted to the first to third areas of the hold information storage (S1704), and the processing is performed in S1705. Move to.

  In other words, in this case, the suspended fluctuation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” is started based on the information on the temporally suspended fluctuation effect which is the first in time. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the suspension information first area corresponding to the fluctuation effect suspended and the various information (data) correspond to the fluctuation effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage first area. Then, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage third area and various information (data) are stored in the respective hold areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area. And the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage fourth area and various information (data) are stored in the hold information storage third area 223i1 to 223i1. 223i4.

  As a result, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223j of the audio lamp control device 113, The reserved information storage first to fourth areas provided in the reserved information storage area 223i of the lamp control device 113 are stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110, respectively. The same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is stored.

  In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705). If data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: Yes), "Slump effect" In step S1708, if data is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1706 to set a variable effect.

  In the processing from S1706, in order to execute the fluctuation effect in the “normal state”, the display controller 114 displays the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j. A change pattern command for display is set for notification (S1706). Similarly, a stop type command for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j (S1707). The process moves to S1711.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1706 and the display stop type command set in the process of S1707 are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are executed next. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

  When receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation pattern and the stop symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. Thus, the control relating to the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is performed.

  In the execution of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display are always generated and transmitted as a pair (pair) within a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds). Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives only one of the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the command is normally generated or transmitted due to noise, disconnection, or the like when performing the variation effect. Since there is no such event, it is recognized that some abnormality has occurred, and the effect on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to an error display (for example, default fluctuation) corresponding to the abnormality instead of the variable effect, and the display control of the error display is performed. Start.

  Here, the default fluctuation means that the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 is received. This is a variation effect in which a fixed special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “9”, “8”, and “7” in order from the left column) that indicates a loss as a stop symbol is determined in accordance with the reception of the command.

  On the other hand, in the processing from S1708, in order to execute the “Slump effect”, in order to notify the display control device 114 of each effect unit of “Slump effect” based on each effect information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, A display slump variation pattern command is set (S1708). Then, a slump design command for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of each stop symbol of "slump effect" based on the stop symbol information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1709). The storage area 223h is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1710), and the process shifts to S1711.

  The display slump variation pattern command set in the process of S1708 and the display slump design command set in the process of S1709 are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and executed next. The command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump design command, and the “slump effect” is not started on the third symbol display device 81, the display slump variation pattern command The control relating to the "slump effect" of the third symbol is performed based on the effect pattern and the stop symbol indicated by the display slump symbol command. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, and the “slump effect” has already been started on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 executes the “ The control relating to the "slump effect" of the third symbol is performed while maintaining the consistency between the contents of the "slump effect" and the effect pattern and the stop symbol indicated by the received slump variation pattern command for display and the slump symbol command for display. Specifically, while performing one effect unit in the “slump effect” based on the previous display slump variation pattern command and the display slump design command, the effect unit shift from the next effect unit in execution to the next effect unit. Is performed based on a later-described display slump variation pattern command and a display slump design command.

  Regarding the execution of the “slump effect”, the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump design command are always paired (paired) for a predetermined time (for example, like the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command). , 20 ms). Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives only one of the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump design command, the command is normally generated or disconnected due to noise or disconnection when executing the “slump effect”. Since it has not been transmitted, it recognizes that some abnormality has occurred, and switches the effect on the third symbol display device 81 to an error display (for example, default fluctuation) corresponding to the abnormality instead of “slump effect”. Start the display control of the display.

  Next, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether or not the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is larger than “0” (S1711). This determination is the start timing of the fluctuating effect or “slump effect”, and with the start, the reserved symbol (executed symbol) is consumed (that is, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1). The timing of shifting and displaying the holding symbol in accordance with the fluctuation effect or “Slump effect” corresponding to the “Slump effect” is displayed, or the holding symbol that is the dummy holding display during the execution of the “Slump effect” At this stage, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift and display the reserved symbol.

  As a result of the processing in S1711, when it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is not larger than “0” (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is “0” and “ Since the "slump effect" has not been executed and the reserved symbol which is the dummy reserved display is not displayed, first, the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 in order to shift and display the reserved symbol at this stage ( S1714). Then, the data stored in the hold display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1715).

  In this data shift processing, similarly to the shift processing of the main processing (see S1114 in FIG. 36), the data stored in the first to fifth suspension display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are sequentially shifted toward the execution suspension display area 223e0. In the processing, the first hold display area 223e1 → the execution hold display area 223e0, the second hold display area 223e2 → the first hold display area 223e1, the third hold display area 223e3 → the second hold display area 223e2, and the fourth hold display. The data in each of the areas 223e0 to 223e5 is shifted in such a manner that the area 223e4 → the third hold display area 223e3, the fifth hold display area 223e5 → the fourth hold display area 223e4.

  After the data shift process in S1715, a display reserved ball count command is set based on the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b and the pending change information stored in the pending display information storage area 223e by the data shift process. (S1716), the variable effect processing (S1117) ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). The display pending ball count command set in the process of S1716 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process of the next main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6B), the number of reserved symbols indicated by the display reserved ball count command is displayed. In addition to displaying the execution symbols, the display mode (display color) of the corresponding hold symbol or execution symbol is controlled based on the hold change information included in the display hold ball count command.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1713, when it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is larger than “0” (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is “1”, Since the “slump effect” is being executed and the dummy symbol which is the dummy symbol is displayed, the processing of steps S1714 to S1716 is skipped in order not to shift the symbol at the current stage. Then, the variable effect processing (S1117) ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” is performed. However, it is possible to provide an effect in which the effect content and the reserved symbol are consistent with each other.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG. 47, execution examples of various effects such as the variable effect or the “slump effect” on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 43, each effect unit of “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (see FIG. 23A for a time chart). FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81, and shows a state immediately before a chance-eye development symbol appears. FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the gaseline pattern is stopped in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” in “pseudo pseudo-run 1” from the state of FIG. 43 (a), FIG. 43 (c) is a diagram showing a state where the holding symbol has shifted from the state of FIG. 43 (b) and the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” which is “gase pseudo-run 2” has been executed. FIG. 43D is a diagram showing a state in which the gaseline pattern is stopped in the effect element of “pseudo-change” in the “pseudo-sequence 2” from the state of FIG. 43C, and FIG. The hold symbol shifts from the state of FIG. FIG. 43F is a diagram illustrating a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” that is “3” is executed. FIG. 43F shows the state of “pseudo fluctuation” in “Gase pseudo-run 3” from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the gassed eyes design stopped in the effect element, and a series of "slump effect" was completed. In FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (f), the display form of the third symbol is omitted (the same applies to the description in FIGS. 44 to 47).

  In the gaming state of FIG. 43, in the “slump state”, a starting winning prize (that is, prize 1) occurs, and in the prize 1, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode is extracted. A new starting prize (that is, prize 2) is generated during the execution of the first production unit of the “slump effect” “Gase pseudo-ren 1”, and the non-reach (long) prize is also generated in the prize 2. In this situation, an additional “Slump effect” is set and executed based on the winning prize 2 and the preceding prize 1 (see FIG. 23A).

  Specifically, in FIG. 43A, in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm (the left symbol row Z1; the same applies hereinafter), the third symbol of the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and the right symbol is displayed. In the display area Dm3 (the right symbol row Z3; hereinafter the same), immediately before the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed, and further, the middle display area Dm2 (the middle symbol row Z2; the same hereinafter). Shows a state in which the third symbol is still changing at a high speed so as to be invisible. That is, the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” or the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” (hereinafter, the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” and the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)”) are collectively referred to. (Sometimes simply referred to as “effect element of high-speed fluctuation”) during the execution of a so-called “7” symbol and “8” symbol, immediately before the chance-eye development symbol appears (immediately before). The state of is shown.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the middle small area Ds2, in a situation where the variable effect or the “slump effect” is being executed, the character pattern is displayed in a preview mode suggesting that a chance-eye development pattern appears. Is displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if cheering is being performed. In the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Here, when the chance eye development symbol stops, the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" is started, and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" has the same design as the left display area Dm1 in the middle display area Dm2. An effect is performed to determine whether the “7” symbol stops and a chance symbol appears or a symbol (for example, “8” symbol) different from the left display area Dm1 stops and a gassiness symbol appears. .

  In the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and a reserved symbol is displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db2. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the 2 holding symbols indicate that the holding ball of each effect unit of “slump effect” is displayed. This indicates that the number is two.

  Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the hold symbol displayed in the second hold symbol display area Db2 are displayed at the timing when the ball wins in the winning openings 77a and 78a. On the other hand, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is a dummy reserved display displayed at the timing when the ball has won the dummy winning opening 75. When the player recognizes this situation, it is grasped that the effect unit performed by the third symbol display device 81 exists three times including the effect unit being executed.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (b), the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The gassess pattern of the "7" design in the area Dm1 and the "8" design of the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 is displayed in a pseudo manner, and the "slump effect" This suggests a state as if one of the effect units ends with "losing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43B, the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” ends in the main display area Dm, and one effect unit of the “slump effect” ends. I guess.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (c), from the state of FIG. 43 (b), a new change (production unit) is started again from the gassess eye pattern of “788” which has been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. , All the display areas Dm <b> 1 to Dm <b> 3 are changing at high speed so that they cannot be visually recognized.

  At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, a display mode similar to that of FIG. 43B is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, a new effect unit is started, so that the state of FIG. , The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased, and the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is shifted to the execution symbol display area Db0 and displayed as the execution symbol, and the second symbol is displayed. The reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db2 is shifted to the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and displayed as a reserved symbol. Note that the reserved symbols displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 are shifted and displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, so that the reserved symbols are not displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2.

  That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a dummy hold display, and the main display area Dm is in a state where an effect unit based on the dummy hold display is being executed.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (d), the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The gassess pattern of the "7" design in the area Dm1 and the "8" design of the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 is displayed in a pseudo manner, and the "slump effect" This suggests a state as if one of the effect units ends with "losing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43 (d), the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” ends in the main display area Dm, and one effect unit of the “slump effect” ends. I guess.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (e), from the state of FIG. 43 (d), a new variation (production unit) is started again from the gassess eye pattern of “788” stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. , All the display areas Dm <b> 1 to Dm <b> 3 are changing at high speed so that they cannot be visually recognized.

  At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the same display mode as that in FIG. 43D is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, a new effect unit is started, so that the state in FIG. , The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted, and the holding symbol displayed in the first holding symbol display area Db1 is shifted to the execution symbol display area Db0 and displayed as the execution symbol. Note that, since the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 has been shifted and displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol is not displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1.

  In other words, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a permanent hold display, and the main display area Dm is in a state where an effect unit based on the permanent hold display is being executed.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (f), the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The gassess pattern of the "7" design in the area Dm1 and the "8" design of the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 is displayed in a pseudo manner, and the "slump effect" This suggests a state as if one of the effect units ends with "losing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43 (f), the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” ends in the main display area Dm, and one effect unit of the “slump effect” ends. I guess.

  Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased after the end of the effect unit, and a series of “slump effects” ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of a plurality of “pseudo consecutive” effects performed in the “slump effect” on the third symbol display device 81 (as a time chart, “special reach” in FIG. 22B). ").) FIG. 44A shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” or the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” is executed in “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 44B is a diagram showing a state immediately before a chance-eye-development symbol appears. FIG. 44B shows the first chance-eye symbol in the effect element of “pseudo-change” from the state of FIG. FIG. 44C shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” in which all symbols are changed again from the state of FIG. 44B is executed. FIG. 44D is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” has been executed from the state of FIG. 44C. 44 (e) shows “high-speed fluctuation (short-time fluctuation) in which all symbols fluctuate again from the state of FIG. 44 (d). 44F is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element is being executed. FIG. 44F shows a state immediately before a reach formation symbol appears in the effect element of “pseudo variation” from the state of FIG. It is a figure showing a state.

  Specifically, in FIG. 44 (a), the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the second symbol “8” is displayed in the right display region Dm3. Immediately before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and rapidly changing. In other words, this shows a state immediately before (immediately before) the so-called “7” symbol and the “8” symbol appear, and the chance element development symbol appears while the “high-speed fluctuation” effect element is being executed.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the middle small area Ds2, in a situation where the variable effect or the “slump effect” is being executed, the character pattern is displayed in a preview mode suggesting that a chance-eye development pattern appears. Is displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if cheering is being performed. In the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Further, in the cockpit display area Db, while the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Accordingly, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that the variable effect and each of the “slump effect” This indicates that the number of reserved balls in the effect unit is 0.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 44B, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle display region Dm2 of the main display region Dm from the state of FIG. It is determined that the chance symbol pattern is determined by the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3, and the "slump effect" is developed (continued) by the appearance of the chance symbol symbol. Suggests. Therefore, when visually recognizing the state of FIG. 44B, the player recognizes that the “pseudo-run” does not end in the main display area Dm, and that the “slump effect” is continuously performed. The display mode of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (c), from the state of FIG. 44 (b), the chance pattern of “778” stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm starts to change again, and the entire display areas Dm1 to Dm3 Indicates a state in which it is fluctuating at a high speed so as to be invisible.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a "x2" symbol indicating that the chance symbol symbol has appeared to have developed into the second "simulated consecutive" effect is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, up to five “pseudo-ream” effects can be executed in the “slump effect”, and the larger the number of “pseudo-ream” effects performed, the greater the winning time is selected. Since the number of executions of the “pseudo-ren” effect is clearly displayed in the right small area Ds3, the player can always recognize the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the effect being executed. it can. In addition, the display mode of the other sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (d), from the state of FIG. 44 (c), the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and in the right display region Dm3. The third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display region Dm2, and the "7" symbol of the left display region Dm1 and the middle display region Dm2, The chance-eye symbol by the “8” symbol in the right display area Dm3 is determined again, and the appearance of the chance-eye symbol suggests that the present “slump effect” will be developed (continued). Therefore, when visually recognizing the state of FIG. 44 (d), the player recognizes that the “pseudo-run” does not end in the main display area Dm and the “slump effect” is continuously executed. Note that the display mode of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (e), the chance pattern of “778” stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm starts to change again from the state of FIG. 44 (d), and all the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 are displayed. Indicates a state in which it is fluctuating at a high speed so as to be invisible.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a "x3" symbol indicating that the chance symbol symbol has developed into a third "simulated consecutive" effect is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the other sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (f), from the state of FIG. 44 (e), the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the right display region Dm3 In the figure, a state immediately before the third symbol of the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and is changing at high speed. In other words, the reach formation symbol by the “7” symbol appears during the execution of the effect element of “pseudo variation”, that is, the state immediately before (immediately before) the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. . The display modes of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44 (f), a plurality of “pseudo-runs” effects are performed because “reach display” appears in the third “pseudo-run” effect. By performing some "reach display" on the above, it is possible to focus on the subsequent effects (that is, "reach display") in a state where the expectation of the jackpot is increased, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the effect element of the “developability effect” performed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 45 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which “first development feasibility effect” is executed in “slump effect” on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram illustrating FIG. FIG. 45C is a diagram showing a state in which the “second development possibility production” is executed from the state of FIG. 45. FIG. 45C shows a state in which “third development possibility production” is executed from the state of FIG. FIG.

  Specifically, in FIG. 45 (a), first, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the “8” symbol third symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. The three symbols are stopped and displayed, and the third symbol of the “8” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2, and the “7” symbol in the left display area Dm1 and the “7” symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3. 8 ", a gassess chance pattern appears in a simulated manner, and the appearance of the gassess chance symbol indicates that the fluctuation effect is" losing display ".

  In addition, on the near side of the third symbol stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the liquid crystal screen of the central portion (mainly the middle display area Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially cracked. This shows a state in which an effect element of “first development enable / disable effect” as if the liquid crystal screen is broken is being executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pseudo crack in the liquid crystal screen spreads further from the effect element of the “first development enable / disable effect” and develops into a later-described “second development enable / disable effect” effect element (successful). ), Or the screen is broken in a pseudo manner from the state of the production element of the “first development possibility production”, and develops (successfully) into the “pseudo-ren” production or the production element of “Which reach”, or Four effect patterns are provided for determining whether the effect (that is, “slump effect”) ends (development failure) with the effect element of “1 development enable / disable effect”.

  Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45 (a), the effect being executed (that is, “Slump effect”) is changed to “the second development possibility” without confirming the gaseline pattern. Guess that it will develop into a directing element of "directing", a "pseudo-ren" directing, or a directing element of "either reach", and keep the player expecting the jackpot by continuing the directing. Can be. It should be noted that the “first development possibility production” is configured to be able to be performed within a period from the beginning of the “development possibility production” (that is, “0 second”) to “3 seconds”.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 45 (b), the display area of the pseudo crack is changed to the left display area Dm1, the right display area Dm3, and the sub-display area from the effect element of “first development possibility effect” of FIG. 45 (a). This shows a state in which the effect element of “second development possibility effect” expanded to Ds is being executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pseudo crack in the liquid crystal screen spreads further from the effect element of the “second development possibility effect” to develop into a later-described “third development possibility effect” effect element (successful). ), Or the screen breaks in a pseudo manner from the state of the production element of the “second development possibility production”, and develops (successfully) into a “pseudo-ren” production or a production element of “Which reach”, or Four effect patterns are provided for determining whether the effect (that is, "slump effect") ends (development failure) with the effect element of "2 development possible or not".

  Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45 (b), the effect being executed (that is, the “slump effect”) is changed to “third development possibility” without determining the gaseline pattern. Guess that it will develop into a directing element of "directing", a "pseudo-ren" directing, or a directing element of "either reach", and keep the player expecting the jackpot by continuing the directing. Can be. It should be noted that the “second development possibility production” is configured to be able to be performed in the range of “3 seconds” to “7 seconds” in the “development possibility production”.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 45 (c), the effect element of “third development enable / disable effect” in which the display area of the pseudo crack is further expanded from the effect element of “second development enable / disable effect” of FIG. 45 (b). Shows the state where is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the liquid crystal screen is pseudo-cracked from the state of the “third development feasibility effect” production element from the “third development feasibility production” production element, Whether the stage will develop (successfully) into the stage or the stage of “Which Reach”, or the stage (the “Slump stage”) will end (failure of development) with the stage of the “third development possibility stage”. There are two production patterns.

  Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45 (c), the effect being executed (that is, the “slump effect”) is changed to the “pseudo ream” effect without determining the gaseline pattern. Alternatively, it can be inferred that it will evolve into a production element of "Which reach", and it is possible to cause the player to maintain an expectation of a jackpot by continuing the production. It should be noted that the “third development possibility production” is configured to be able to be performed in the range of “7 seconds” to “10 seconds” in the “development possibility production”.

  It should be noted that the effect elements of each “development effect” in the first embodiment are configured to display cracks as if the liquid crystal screen were broken in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds. On the other hand, the crack is prevented from entering (not reaching or displayed on the back side) in the cockpit display area Db. This is an effect of whether or not the stop effect of the “slump effect” that is being executed changes, and the effect that is suspended (fluctuating effect or “slump effect”) It does not mean to change. For this reason, the display mode of the cockpit display area Db that cannot be changed by the “development enable / disable effect” should be maintained as it is even if the “development enable / disable effect” effect element is successfully developed. No crack is displayed up to the cockpit display area Db, indicating that no change is made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” and an effect element of “development feasibility effect” performed in “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24 (b)). FIG. 46A shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” is being executed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, and shows a state immediately before a chance-eye development symbol appears. FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram showing a state as to whether or not the chance symbol pattern stops in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” from the state of FIG. 46 (a). ) Is a diagram showing a state in which a gassess eye symbol appears in the effect element of “pseudo variation” from the state of FIG. 46 (b), and FIG. 46 (d) shows a state of FIG. 46 (c) from the state of FIG. FIG. 46 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” ends and the variable effect ends due to the appearance of the gassess eye symbol, and FIG. 46 (e) shows FIG. 46 (d). Figure showing the state in which the "third development feasibility effect" is executed from the state of Ri, as shown in FIG. 46 (f) is a view state is "the third development propriety demonstration" from showing a state in which the chance eyes pattern successful development was revealing of Fig. 46 (e).

  Specifically, in FIG. 46A, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the eighth symbol “8” is displayed in the right display region Dm3. Immediately before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and rapidly changing. In other words, this shows a state immediately before (immediately before) the so-called “7” symbol and the “8” symbol appear, and the chance element development symbol appears while the “high-speed fluctuation” effect element is being executed.

  In the sub-display area Ds, in the middle small area Ds2, a character pattern is displayed in a notice mode indicating that a chance-eye development pattern appears in a situation where “slump effect” is being executed. I have. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if cheering is being performed. In the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Further, in the cockpit display area Db, while the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Accordingly, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that the variable effect and each of the “slump effect” This indicates that the number of reserved balls in the effect unit is 0.

  Next, in FIG. 46B, from the state of FIG. 46A, the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed in the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and “7” in the left display region Dm1. This shows a state in which a chance-eye development symbol is determined by the symbol "8" and the symbol "8" in the right display area Dm3, and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" is being executed in the main display area Dm.

  In the effect element of this "pseudo fluctuation", in the middle display area Dm2, the "7" symbol which is the same symbol as the left display area Dm1 stops and a chance symbol symbol appears, or a symbol different from the left display area Dm1. (For example, the “8” symbol) is stopped, and an effect is performed as to whether or not the gassess eye symbol appears. The display modes of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 46C, the state immediately before the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 46B. I have. In other words, while the “pseudo fluctuation” is being executed, a so-called “Gassens-eye” symbol appears in the “7” symbol in the left display area Dm1 and the “8” symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3. The state immediately before (immediately before) is shown. The display modes of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 46 (d), the third symbol “8” is stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The gassess pattern of the "7" design in the area Dm1 and the "8" design of the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 is displayed in a pseudo manner, and the "slump effect" Indicates a state as if it were ended with "miss display". Therefore, when visually recognizing the state of FIG. 46D, the player presumes that the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” ends in the main display area Dm, and the “slump effect” ends. .

  In addition, the character design in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner because “miss display” appears in the “slump effect” in a pseudo manner. The other display modes of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in the state of FIG.

  Next, the state of FIG. 46E shows a state in which the effect element of “third development possibility effect” has been executed from the state of FIG. 46D.

  Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46 (e), the effect being executed (that is, the “slump effect”) is changed to the “pseudo ream” effect without determining the gaseline pattern. Alternatively, it can be inferred that it will evolve into a production element of "Which reach", and it is possible to cause the player to maintain an expectation of a jackpot by continuing the production. In addition, the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 46 (f), the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-cracked from the state of FIG. FIG. 46E shows a state in which the gassed eye symbol (ie, “788”) displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 46E is replaced with a chance eye symbol (ie, “778”).

  Therefore, when visually recognizing the state shown in FIG. 46 (f), the player feels happiness due to the fact that the content guessed in the state shown in FIG. 46 (e) is correct, and the player continues to produce effects. The expectation to the jackpot by the can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect element of “pseudo-fluctuation” and the effect element of “reach reach” performed in “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24 (b)). FIG. 47A shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” is executed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, and immediately before the chance-eye development symbol stops in the main display area Dm. FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance symbol pattern has appeared in the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” from the state of FIG. 47 (a), and FIG. 47 (c). ) Is a state in which the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” is executed after all the symbols have changed again from the state of FIG. 47 (b), and shows a state immediately before the reach forming symbol appears. FIG. 47 (d) is a view showing a state in which the reach forming symbol has appeared from the state of FIG. 47 (c), the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db have been deleted, and the reach forming symbol has been enlarged. FIG. 47 (e) shows the state shown in FIG. FIG. 47F is a diagram illustrating a state in which the rendering element of “Which reach” is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state, and FIG. 47F is a state in which the big hit symbol has appeared from the state of FIG. FIG.

  Specifically, in FIG. 47 (a), the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the “8” symbol third symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. Immediately before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and rapidly changing. In other words, this shows a state immediately before (immediately before) the so-called “7” symbol and the “8” symbol appear, and the chance element development symbol appears while the “high-speed fluctuation” effect element is being executed.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the middle small area Ds2, in a situation where the variable effect or the “slump effect” is being executed, the character pattern is displayed in a preview mode suggesting that a chance-eye development pattern appears. Is displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if cheering is being performed. In the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Further, in the cockpit display area Db, while the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Accordingly, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or “slump effect” is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that the variable effect and each of the “slump effect” This indicates that the number of reserved balls in the effect unit is 0.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 47B, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 47A, and the left display area Dm1 It is determined that the chance symbol pattern is determined by the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3, and the "slump effect" is developed (continued) by the appearance of the chance symbol symbol. Suggests. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 47B, the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” does not end in the main display area Dm, and the “slump effect” is continuously executed. recognize. Note that the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 47 (c), from the state of FIG. 47 (b), the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the right display region Dm3 In the figure, a state immediately before the third symbol of the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and is changing at high speed. In other words, the reach formation symbol by the “7” symbol appears during the execution of the effect element of “pseudo variation”, that is, the state immediately before (immediately before) the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. .

  However, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a "x2" symbol indicating that the chance symbol symbol has appeared to develop into a second "simulated ream" effect is displayed. The other display modes of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in the state of FIG.

  Next, in the state of FIG. 47D, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. This shows a state in which the "reach display" is determined and the effect element of "which reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In the effect element of "Which reach", first, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the symbol “7” during the stop display is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is fluctuated at a low speed so as to be visible (for example, , Low-speed scrolling from the “6” symbol to the “7” symbol.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased along with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the effect element of "Which reach", and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are not visible. It is in a state.

  This is because the sub display area Ds mainly has a function of suggesting whether or not “reach display” occurs in the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” in the main display area Dm, and “reach display” in the main display area Dm. Is generated, the existence significance of the sub-display area Ds is reduced. In addition, when “reach display” occurs in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the “reach display” becomes “big hit display” or “loss display”. Accordingly, attention to the display content of the sub-display area Ds indicating the occurrence of the “reach display” is diminished. Therefore, when “reach display” occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of “reach display” that the player pays attention to. And the sub-display area Ds is erased with the enlargement.

  In the state of FIG. 47 (d), a “× 2” symbol is displayed in a portion corresponding to the right small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, similarly to the display state of FIG. 47 (c). Therefore, as in FIG. 47 (c), this indicates that the second “pseudo-run” effect has been developed.

  This means that the “× 2” symbol indicates to the player the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuating effect or “slump effect” during execution, and the “× 2” symbol during the fluctuating effect or “slump effect”. The confirmation allows the player to predict whether or not the fluctuating effect or the “slump effect” during the execution is a big hit, and gives an interest based on the prediction.

  In addition, the cockpit display area Db is a display that indicates how many floating effects or “slump effects” are on hold, and a “reach display” that can be expected to be a big hit in the running floating effects or “slump effects”. In the event of occurrence, the player may change the running variable effect or “Slump effect” to “Big hit display” or “Loose display”, depending on how many variable effects or “Slump effects” are on hold (standby). We pay attention to whether it becomes.

  For this reason, the player does not pay attention to the holding symbol and the execution symbol indicating the number of balls to be held in the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect”, and the holding symbol and the execution symbol are displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the “reach display”. Is displayed, the player cannot concentrate on the effect of “reach display”, and the player may feel troublesome in displaying the reserved symbol and the executed symbol.

  The reserved symbols displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 of the cockpit display area Db do not have a direct relation to the fluctuating effect or the “slump effect” being executed. . Furthermore, the holding symbols displayed in the first to fifth holding symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are different from the running control of the running effect or the display control of the “slump effect” (that is, the changing effect process (see FIG. 42)). The display is controlled by system processing (hold display setting processing (see FIG. 38) in the audio lamp control device 113). During the execution of "reach display", many additional effects are executed for many sprites by displaying various character designs and displaying many effects on each character design, etc. This is a situation where the processing load of display control is increasing. In such a situation, when the display control of a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the fluctuating effect or the “slump effect” during execution is performed, the number of the sprites of each reserved symbol is equal to the number of the third symbol display device 81. The processing load related to the entire display control is increased, and a display abnormality such as a so-called dropped frame may occur.

  Further, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db takes over (inherits) and displays the display mode of the held symbol changed by the "hold change notice", and is executing in the display mode. In order to show the jackpot expectation degree of the variable effect, the direct effect has a direct relationship with the active variable effect or “slump effect”. However, the "preliminary change notice" indicates not only the appearance expectation of "big hit display" but also the appearance expectation of "reach display". For this reason, when the “reach display” appears, it is a state in which the appearance expectation degree of the “reach display” as the “pending change notice” has been completed. Further, when the “reach display” appears, it is in a state where the suggestion of the appearance expectation degree of the “big hit display” is satisfied to a certain extent (for example, half). Further, as described above, when the “reach display” appears, the player is paying attention to the content of the effect of the “reach display”, and the interest in the display mode of the “suspension change notice” in the execution symbol is weakened. I have.

  Therefore, during the execution of the "reach display", the hold symbol and the execution symbol with a low degree of attention of the player are deleted, and the effect of "reach display" is mainly performed on the display screen, thereby displaying the player in the "reach display". Can be noticed (concentrated). In addition, by deleting the holding symbols and the execution symbols having a low degree of attention of the player, the burden on the display control is removed in advance, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the game, such as dropping frames. It is possible to prevent display abnormalities from occurring.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (e), from the state of FIG. 47 (d), in the main display area Dm, an effect is performed when the “big hit display” becomes “big hit display” or “loss display”. It shows the state where it is.

  In the direction of the "which direction", the "7" symbol forming the "big hit display" and the "8" symbol forming the "losing display" extrude each other outside the display area. You. Then, in the stage of the “Which direction”, if the “7” symbol forming the “big hit display” pushes out the “8” symbol from the display area, and the “7” symbol is displayed in the center of the display area. It is set so as to be a big hit and a "big hit display" appears as a display result. On the other hand, when the "8" symbol constituting the "losing display" pushes out the "7" symbol from the display area, and the "8" symbol is displayed in the center of the display area, the symbol is lost and the display result is "losing display". Is set to appear.

  In the state of FIG. 47 (e), the reach forming symbol of the “7” symbol, which is the cause of the effect element “this way reach”, is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. “Which effect” indicates whether the “slump effect” being executed is “big hit display” or “loss display”, but since it is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is temporarily reached. When "Which reach" is performed in a state where no formed symbol is displayed, the player sometimes forgets which third symbol causes the "reach display" to occur. On the other hand, if the reach formation symbol is displayed large during the execution of "Which Reach", the "Which production" becomes difficult to see, and the production of the "Which production" is obstructed by the third design. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, during the execution of "Which effect", the reach formation symbol of the third design, which has caused "Which reach", is displayed in a small size at the upper left of the display area of the third design display device 81. . With this configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that the “reach display” has occurred without obstructing the “representation effect”, and to determine the type of the third symbol that has generated the “reach display” Can be clearly suggested to the person.

  In the state of FIG. 47 (e), a portion corresponding to the right small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds has a “× 2” symbol as in the display states of FIGS. 47 (c) and 47 (d). Is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (f), from the state of FIG. 47 (e), the “7” symbol which is the same symbol as the reach forming symbol is displayed in “Which reach”, and the “7” symbol in the main display area Dm. "Big hit display" is appearing. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of happiness and satisfaction with the appearance of the “big hit display” as a result of the “slump effect” being performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 uses the third symbol display device 81 so as not to fall into a situation where the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the fluctuation effect of the third symbol. When the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is executed based on the winning in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a for the first time from the slump state in which the fluctuation effect is not performed, the time of the actual fluctuation effect is taken. The third symbol display device 81 executes a long slump effect. With such a configuration, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, the situation in which the effect is not performed by the third symbol display device 81 is reduced, and the player is not woken up. Can be.

  Further, based on the winning in the dummy winning opening 75, the dummy hold display is displayed in the same manner as the actual permanent hold display, and when the "slump effect" is executed, the dummy hold display is digested (erased). . With this configuration, whether the lottery of the first symbol (the third symbol) is actually performed by entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75 It is difficult to identify whether or not the lottery of the first symbol (third symbol) is actually performed by entering the ball, and the third symbol is displayed by the "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect time performed on the display device 81 can be made longer than the time of the actual variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a larger number of effects than the actually obtained variable effects, and to improve the interest of the game by the number of the effects. In addition, since the number of executed symbols and the number of held symbols can be displayed while matching the number of rendered symbols, the dynamic rendering state on the third symbol display device 81 can be lengthened, and the player can be displayed. It is possible to provide an effect that does not make the user feel uncomfortable.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a “slump effect”, a special figure is used in order to match the displayed execution and pending symbols with the number of executions of the effect unit of the “slump effect”. When a predetermined time elapses after the balls are started and won in the winning openings 77a, 78a and the "slump effect" is started, the balls held in the holding device 73 are made to win in the dummy winning opening 75, and the dummy holding display is performed. Display the pending symbol as. Then, every time the effect unit of one “Slump effect” ends, the execution symbol is erased, the holding symbol which is the dummy holding display is moved to the execution symbol, and the next “Slump effect” is performed based on the moved execution symbol. , An effect as if the variable effect were completed once is executed. With this configuration, the dynamic effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is performed for the variation time of the acquired variable effect, while executing the effect unit equal to or more than the acquired number of times of the variable effect. By lengthening the time and reducing the situation in which the third symbol display device 81 is not performing the dynamic effect of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from getting up and to improve the interest in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the “slump state” is the “non-reach” effect mode, the variation time of the acquired variable effect is changed. Further, an extended time for performing an additional effect is acquired by lottery, and a “slump effect” is executed during the total time of the acquired fluctuation time and the extended time. With such a configuration, even if the variable effect does not provide a jackpot, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set longer than the variable time of the acquired variable effect. By reducing the number of situations in which the third symbol display device 81 is not performing the dynamic effect of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from getting up and running.

  Furthermore, in the “slump state”, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the winning start is “effect display” (ie, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, or “special reach” effect mode). ), The extended time is not drawn, and one or more “pseudo-ren” effects are executed according to the obtained fluctuation time, and the effect element of “Which reach” is executed. In this way, when "reach display", which does not need to extend the production time, is acquired, the lottery and acquisition of the extended time are not performed, thereby reducing the processing load related to the extraction of the extended time. , The management of the production time of the “slump production” becomes easy.

  Further, when the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the winning start during the “slump effect” is the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, the extended time is not determined by lottery, and “extended time” is determined according to the acquired variable time. The effect time of the "slump effect" is configured to be added. This is because the already-executed "slump effect" has already acquired the extended time, and if the additional time is acquired in this state, the effect time of the "slump effect" will be longer than necessary. And the management of the production time becomes complicated. Therefore, when the variable effect is acquired during the “Slump effect”, the processing load related to the extraction of the additional time is reduced by configuring so that the additional time is not extracted, and the “Slump effect” The management of the production time becomes easy.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the production time (variation time) of all the production elements of the variable production that can be executed in the “normal state” is an integral multiple of the production time in units of “5 seconds” (ie, “ 5 seconds "," 10 seconds "," 15 seconds "," 20 seconds "," 25 seconds "or" 50 seconds "). In the "slump state", the effect time of all effect elements other than the effect element of "development availability effect" is also configured as an integral multiple of the effect time in units of "5 seconds". The extended time selected in the “slump state” is also configured by an integral multiple of the effect time in units of “5 seconds”. With this configuration, when performing a “slump effect” composed of a plurality of effect units in relation to one acquired variable effect, the fluctuation time (and extension time) of the variable effect and the “slump effect” ”, And even if a plurality of“ Slump effects ”are executed in relation to one variable effect (and extended time), the variable time (and extended time) And the production time can be matched.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 does not provide a variation in the number of fluctuation patterns of the “pseudo-ren” effect, and provides only a fluctuation pattern in which the number of “pseudo-ren” effects is one. Even in this case, the variation pattern of the “pseudo rendezvous” effect can be executed a plurality of times as the “slump effect”, so that it is possible to enrich the effect variations while reducing the ROM capacity, Interest can be improved.

  In addition, during execution of the “slump effect”, the ball held in the holding device 73 is made to win in the dummy winning opening 75 in accordance with the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and based on the winning, a holding symbol that is a dummy holding display is displayed. By displaying them in the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to display one more reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db than the acquired number of reserved balls for the variable effect. In addition, even if the number of “Slump effect” effect units is larger than the number of executions of the acquired variable effect, consistency between the “Slump effect” effect unit number and the reserved symbol can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the effect in which the lottery was performed without any inconsistency in the effects was performed more than the actual number of times of the variable effects.

  Further, based on the dummy hold command received from main controller 110, voice lamp control device 113 can execute a pre-reading process, similarly to the case where the hold ball count command is received. In the pre-reading process based on the dummy hold command, it is determined whether the “slump effect” to be executed is correct or not, and whether the “hold change notice” is performed by referring to the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e based on the match. Will be drawn. With such a configuration, the “suspension change notice” is executed even for the pending symbols related to the “slump effect”, and the effects can be enriched in variations.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of effect units are executed in the “slump effect”, but the “hold change notice” of the “slump effect” determines a plurality of effect units collectively. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to perform a lottery of “hold change notice” for each effect unit of “slump effect”, and to simplify the control regarding “hold change notice” at the time of “slump effect”. This makes it easy to create a program and reduces the processing load.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable effect obtained based on the winning of the ball in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is an effect mode including "reach display". In this case, since the “pseudo-ren” effect that does not consume the reserved symbol is performed instead of the “pseudo-ren” effect that consumes the reserved symbol, there is no need to display an additional reserved symbol. The configuration is such that the ball that has been hit does not flow into the dummy winning opening 75. With this configuration, a “pseudo-ren” effect that does not consume reserved symbols in the “slump effect” was performed, and the same number of “slump effect” effect units as the actual effect unit (fluctuating effect) was performed. Even in this case, consistency between the number of effects in the effect unit of the “slump effect” and the number of pending symbols can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without any inconsistency in the effect.

  Further, in the first embodiment, even when the “slump effect” is won in the “big hit display”, in the case of the variable effect including the “reach display”, the extended time is not acquired and the series of the “slump effect” Is the same as the fluctuation time of the obtained fluctuation effect. That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the “slump effect” are synchronized. Therefore, even when a command related to an effect related to a jackpot (ie, an opening effect) or the like is transmitted from the main control device 110, it is possible to match the contents of the effect, and from the end of the “Slump effect” to the effect of the jackpot effect. At the start, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause discomfort.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable effect obtained based on the winning of the ball in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is an effect mode including "reach display". In this case, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbol or the execution symbol as the dummy holding display is not displayed. Is increased by one rank (for example, the display mode of “none” is changed to the display mode of “blue”). Here, if the display mode of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol is upgraded by one rank, the display mode (that is, the display mode of “green” or “red”) indicating that “reach display” or the like is determined is adopted. At this time, if the reserved symbol corresponding to the production mode in which the “reach display” does not appear is raised by one rank, there is a possibility that inconsistency may occur in the production content. Therefore, in the hold symbol or the execution symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of the loss, the lowest display mode (that is, "none (white)") in which the effect content does not conflict even if the display mode is raised by one rank. By displaying the reserved symbol or the execution symbol of (display mode), it is configured not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player.

  Further, the MPU 221 of the first embodiment performs a new start winning in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during the “slump effect”, that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than “0”. The progress status of the "slump effect" is determined, and if an effect other than the extended time in the "slump effect" is being performed, the value of the extended time is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g. . With such a configuration, when a new start winning is generated during the “Slump effect”, each “Slump effect” is performed in performing the additional “Slump effect” for the “Slump effect” being executed. In order to achieve the match, the extension time set for performing the additional effect can be temporarily reset, and the effect content of the “Slump effect” can be newly set. This is because if the effect element other than the effect element during the extended time, that is, the effect element at the previous stage of the effect element based on the extended time is being executed, the effect element corresponding to the acquired extended time is executed. This is because, even if the extended time is once reset and the production contents of a series of “slump productions” are set again, no inconsistency occurs in the production contents.

  Furthermore, when the fluctuation pattern acquired in the “slump state” includes “reach display”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set based on the value of the set slump effect timer 223g. , "0" are cleared. This is because a fluctuation pattern including “reach display” is performed for a relatively long fluctuation time, and a new prize may be generated during the fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously perform the “slump effect” based on winning in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a thereafter, a fluctuation pattern including “reach display” is executed. In this case, after setting the “slump effect” based on the fluctuation pattern including the “reach display”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is initialized, and “slump state” is used instead of “slump state” until the slump state is entered again. The following effects are performed as "normal state". Also, at this stage, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223g, there is no need to grasp the progress of the “slump effect”, and it is no longer necessary to perform the shift control of the hold symbol including the dummy hold display, The control load on the MPU 221 can be reduced. In addition, when a relatively long fluctuation time is acquired based on the start winning in the “slump state”, the method of not executing the additional “slump effect” based on the subsequent starting winning is limited to the above control contents. Instead, any control content may be used as long as the additional “slump effect” is not executed.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "10 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect", when the dummy symbol, which is the dummy symbol, is displayed, that is, the dummy ball number counter is displayed. When the value of 223c is larger than "0", it is regarded as the end timing of one effect unit in "slump effect (that is," pseudo-sequence "effect)", and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by one. At the same time, a shift process is executed in the hold display information storage area 223e. With this configuration, by displaying the start and end of the “slump effect” and the shift display of the pending symbol and the execution symbol in a consistent manner, it is possible to produce an effect as if the variable effect were completed once. It is possible to execute the “slump effect” more than the actual number of times of the variable effect, without any discomfort.

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment performs the “Slump effect” in the “Slump effect” which is executed based on the previous winning prize to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the “Slump state”. If a floating effect is acquired based on a new start winning in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a during the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the "Slump effect" of the extended time based on the previous starting winning It is. For this reason, in performing an additional “slump effect” based on a new start winning, in order to match each “slump effect”, the remaining time of the extra time once obtained based on the previous start winning is temporarily determined. Is stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to “0” (S1423 in FIG. 39). And it is comprised so that the effect content of a "slump effect" may be reset based on the fluctuation time acquired based on a new starting winning. Therefore, even when a variable effect is added due to a new start winning in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized. The end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the “slump effect” can be synchronized without performing complicated control.

  Furthermore, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to set each effect unit performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and when setting again, The remaining remaining time less than one production unit is compensated for by the “expansion feasibility production”, which is a production that does not cause a sense of incongruity even if the production is interrupted on the way, and has a flexible (with a wide range) production time. Set as follows. In addition, the maximum effect time of the “development possibility effect” is configured to be equal to the obtainable extended time. With this configuration, a situation in which a “slump effect” longer than the acquired variable effect is being performed, that is, during the execution of the “slump effect” based on the extended time, a new Even if a variable production is added due to the start winning, the development time can be made consistent by the "development feasibility production" that can be executed with a width less than the extension time, and the acquired fluctuation production Since the end timing and the end timing of the entire “slump effect” can be synchronized, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without inconsistency in the effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 have the same number of prize balls of three. With such a configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special figure winning opening 77a or 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based on the number of paid out prize balls alone. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is a fluctuating effect in the “normal state” or a “slump effect in the“ slump state ”based on the number of paid-out balls only. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and getting up in the game even when performing a "slump effect" that is performed for a longer time than the actual variable effect. can do.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the “slump effect” is started, the “slump state” is renewed on the main controller 110 side until the extension time in the “slump effect” ends. Without setting, when a series of "slump effects" are completed, the state is changed to "slump state". In other words, while a series of "slump effects" are being executed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuating effects has elapsed, and even if the state is in the demonstration effect internally, the state changes to the "slump state" for a while. Is waiting. Therefore, the main control device 110 is configured to complete a series of “slump effects” and then set the “slump effects” to the “slump conditions” again. There is no need to perform complicated control on the consistency with the effect, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced even when performing the slump effect.

  In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the confirmation command from the main control device 110, the effect status on the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the confirmation command is received (that is, during the fluctuation effect or “slump effect, The third symbol to be stopped and displayed is set on the basis of "". Specifically, if the “slump effect” is not being executed at the time of receiving the confirmation command, the confirmation command is received at the time of execution of the variable effect, and therefore, the display controller 114 is instructed to confirm and display the variable effect. A display confirmation command for On the other hand, when it is determined that the “Slump effect” is being executed when the confirmation command is received, the “Slump effect” is being executed, and the reception of the confirmation command at the first stop timing of “Gase pseudo-ren 2” is performed. Therefore, a first stop command for display for instructing the display controller 114 to perform the first stop of the “gase pseudo-run 2” of the “slump effect” (that is, the stop of the left symbol column Z1) is set. . As described above, when the determination command is received from the main control device 110, the effect corresponding to the effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 depends on whether the variable effect is being executed or whether the “slump effect” is being executed. The transmitted command can be transmitted to the display control device 114, and an effect that does not cause inconsistency in the effect content and that does not cause discomfort can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when an additional start winning is generated during execution of the “slump effect” and the number of suspended variable effects becomes “2” or more, the “slump effect” It is configured to execute a variable effect without executing the “effect”. With such a configuration, in a situation where the effect of executing the “slump effect” is poor (ie, in a state where the suspended number of the variable effect is accumulated to a certain extent), the variable effect is executed without executing the “slump effect”. Since it is not necessary to perform a complicated process for maintaining the consistency of the "slump effect", the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, the tip portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a of the first embodiment is formed to have a sharply inclined surface, and when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted toward the front passage wall 72a, The inclined surface is configured to be in surface contact with the front passage wall 72 a of the sorting entrance 72. With this configuration, when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a can be further tilted toward the front passage wall 72a side of the sorting ball opening 72, and the sorting ball opening 72 can be tilted. Can be reliably guided into the holding device 73.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet 72 is less likely to collide with the upper surface of the tip of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a, and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is inclined rearward of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring so as to collide with the surface (that is, the upper surface on the right side of the tilted holding device opening / closing plate 73a; see FIG. 5C), the impact when the ball collides with the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the holding device opening / closing plate 73a from being damaged.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the holding device 73 is configured to hold one ball, and the one ball is made to win in the dummy winning opening 75 to give a predetermined game value, while the “slump effect” is performed. In addition to simply giving a game value by linking to an effect (display of a hold symbol that is a dummy hold display), a variety of game variations can be enriched because the winning in the dummy winning opening 75 is related to the effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the above-mentioned interest can be achieved by the configuration in which one ball is retained in the retaining device 73, the configuration of the retaining device 73 can be made more compact than a conventional retaining device in which a plurality of retaining balls must be retained. it can. Therefore, the installation area of the holding device 73 in the game area can be reduced, and the degree of freedom of board design in the game area can be increased.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments at all, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other numerical values can of course be adopted.

  In addition, it is naturally possible to combine any of the configurations of the above-described embodiments with any of the configurations of the modified examples described below. Furthermore, it is naturally possible to combine any one of the following modified examples with one or a plurality of other modified examples. In these cases, further effects due to the application of each configuration can be obtained. Hereinafter, the description will be made based on the reference numbers of the components used in the description of the first embodiment. However, it is naturally possible to substitute the reference numbers of the same or similar parts in other embodiments.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, regarding the alternate sorting unit 71, the sorting ball entrance 72, the holding device 73, the board return opening 74, the dummy winning opening 75, the sorting device 76, the left route 77, the right route 78, the left special figure winning. The mouth 77a and the right special figure prize winning port 78a are unitized into one alternate distribution unit 71. On the other hand, each of the members 72 to 78a may be configured as a separate member, or each of the members 72 to 78a may be configured as a unit so as to be different from the alternate distribution unit 71. With this configuration, although the number of components increases, replacement of each of the members 72 to 78a at the time of failure becomes easy, and the efficiency of maintenance work of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, one ball is held in the holding device 73. On the other hand, two or more balls may be configured to be able to be held. In this case, when the release condition of the held ball is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed from the start of the “slump effect”), the plurality of held balls are all released at once. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of held balls are released one by one. In this case, it is possible to display a plurality of holding symbols, which are dummy holding displays, in the "slump effect", thereby increasing the effect units that can be executed in the "slump effect" and enriching the effect variations.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, in the "slump state", when the ball is started in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, the "slump effect" is executed irrespective of whether the variable effect based on the start winning is appropriate or not. I was On the other hand, it may be configured such that the “slump effect” is not performed when the acquired variable effect is a big hit, and the “slump effect” is performed only when the loss effect is a loss. The change pattern of the jackpot includes an effect element that is not included in the loss change pattern, such as an effect element of “re-change”. Therefore, when performing the "slump effect" so as to match the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, the processing becomes complicated and the control load may increase. Therefore, by configuring so that “slump effect” is performed only when the acquired variable effect is a loss change pattern, it is not necessary to match with the jackpot change pattern, so that the processing is simplified, and the control is simplified. The burden can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the variable effect obtained based on the winning winning in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is a big hit, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0". "And a variable effect may be performed without performing the" slump effect ".

<Modification 4>
In the above-described embodiment, in the “slump state”, when a ball is started at the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, regardless of whether or not a variable effect based on the starting winning is performed, and when the “reach display” is displayed. Even so, it was configured to execute a "slump effect". On the other hand, when the acquired variable effect is the effect mode of performing “reach display”, the “slump effect” is not performed, and the “slump effect” is performed only in the case of the “non-reach” effect mode. May be configured. The fluctuation pattern including “reach display” has various “reach display” effect elements, and the fluctuation pattern is diverse. Therefore, when the “slump effect” is performed so as to match the fluctuation pattern including the “reach display”, the processing becomes complicated and the control load may increase. Therefore, by configuring such that the “slump effect” is performed only when the acquired fluctuation effect is the fluctuation pattern of the “non-reach” effect mode, matching with the fluctuation pattern of the effect mode for executing “reach display” Since it is not necessary to take the above, the processing is simplified and the control load can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the variable effect acquired based on the winning winning in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a in the “slump state” is an effect mode including “reach display”, the main slump is performed. The value of the counter 203e may be cleared to "0", and the variable effect may be performed without performing the "slump effect".

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when a ball is won in the dummy winning opening 75, a reserved symbol is displayed as a dummy reserved display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, on condition that a prize is won in another winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 63), inflow to the out opening 66, passing of the ball to the second entrance opening 67, etc., a dummy symbol is displayed as a dummy symbol. May be displayed in the cockpit display area Db. In addition to the prize winning (inflow) of the ball, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the “slump effect”, or a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of dividing a reserved symbol into a plurality of pieces) with the “slump effect” is performed. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which a reserved symbol is displayed as a dummy reserved display. With this configuration, the holding device 73 and the dummy winning opening 75 are not required, so that the number of components can be reduced and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the “slump effect” was not mentioned for the fluctuation pattern including the “pseudo-ren” effect and the effect element of “re-change”, but the fluctuation including the effect element of “pseudo-response” effect and “re-change” You may be comprised so that "slump effect" may be performed in a pattern.

<Variation 7>
In the above-described embodiment, the effect element of “development feasibility effect” is configured to always start from “first development feasibility effect”. On the other hand, the production element of the “development possibility effect” may be configured to start from the “second development possibility effect” or the “third development possibility effect”. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the above-described embodiment, in the production element of “development feasibility production”, the first development feasibility production → “second development feasibility production” → “third development feasibility production” is developed in proportion to the passage of time. Was configured to change. On the other hand, you may comprise so that it may become a change mode which is not proportional to a lapse of time. Specifically, for example, a pattern that maintains the state of “first development possibility production” at all times, or a pattern that changes to “first development possibility production” after changing to “second development possibility production” , A pattern that suddenly changes from “first development feasibility production” to “third development feasibility production”, or “second development feasibility production” from “first development feasibility production” changes in “2 seconds”, A pattern or the like that changes in “1 second” is exemplified from “second development possibility production” to “third development possibility production”. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, the degree of development (contents) of the “developability effect” is set according to the remaining time of the “slump effect”. On the other hand, you may be comprised so that the development degree and a change pattern of "developability possibility production" may be selected according to a jackpot expectation degree. With such a configuration, the variation of the production can be abundant, and the jackpot expectation can be changed according to the development content of the “development feasibility production”, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Variation 10>
In the above-described embodiment, as the “developability effect” having the time adjustment function in the “slump effect”, an effect is provided in which the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially broken. On the other hand, an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable even when the execution time of the effect variably changes may be adopted as an effect for time adjustment in the “slump effect”. Specifically, for example, the “development possible / impossible effect” is performed by an effect as if the third symbol display device 81 was broken, such as a blackout effect in which the liquid crystal screen darkened, a freeze effect in which the liquid crystal screen was frozen on the same screen, and the like. May be configured to be performed. In addition, an effect that allows the player to predict that a specific effect will be repeatedly executed, such as an effect in which the fluctuating symbol temporarily stops and swings on the spot until the main stop, or an effect in which reciprocating motion is repeated. A “development possibility effect” may be performed. By configuring in this way, even if the "development effect" is suddenly started or interrupted and replaced by another effect, the time in the "slump effect" is kept while the player does not feel uncomfortable. It may be configured to adjust.

<Modification 11>
In the above-described embodiment, the “development enable / disable effect” and the “reach reach” are configured as the effect elements dedicated to the “slump effect”. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the “development possibility effect” or “Which reach” can be selected even in the fluctuation effect of the “normal state”. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 12>
In the above-described embodiment, the system is configured such that the state changes from the "slump state" to the "normal state" when the start winning is achieved after the "slump state" is once set. On the other hand, once the "slump state" is established, the "slump state" may be maintained for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined number of seconds or until the next big hit).

<Modification 13>
In each of the above embodiments, the special symbol lottery is configured such that only one of the “15R probable jackpot”, the “15R regular jackpot”, or the “2R probable jackpot” is given. On the other hand, a lottery different from the above jackpot (for example, “non-probable variable jackpot”, “latent probability variable jackpot”, so-called “sudden probability variable jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot)”), or “small jackpot” different from jackpot May be performed. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won, the game value given to the player is made different, thereby providing a variation in the game and realizing various game properties to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  In particular, when a "small hit" is provided in the special symbol lottery, when the small hit is won, the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 65a or the like is similar to or similar to the big hit to which the "latency probability fluctuation state" is given. Thus, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the “normal game state” and the “latency probability fluctuation state”. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve a game property for estimating which game state the game state is, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The "small hit" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a and the like are executed, but unlike the "15R certain change big hit" and the "2R certain change big hit", the transition of the gaming state is not executed.

<Modification 14>
In each of the above embodiments, when a ball wins in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like is acquired based on the winning timing, and a jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, a plurality of predetermined prize areas are provided in place of the special figure prize ports 77a and 78a, and when a ball flows into the prize area, a game value corresponding to the prize area is provided. Is also good. Specifically, for example, a first prize area to which a first game value (for example, “7R short jackpot”) is given when a ball flows in and a first game value higher than a first game value when a ball flows in A second prize area to which a second game value (for example, “15R probable big hit”) is provided. Then, the driving mode of the driving accessory such as the electric accessory may be changed in accordance with the game state, so that whether or not the ball flows down to each winning area may be different. The special figure prize ports 77a and 78a and the prize area may be used in combination. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the so-called loop type game specification is configured to maintain the “probability variation state” until the next big hit occurs only when the “15R certain change big hit” or the “2R certain change big hit” is won. . On the other hand, even if any of the jackpots is won after the end of the jackpot, a so-called ST type game specification in which a predetermined number of “probability variation states” are given without exception after the end of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above embodiments, the second symbol is variably displayed based on the passage of the ball to the second entrance 67, and when the winning result is derived in the variable display, the electric accessory 79 is opened for a predetermined time. It was configured to be in a state. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the electric accessory 79 may be displaced to an open state based on the ball entry into predetermined ball entry means. With this configuration, it is possible to create a game of how to make the ball enter the ball entry means in order to bring the electric accessory 79 into the open state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 17>
In the above-described embodiment, the stop display of the left symbol row Z1 of the "gase pseudo-run 2" in the "slump effect" and the determination timing of the variable effect are synchronized. On the other hand, the stop of the fluctuation of any symbol (for example, the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 or the right symbol row Z3, a pseudo stop such as a ballistic effect in the “reach display”) is synchronized with the confirmation timing of the fluctuation effect. It may be configured as follows.

<Modification 18>
In the above-described embodiment, the “slump effect” and the acquired variable effect are only synchronized with the stop display of the left symbol column Z1 of the “gase pseudo-ren 2” in the “slump effect” and the determination timing of the variable effect. Relatedly, until the final stop symbol appeared, the "slump effect" did not suggest the contents of the variable effect. On the other hand, at the time of the stop display of the left symbol column Z1 of the "gase pseudo-run 2" in the "slump effect", a result suggestion display indicating the result of the variable effect may be performed. Specifically, when the result of the fluctuation effect is “reach display” or “big hit display”, when the left symbol column Z1 of “gase pseudo-ren 2” is stopped, the symbol has a peculiar stop action (for example, a bouncing stop). Etc.).

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 performs dynamic display of the first symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is a decorative effect of the dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37. It was configured to execute a fluctuation effect of three symbols or a “slump effect”. On the other hand, by displaying a fourth symbol different from the first symbol display device 37 on the third symbol display device 81 and synchronizing the fourth symbol with the dynamic display and the fluctuation of the variable effect, the first symbol display device is displayed. It may be configured to have the same function as 37. With this configuration, a series of effects can be performed with only one display device (the third symbol display device 81), and the number of components can be reduced. In addition, the fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display of each special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the variation of the variation display of each special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. For example, even in the third symbol display device 81, even if the variation of the third symbol is temporarily stopped, blackout, or frozen, the execution of the fourth symbol is confirmed to confirm the variation effect (dynamic display). ) Can be grasped. Also, even during the execution of the "slump effect", the fluctuation of the fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display, so that the fourth symbol can be confirmed even during the execution of the "slump effect". , The start and end of the dynamic display can be recognized. Further, by displaying the number of reserved balls of the third symbol as the fourth symbol, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of retained balls of the variable effect acquired by the winning start.

<Modification 20>
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration is provided in which a reserved symbol, which is a dummy reserved display, is added and displayed without omission based on a ball entering the dummy winning opening 75. On the other hand, only when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a reserved symbol which is a dummy reserved display may be additionally displayed. Specifically, for example, only when the ball is continuously fired, a dummy symbol, which is a dummy symbol, is displayed based on the ball entering the dummy winning opening 75, or a predetermined announcement effect is displayed. If the winning lottery has been won, the reserved symbol, which is a dummy pending display, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance of the notice effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the presentation mode such as the appearance pattern of the reserved symbol which is the dummy reserved display, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, when the “slump effect” is executed, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released at the timing “6 seconds” have elapsed since the “first effect” of the “slump effect” was started. Then, the ball is made to enter the dummy winning opening 75 to display a dummy symbol which is a dummy symbol. On the other hand, the timing of winning the dummy winning opening 75 may be delayed from the above timing and set to a timing before the “second effect” of the “slump effect” is started. If the reserved symbol, which is the dummy reserved display, is displayed early, the suspended symbol is displayed, and the player stops firing the ball (so-called hitting), and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases. There is a risk of doing it. Therefore, when displaying the reserved symbol which is the dummy reserved display, it is displayed immediately before the second effect corresponding to the reserved symbol is executed, thereby preventing the player from being hit and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 10. The drop can be prevented.

<Variation 22>
In the above-described embodiment, when the variable effect is not executed on the third symbol display device 81, the state shifts to the “slump state”, and during the “slump state”, based on the start winning to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a. It was configured to execute a “slump effect”. On the other hand, in a situation where a special condition different from the above condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the "slump state", and the "slump effect" is executed based on the start winning at the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a. Is also good. Specifically, for example, the game state shifts to a “slump state” every time a predetermined time elapses from the start of the game, or when the game state is changed, the game state changes to the “slump state”, and the game state changes to a “slump state”. It may be configured to shift to the “slump state” when a winning in the winning opening is triggered. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 23>
In the above embodiment, the lottery information of the first symbol (the third symbol), which is one special symbol, is acquired due to the winning of the game ball to the left special symbol winning port 77a or the right special symbol winning port 78a, The first symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display device 81) is configured to display the lottery result of the first symbol (the third symbol) based on the lottery information. On the other hand, a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of a plurality of special symbols is configured to be executable, and lottery information of the first special symbol is acquired due to the winning in the left special symbol winning opening 77a, and the right special symbol is obtained. The lottery information of the second special symbol different from the first special symbol due to the winning in the winning opening 78a may be acquired, and the lottery may be performed for each. In addition, as a lottery method of a plurality of special symbols, a lottery method of executing a lottery of one of the special symbols with priority (a so-called priority change) or a lottery method of executing a lottery in the order of the acquired special symbols (a so-called “lottery method”). Or a winning order variation), or a lottery method (so-called simultaneous variation) for performing a lottery simultaneously and in parallel with each of the acquired special symbols may be configured.

<Modification 24>
In the above-described embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to perform additional resetting of the “slump effect” when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 during the execution of the “slump effect”. I was On the other hand, during the execution of the “slump effect”, an additional “slump effect” is reset when a pending ball number command output at the time of a new start winning from the main controller 110 is received. May be. Specifically, at the stage when the reserved number-of-balls command is received (ie, in the pre-reading process), the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the reserved number-of-balls command and stored in the reserved information storage area 223i in the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the above, control equivalent to S1418 to S1423 in the fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 39) is performed, and the content of the additional “slump effect” is set. With this configuration, the contents of the series of “Slump effects” can be reset when a new starting prize (ie, Win 2) occurs during the “Slump effects”. Can be reduced.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the “slump effect” is set without considering the fixed display time in the variable effect (that is, assuming that the fixed display time of the variable effect is “0”). On the other hand, the fixed display time of the variable effect may be set to a predetermined time (for example, “1 second”), and the “slump effect” may be set based on the fixed display time. In this case, by considering the confirmed display time in the execution of the variable effect, it may be difficult to adjust the execution time and the extension time of the effect element of the variable effect and the execution time of the effect unit of the “slump effect”. Executing the “development enable / disable effect” for adjustment of the remaining time makes it possible to adjust the fluctuation time and extension time of the variable effect including the fixed display time and the execution time of the effect unit of the “slump effect”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the effect contents are interrupted (frozen) when the “slump effect” is executed. Here, the determined display time of the effect unit in the “slump effect” and the determined display time in the normal variable effect are the same or approximate (for example, within ± 0.5 seconds at which it is difficult for a human to recognize the difference). This makes it easy to recognize the effect unit of “Slump effect” as execution of one variable effect. In this case, a plurality of variations (for example, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, and 2 seconds as the final display time) may be provided in the final display time in the variable effect.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, the extended time is added to the acquired fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect, and during the total time of the fluctuation time and the extension time, the “slump effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the fluctuation effect. Was configured to run. On the other hand, for an effect that can be executed (for example, a big hit effect, a variable display of a normal symbol, a small hit effect, etc.), an extra time is acquired, and the above-mentioned effect is obtained during the total time of the effect time and the extra time. You may be comprised so that a different alternative effect may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect for a longer time than the acquired execution time even in the variable display of a normal symbol and the effect of a big hit effect and a small hit effect. It is possible to make the period in which a typical effect is executed longer, and to improve the interest of the game. In this case, a plurality of variations may be provided in the big hit effect, the small hit effect, and the variable display time of the normal symbol.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, the real hold display and the dummy hold display are displayed in the execution symbol and the hold symbol, and the number of the symbol and the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display are suggested to the player. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the numbers indicate the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display to the player. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to secure a display area for displaying a symbol for indicating the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen composition in the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. Can be improved.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, the “slump effect” is performed over a plurality of variable effects. On the other hand, a series of effects such as “Slump effect” may be performed over one variable effect and another effect. Specifically, for example, a series of effects may be performed over a variable effect and a jackpot effect, a series of effects may be performed over a variable effect and a demonstration effect, or a variable effect and a small hit A series of effects may be performed over the effects. In this case, in the big hit production or the small hit production, a plurality of opening time variations are provided, and a series of production time is changed according to the opening time, thereby providing a series of production variations. It is possible to improve the interest of the people.

<Modification 29>
In the above embodiment, the drive timing of the holding device 73 is managed by the main control device 110, and the holding balls stored in the holding device 73 are released based on the control of the main control device 110 to win the dummy winning opening 75. I was letting it. On the other hand, it is also possible to control the drive timing of the holding device 73 by the sound lamp control device 113 and to release the holding ball stored in the holding device 73 based on the control of the sound lamp control device 113. Good. In this case, for example, an out ball is stored in the holding device 73, and the out ball is made to enter a ball entrance other than the winning opening for generating a prize ball. With such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect using the reserved balls stored by the audio lamp control device 113 having less restrictions than the main control device 110, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the effect and improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

<Modification 30>
In the above-described embodiment, as a driving timing of the holding device 73, when a winning start occurs in the “slump state”, the balls stored in the holding device 73 at a timing after a predetermined period has elapsed (after six seconds have elapsed from the starting winning). Is released to make the dummy winning opening 75 win. On the other hand, as the drive timing of the holding device 73, the ball stored in the holding device 73 is released at the timing when the start winning prize occurs or immediately after the occurrence of the starting prize, or the timing when a predetermined effect is generated (for example, The ball stored in the holding device 73 may be released at a timing when a notice or “reach display” or the like occurs.

<Modification 31>
In the above-described embodiment, the executable time of the “development feasibility effect” is set to a time shorter than the execution time (ie, 10 seconds) (ie, longer than 0 seconds and shorter than 10 seconds) of the “pseudo-ren” effect or the “gase pseudo-ren” effect. ). On the other hand, the executable time of the “development possible / impossible effect” may be the same as or longer than the “pseudo-sequence” effect or the “pseudo-sequence” effect. By configuring in this way, the “pseudo-ren” production or the “gase pseudo-ren” production is replaced with “development feasibility production”, or the “development feasibility production” is made “pseudo-ren” production or “gase pseudo-ren” production Can be replaced (changed), the variation of the effect can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, a rule (constraint) based on the execution of the “pseudo-ren” production and the “gase pseudo-ren” production, for example, a rule that “reach display” is always executed if the “pseudo-ren” production is performed more than once. Also, if "Pseudo Reen" production is performed three or more times, the rule that "Super Reach" or more is always performed, or "Gase Pseudo Reen" production will not be performed three or more times in a row If there is a rule, etc., the production of "Pseudo-ren" or "Pseudo-Pseudo-ren" should be replaced with "Direction of development" to execute the production in a consistent manner without rebelling the production rules. Can be.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, the condition for generating the “slump state” is set when a period in which the variable effect is not executed after the demonstration effect enters is 10 seconds. On the other hand, the entry condition of the “slump state” may be configured to occur immediately after the entry into the demonstration effect, or to be generated on condition that the frame button 22 is operated by the player. In this case, by setting the slump state on the condition that the user has tired of the current effect state and operated the frame button 22 such as volume change, light amount change, luminance change, character selection, and background selection of the pachinko machine 10, It is possible to execute an unusual effect for a player who is tired of the effect state of, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 33>
In the above embodiment, in order to synchronize the driving of the holding device 73 by the main control device 110 and the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113, a command from the main control device 110 is used. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the “slump effect”. On the other hand, when an error such as a command transmission error occurs, all the commands related to “Slump effect” from the main control device 110 cannot be accurately received, and the command related to “Slump effect” is only fragmented. Even in a situation in which a sound signal is not received (for example, only a slump command), the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute control relating to “slump effect”. In this case, for example, even when a dummy hold command is not received, display control relating to dummy hold display may be performed, or conversely, when a dummy hold command is not received, hold display may be performed. The sound lamp control unit 113 adjusts and changes the content of the "slump effect" such as by executing the "pseudo-result" effect that replaces one effect with the "development enable / disable effect" that does not use the hold display. May be. With such a configuration, no inconsistency occurs in the contents of the effects, no effect such as a so-called rule break due to the inconsistency of the effects can be prevented, and the player can be prevented from misunderstanding.

<Modification 34>
In the above embodiment, when performing the "slump effect", the last effect element in the "slump effect" is determined, and then the remaining effect elements are determined in order. On the other hand, the content of the “slump effect” may be determined in the descending order of the importance of the effect elements.

<Modification 35>
In the above embodiment, the main hold display and the dummy hold display are displayed as one individual hold display. On the other hand, the main hold display is constituted by a main display of one character design, the dummy hold display is constituted by a sub (auxiliary) display of the one character design, and the main hold display and the dummy hold display constitute one character. The hold display may be displayed so as to form a symbol. Further, a dummy hold display may be displayed by a decoration display related to the main hold display. The decoration display related to the reserved display is, for example, a design associated with one character design, a design attached to one character design, or a design capable of recalling one character. Any form may be used as long as it is provided.

<Modification 36>
In the above-described embodiment, the dummy hold display is consumed in the “slump effect”, so that the hold display is shifted at a timing different from the hold shift timing of the actual variable effect. On the other hand, the hold display may be performed at a timing other than the “slump effect” at a timing different from the actual shift effect hold shift timing.

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display is instructed from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Also, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device 114 may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation that becomes a big hit during the fluctuation effect of the third symbol (special symbol) or the “slump effect” which is held and executed in response to the ball entry (starting prize) into the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. Whether or not there is an effect or “slump effect” has been described in the case of performing “holding change notice” in the execution symbol and the holding symbol. On the other hand, in the variable display of the second symbol held and executed when the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (start winning), the variable display of the second symbol that is hit (stops at the symbol of “○”) is obtained. Using the second symbol holding lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, and the like, whether or not there is a fluctuation effect or a “slump effect” that becomes a big hit during the fluctuation effect of the third symbol, Or you may notify a player instead. This allows the player to know whether there is a winning variable display in the pending variable display of the second symbol, or in the active and pending variable display of the second symbol. . Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether or not the second symbol is a hit before performing the variable display of the second symbol. Some gaming machines have enhanced game performance depending on the presence or absence of the second symbol, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A third symbol consisting of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third design or the back image used in the fluctuation effect may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the “scheduled change announcement”, which is one form of the continuous announcement effect, is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol display device is provided with the fourth symbol display device together with the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” executed by the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the symbols, different from the “hold change notice” or the “hold change notice”, a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of variable effects or “slump effects” (hereinafter, including “hold change notice” “Referred to as“ continuous notice effect ”). In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. Also, by providing a pachinko machine 10 with a different role from each movable role that operates in accordance with various effects, and operating the character in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable effect or “slump effect”, a continuous notice is provided. An effect may be performed. In addition, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 in combination with the variable effect or “slump effect”.

  Thus, each time a variable effect or “slump effect” (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device. Or, the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode, a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illuminations 29 to 33 are turned on or blinked, thereby giving the player an expectation of a big hit. You can have. In addition, the player usually keeps watching the third symbol display device 81 on which the fluctuation effect or “slump effect” is performed and continues the game, but the fourth symbol display different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since a continuous announcement effect is performed by the display of symbols by the device, the operation of the accessory, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display is different from the usual for the player. It can be easily recognized that the effect has been performed. Further, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, actuation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. By causing the main control device 110 to perform a lottery process at the time of start / fail judgment or the start of change, and to cause the audio lamp control device 113 to perform a continuous announcement effect, and to cause the display control device 114 to perform a change effect or “slump effect”. When a continuous announcement effect is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each processing can be assigned to each control device. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) Or a combination thereof), the continuous announcement effect selected according to the game state after the end of the continuous announcement effect (“15R probable jackpot”, “15R regular jackpot”, “2R probable jackpot”, out) A plurality of aspects may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, when there is a prize (start winning) in the special figure prize port 77a, 78a, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by "1". A case has been described in which, in response to the ball number command, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203b are transmitted as they are to the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the start prize. May be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. When the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired along with the winning start, the information indicating the values of the respective counters is included in the reserved ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the value of each counter acquired with the start winning prize to the voice lamp control device 113 may be used, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be obtained by adding the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning prize to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each notified counter is included in the command in the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether or not such information may be included. Thereby, based on the information on the number of hold times included in the command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores, in one of the areas of the hold information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of hold times, the information included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is four times. However, the number is not limited to three, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls to be fluctuated or “slump effect” based on winning in the special figure prize openings 77a and 78a can be changed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or an area divided into four. May be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of the reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member holds the light emitting member. The number of balls may be notified.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable effect or the “slump effect” that is the variable display of the third symbol is a device that vertically scrolls the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the variation display of the symbol is not limited to the variation effect of the symbol, and for example, an effect performed by displaying or changing and displaying a variety of actions with one or more characters together with the symbol or separately from the symbol. It also includes indications. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect”, a case has been described in which a high-speed fluctuation in which the player scrolls all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the symbol sequence is displayed. Instead of displaying the high-speed fluctuation, all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a snow-noise shape in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. It may be displayed as an image.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value found in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.
<Group A: Performing dynamic effects over the set fluctuation time>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that may cause a big hit appears as a part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. While performing a pseudo effect as if it were performed (so-called “pseudo-repeated” effect), there is an effect that performs another effect whether or not a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Document 1 2015-134027)).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and it is not possible to create unexpectedness in the effect content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Group A has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, a selection unit (for example, a third symbol display device 81) for selecting an execution time of dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) performed on the display unit (for example, the third symbol display device 81). For example, a variation type counter CS1);
Dynamic display executing means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the execution time selected by the selecting means,
In the gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means,
Execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means;
In the case where the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining unit, when the execution determining unit determines that the dynamic display is not being performed, the display unit may be longer than the execution time selected by the selecting unit. A gaming machine A0 comprising: a specific effect execution unit (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing a specific effect (for example, “Slump effect”) instead of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine A0, the obtaining means obtains the lottery information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining means. Then, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means is selected by the selection means based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and the dynamic display execution means is selected based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Thereby, the dynamic display is executed in the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining means, when it is determined by the execution determining means that the dynamic display is not executed, the execution time selected by the selecting means in the display means by the specific effect executing means. For a longer time, the specific effect is executed instead of the dynamic display. Thus, by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which no effect is performed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, as the specific effect, for example, the same effect as the dynamic display, substantially the same or related effects, the same as the demonstration effect, substantially the same or related effects, the same as the big hit effect or the small hit effects, the same, approximately Examples are effects that are the same or related effects, effects that are completely different or not related to dynamic display, and the like.

In the gaming machine A0,
The specific effect execution means,
An extension time selecting means (for example, S1406 of a variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) when executing the specific effect;
A total time execution unit (for example, a slump effect timer 223g) for executing the specific effect during a total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection unit and the execution time selected by the selection unit; , A gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A0. That is, a predetermined extension time is selected by the extension time selecting means provided in the specific effect execution means when executing the specific effect. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means for a total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. . As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect for a time longer than the execution time of the selected dynamic display. By increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which no effect is performed on the display means, There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

In the gaming machine A0 or A1,
The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, it is determined whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, “losing display” or a gaess chance pattern) appears. (For example, at the time of stopping all the symbols such as the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", the effect of "pseudo-run", the effect of "pseudo-sequence" or the effect of "normal reach"),
The specific effect execution means,
In the specific effect, a plurality of execution units (for example, a first effect and a second effect in a “slump effect”) that execute the number of the determination effects greater than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit are provided. A gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A0 or A1. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether or not specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. An effect is performed. In the specific effect, a plurality of determination effects are executed in the specific effect by a plurality of execution units provided in the specific effect execution unit. Thereby, in the specific effect, by performing the number of determination effects greater than the number of dynamic displays actually acquired, by giving an illusion to the player as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained, the game There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2,
The plurality of times execution means,
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (for example, “Gase pseudo-ream 1”) including the determination effect of No. 1;
After the first effect is performed by the first effect executing means, a second effect executing means for executing again a second effect (for example, “Pseudo-sequence 2”) including the determination effect of 1, With
The first effect execution means,
Ending the first effect within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selecting means,
The second effect execution means,
The gaming machine A3, wherein the second effect is terminated when a total time of the execution time selected by the selection means and the extension time selected by the extension time selection means elapses.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. In other words, the first effect including the one determination effect is executed by the first effect executing means provided in the plurality of times executing means, and the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means also provided in the plurality of times executing means. After the first effect is performed by the execution means, the second effect including the determination effect of 1 is executed again. Here, the first effect is performed by the first effect executing means so that the first effect is completed within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selecting means, and the execution time selected by the selecting means by the second effect executing means. The second effect is performed when the total time of the extension time and the extension time selected by the extension time selecting means elapses. Thereby, based on the establishment of the one dynamic display execution condition, the first effect and the second effect each including the determination effect in the specific effect are executed, and the number of dynamic displays is larger than the number of dynamic displays actually acquired. A number judgment effect can be performed. Therefore, by giving an illusion to the player as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3,
The dynamic display execution means,
Based on the execution time selected by the selection means, predetermined effect elements (for example, “high-speed fluctuation” + “low-speed fluctuation”, “pseudo-sequence” effect, “pseudo-sequence” effect, or “normal reach” effect element Etc.), and at least one effect element is selected (for example, S1708 of the variable effect process (S1117)).
The plurality of times execution means,
The gaming machine A4, wherein in the specific effect, an effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selecting unit is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A2 or A3. That is, at least one effect element is selected from predetermined effect elements by the effect element selecting means provided in the dynamic display executing means based on the execution time selected by the selecting means. Then, in the specific effect, the effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selecting means is executed by the multiple execution means. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the illusion that dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times of dynamic display has been performed, and it is as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. By reminding the player of the game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, "same or similar" means that the time and the content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (the color, the composition, the size, etc.), or the content is the same and the time is slightly ( (About several seconds) are exemplified, and if the effect element has a content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, the effect element is included in the category of “same or similar”.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means,
In each of the plurality of display areas of the display means, there is provided individual area change means (for example, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The plurality of times execution means,
Timing synchronizing means for synchronizing the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selecting means with the stop timing of the identification information of any of the display areas in the specific effect (for example, “non-reach ( Gaming machine A5, which includes: (Long) "determination timing of the production mode" and "stop timing of the left symbol column Z1 of" Gase pseudo-run 2 ").

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A2 to A4. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. The end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection unit and the stop timing of the identification information of any display area in the specific effect are synchronized by the timing synchronization unit provided in the plurality of execution units. You. Thereby, it is possible to associate the specific performance executed in place of the dynamic display with the dynamic display, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even during the execution of the specific performance, There is an effect that the association between the specific effect and the dynamic display can be suggested to the player.

In the gaming machine A5,
The timing synchronization means includes:
In the second production by the second production execution means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol) in the display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second production. A gaming machine A6 in which the stop timing of the column Z1) is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A5. That is, in the second effect by the second effect executing means, the timing synchronizing means sets the stop timing of the identification information in the display area other than the display area in which the identification information stops at the end of the second effect, to the execution time of the dynamic display. Is synchronized with the end timing. Thereby, the stop timing of the identification information of the display area stopped at a timing other than the end timing of the specific effect is associated with the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display is recognized even during the execution of the specific effect. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A6,
The specific effect execution means,
When the determination means determines that the specific identification information does not appear, a loss execution means (for example, S1405 of a fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for executing the specific effect is provided. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A0 to A6. That is, when the loss-time execution means provided in the specific effect execution means determines that the specific identification information does not appear by the determination means, the specific effect is executed. Thereby, even if the game value is not given due to the specific identification information not appearing in the dynamic display, the specific effect is performed on the display means longer than the acquired dynamic time, and the dynamic By reducing the number of situations in which no effect is being performed, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting up.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The extension time selection means,
A gaming machine A8 provided with an extension non-acquisition unit (for example, S1405: Yes in the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for not acquiring the extension time when the specific identification information appears. .

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, the configuration is such that the extension time is not acquired when the specific identification information appears by the extension non-acquisition means provided in the extension time selection means. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, a transition is made to a special game state (for example, a jackpot) in which a predetermined game value is provided immediately after the end of the dynamic display, and a notification according to the special game state is issued. It must be made. Therefore, if the extended time is acquired even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, and the specific effect based on the extended time is executed, the specific effect is discontinued along with the start of the special game state. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the contents of the effect. Therefore, according to the gaming machine A8, in the case of the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the extended time is not acquired. With this configuration, even when a specific effect is performed, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the end timing of the specific effect can be synchronized, so that no inconsistency in the effect occurs. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine A8,
The selecting means,
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection unit (eg, a pre-stage selection unit for selecting whether to display pre-stage identification information (for example, “reach display”) which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information (for example, , Stop pattern selection counter C3),
The extension non-acquisition means,
The gaming machine A9, wherein the extended time is not acquired when the preceding stage identification information appears in the dynamic display by the preceding stage selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A8. That is, the pre-stage selection unit provided in the selection unit determines whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information in the dynamic display. Then, when the pre-stage identification information appears in the dynamic display by the pre-stage selection unit, the extension non-acquisition unit is configured not to acquire the extension time. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, since it is general that a determination effect of whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information appears, in order to execute the determination effect, A relatively long dynamic display execution time is selected. In such a case, the lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition unit during the dynamic time. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the specific effect performed for a longer time than the dynamic time acquired until such a case. Therefore, in the gaming machine A9, when the execution time of the dynamic display for causing the previous stage identification information to appear is selected, the extended time is not acquired. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect time on the display means is not unnecessarily lengthened, and the player can be prevented from becoming active in the game.

<Group B: Converting loss-of-change production to chance-up production>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that may cause a big hit appears as a part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. By performing a simulated effect as if it had been performed (so-called “pseudo-serial” effect) and performing a special effect as if the judgment in the dynamic display were performed a plurality of times, the expectation to the jackpot was amplified. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027).

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined production lottery is not won, a special production such as the above-mentioned “pseudo-ren” production is not executed, and the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, thereby producing unexpectedness in the production content. Did not. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Group B has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Selection means for selecting an effect pattern of dynamic display of identification information (for example, a fluctuation effect of the third symbol) performed on the display device (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the judgment result by the judgment device. For example, a variation type counter CS1);
Dynamic display execution means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the selection means,
In the gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means,
When the specific identification information appears, a predetermined event effect (for example, an effect element including a “pseudo-sequence” effect, a “pseudo-sequence” effect, or a “reach display” effect) is executed in the dynamic display. Possible event production execution means,
Execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means;
If it is determined by the execution determining means that the dynamic display is not being executed, and if the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means does not show the specific identification information, the dynamic A gaming machine B0 comprising: a specific effect execution unit (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing the event effect as a specific effect (for example, “Slump effect”) instead of the target display.

  According to the gaming machine B0, the obtaining means obtains the lottery information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects an effect pattern for dynamic display of identification information performed on the display means, and based on the effect pattern selected by the selection means, the dynamic display execution means Thereby, the dynamic display is executed in the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the specific identification information appears by the event effect execution means, a predetermined event effect can be executed in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display by the execution determination means. It is configured to be able to determine whether or not it has been performed. Then, when it is determined that the dynamic display is not being executed by the execution determining unit, if the lottery information obtained by the obtaining unit does not show the specific identification information, the specific effect executing unit An event effect is executed as a specific effect instead of the dynamic display. Thereby, for example, even if it is not possible to expect the addition of a game value because the specific identification information does not appear, and even if the execution of the event effect is omitted, it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed. In this case, it is possible to execute an event effect as a specific effect, and to cause the player to expect the appearance of specific identification information by the appearance of the event effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is.

  In addition, the "event production" refers to a production unit that can be executed in a dynamic display such as a production element including a "pseudo production" production, a "pseudo production" production or a "reach display", for example, identification information and the like. It may be an effect that presents a different suggestive symbol (notice symbol) or an effect that changes the background symbol displayed on the display means.

In the gaming machine B0,
The event effect execution means,
As the event effect, a development suggestion effect (for example, “Gase pseudo-ream”) as to whether or not a development suggestion symbol (for example, a stop of a chance eye symbol) indicating that the dynamic display is continuously performed appears. A game machine B1 for performing a “effect” or a “pseudo-sequence” effect).

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B0. In other words, the event effect execution means executes a development suggestion effect as to whether or not a development suggestion symbol indicating that the dynamic display is continuously executed appears as the event effect. Thereby, even if the specific identification information does not appear and no game value can be expected to be given, it is possible to execute a development suggestion effect as to whether or not the dynamic display is continued as the specific effect. There is an effect that the appearance of the suggested effect allows the player to expect the dynamic display to continue and the appearance of the specific identification information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1,
The specific effect execution means,
As the specific effect, a plurality of execution units (for example, “Pseudo-sequence 1” and “Pseudo-sequence 2” in “Slump effect”) for executing the event effect at least two times are provided. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B0 or B1. That is, the event effect is executed twice or more as the specific effect by the multiple-execution unit provided in the specific effect execution unit. Thus, by executing the event effects a plurality of times, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the specific identification information will appear by the appearance of each event effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine B2,
A time selection unit (for example, a variation type counter CS1) for selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on a determination result by the determination unit;
The multiple execution means,
A destination execution unit (for example, execution of “gase pseudo-ren 1”) that executes the previous event effect within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection unit;
The post-execution unit (for example, “Pseudo-sequence”) that executes the event presentation after the event presentation by the preceding execution unit and after the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection unit. 2 ") and a gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the time selection means based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the first event effect is executed within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means by the first execution means provided in the plurality of execution means, and the post-execution means similarly provided in the plurality of execution means is provided. As a result, a later event effect is executed beyond the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selecting means. Thereby, even if the game value is not given due to the specific identification information not appearing in the dynamic display, the event effect is performed a plurality of times, and the effect is displayed on the display means longer than the acquired dynamic time. By reducing the number of situations in which a dynamic effect is not performed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from getting up and running.

In the gaming machine B3,
The multiple execution means,
Extended time selecting means (for example, S1406 of a fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined extended time (for example, extended time) when the event effect is executed later by the post-executing means;
Based on the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection time, a total time execution means (for example, a slump) for executing the event effect a plurality of times. And an effect timer 223g).

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, when the subsequent event effect is executed by the post-execution means by the extension time selection means provided in the execution means a plurality of times, a predetermined extension time is acquired. Then, based on the total time of the extended time selected by the extended time selecting means and the execution time selected by the time selecting means, the event effect is executed a plurality of times by the total time executing means. Thereby, it is possible to execute an event effect that is equal to or longer than the execution time of the selected dynamic display and equal to or longer than the number of times of execution. In addition to reducing the number of situations in which the game is not performed, there is an effect that the execution of a plurality of event effects amplifies the player's expectation of the jackpot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4,
The dynamic display execution means,
Based on the execution time selected by the time selecting means, a predetermined effect element (for example, “high-speed fluctuation” + “low-speed fluctuation”, “pseudo-sequence” effect, “pseudo-sequence” effect, or “normal reach” effect) Effect element selecting means (for example, S1708 of the variable effect processing (S1117)) for selecting at least one effect element from among the element elements).
The multiple execution means,
A gaming machine B5 that executes an effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3 or B4. That is, the effect element selecting means provided in the dynamic display executing means selects at least one effect element from the predetermined effect elements based on the execution time selected by the time selecting means. Then, the effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selecting means is executed by the multiple-time execution means. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the illusion that dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times of dynamic display has been performed, and it is as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. By reminding the player of the game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, "same or similar" means that the time and the content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (the color, the composition, the size, etc.), or the content is the same and the time is slightly ( (About several seconds) are exemplified, and if the effect element has a content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, the effect element is included in the category of “same or similar”.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means,
In each of the plurality of display areas of the display means, there is provided individual area change means (for example, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The plurality of times execution means,
Timing synchronization means for synchronizing the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means with the stop timing of any of the pieces of identification information in the event presentation by the multiple execution means (for example, “ A gaming machine B6 comprising: a timing of determining a non-reach (long) rendering mode and a timing of stopping the left symbol row Z1 of the “pseudo-sequence 2”.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B3 to B5. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, by the timing synchronization means provided in the multiple execution means, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means, and the stop timing of any identification information in the event effect by the multiple execution means. Are synchronized. Thereby, it is possible to associate the dynamic display with the event presentation by the multiple execution unit, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even during the execution of the event presentation by the multiple execution unit, There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event presentation and the dynamic display by the execution means a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine B6,
The timing synchronization means includes:
In the subsequent event production by the post production execution means, the stop timing of the identification information (for example, the left design sequence Z1) other than the identification information (for example, the middle design sequence Z2) to be stopped at the end of the event production, A gaming machine B7 synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B6. That is, in the subsequent event effect by the post-effect executing means, the timing synchronizing means synchronizes the stop timing of the identification information other than the identification information stopped at the end of the event effect with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display. . Thereby, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the event effect by the multiple execution means is associated with the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end of the dynamic display even when the event effect is being executed by the multiple execution means. It is possible to recognize the timing, and there is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event presentation by the execution means and the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B7,
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine B8 comprising: an effect changing unit that changes the effect pattern selected by the selecting unit to the event effect.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B0 to B7. That is, the effect changing means provided in the specific effect executing means changes the effect pattern selected by the selecting means to an event effect. Thereby, for example, even in the case of an effect pattern in which the event effect is not initially executed, the event effect can be executed, and the appearance of the event effect causes the player to expect the appearance of the specific identification information, There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B8,
The extension time selection means,
A gaming machine B9 comprising: an extension non-acquisition unit (for example, S1405: Yes in the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for not acquiring the extension time when the specific identification information appears. .

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B4 to B8. That is, the configuration is such that the extension time is not acquired when the specific identification information appears by the extension non-acquisition means provided in the extension time selection means. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, a transition is made to a special game state (for example, a jackpot) in which a predetermined game value is provided immediately after the end of the dynamic display, and a notification according to the special game state is issued. It must be made. Therefore, if the extended time is acquired even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears and the event effect based on the extended time is executed, the event effect is discontinued along with the start of the special game state. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the contents of the effect. Therefore, according to the gaming machine B9, in the case of the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the extended time is not obtained. With this configuration, even when a specific effect is performed, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time can be synchronized with the end timing of the event effect by the execution unit a plurality of times. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing inconsistency.

In the gaming machine B9,
The selecting means,
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection unit (eg, a pre-stage selection unit for selecting whether to display pre-stage identification information (for example, “reach display”) which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information (for example, , Stop pattern selection counter C3),
The extension non-acquisition means,
The gaming machine B10, wherein the extended time is not acquired when the preceding stage identification information is caused to appear in the dynamic display by the preceding stage selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B9. That is, the pre-stage selection unit provided in the selection unit determines whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information in the dynamic display. The extension non-acquisition unit is configured not to acquire the extension time when the previous stage identification information appears in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection unit. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, it is general that a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears is performed. Execution time is selected. In such a case, the lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition unit during the dynamic time. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform an event effect by the execution means a plurality of times that is performed for a longer time than the dynamic time acquired up to such a case. Therefore, in the gaming machine B10, if the execution time of the dynamic display for causing the preceding stage identification information to appear is selected, the extended time is not acquired. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect time on the display means is not unnecessarily lengthened, and the player can be prevented from becoming active in the game.

<Group C: In the acquired production time, determine the production contents from the later production elements>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry device, a dynamic display (variable display) of a symbol or the like is displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed when the display result indicates a jackpot is known.

  In such a gaming machine, a plurality of types of dynamic display variation patterns are provided in advance. Then, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns in accordance with the timing of winning of the ball to the starting winning opening, and a dynamic display based on the variation pattern is executed on the display means.

  In this variation pattern, first, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the main control means for performing the main control of the game due to the ball entering the starting winning opening, and a control signal based on the execution time is selected. A notification is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means determines a detailed variation pattern based on the execution time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027).

  However, in the conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to perform various game settings in the main control means, and it is required to reduce the control load on the main control means. There is room.

  The invention of group C has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load of the main control means.

Main control means (for example, main control device 110) for controlling the game;
Sub-control means (for example, a sound ramp control device 113) for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means;
Display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) controlled to be displayed by the sub control means,
The main control means includes:
Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
A time selecting means (for example, a variation type counter CS1) for selecting an execution time of a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of a third symbol) performed on the display means based on the determination result by the determining means; ,
Notification means (for example, external output processing of timer interrupt processing (S101)) for notifying the sub-control means of the control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means,
The sub-control means,
A pattern selecting unit (for example, a variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of effect patterns for executing at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notifying unit; ,
Dynamic display executing means (for example, variable effect processing (S1117)) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selecting means,
In the gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means,
The pattern selecting means includes:
When the control signal is notified by the notifying means, the second half side selecting means (for example, in the “Slump effect”) that first selects the effect element to be executed in the second half of the dynamic display based on the control signal. "Stored in slump effect storage area 223h from" Which reach ")
Based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the effect time based on the effect element selected by the second half side selecting means from the execution time, the remaining selecting means for selecting the remaining effect element (for example, “any one in“ Slump effect ”) The game machine C0 is characterized in that after the “reach” is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, the “development suggestion effect” is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h).

  According to the gaming machine C0, the control of the game is executed by the main control means, the control of the game is executed by the sub control means based on the control signal from the main control means, and the display means is displayed by the sub control means. Controlled. Then, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means provided in the main control means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means provided in the main control means also obtains the lottery information based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Is determined. Further, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means is selected by the time selection means provided in the main control means based on the determination result by the determination means, and is also provided in the main control means. The notifying means notifies the sub-control means of a control signal based on the execution time selected by the selecting means. Then, one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns for executing at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notifying means by the pattern selecting means provided in the sub-control means. The dynamic display is executed by the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means by the dynamic display execution means provided in the sub control means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the control signal is notified by the notifying means, the effect element to be executed in the second half of the dynamic display based on the control signal is first selected by the second-half selecting means provided in the pattern selecting means. . Then, the remaining effect elements are executed by the remaining selecting means provided in the pattern selecting means, based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the effect time based on the effect element selected by the second half selecting means from the execution time. Thus, the main control means only needs to select the execution time of the dynamic display and notify the sub-control means of the execution time. Selecting a production pattern first from the production elements to be rendered, and then determining the production elements based on the remaining remaining time, and determining the contents of the dynamic display while maintaining the consistency of a series of dynamic displays Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the main control unit can be reduced by executing the main control of selecting the effect pattern of the dynamic display in the sub control unit.

In the gaming machine C0,
The production element,
A fixed-time production element (for example, a “gase pseudo-ren” production, a “pseudo-ren” production, or a “reach reach” production element) composed of a predetermined fixed time (for example, “10 seconds”),
The execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means,
A gaming machine C1 including a time that is an integral multiple of the production time of the fixed production.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C0. That is, a fixed-time effect element composed of a predetermined fixed time is included as an effect element, and an integral multiple of the fixed effect is included as the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection unit. Thereby, in the sub-control means, when selecting an effect pattern of dynamic display based on the notified execution time, when an execution time of an integral multiple of the effect time of the fixed effect element is selected, the fixed time effect element And an effect pattern for executing the dynamic display can be selected, and an effect that matches the execution time can be executed.

In the gaming machine C1,
The production element,
A static rendering element that has little or no change over time (for example, a rendering element of “developability”, a freeze production or a blackout production),
The residual selection means,
A gaming machine C2, wherein the static effect element is configured to be selectable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. In other words, the effect elements include static effect elements that have no or little change over time. Then, the static effect element is configured to be selectable by the remaining selecting means. Thereby, for example, even when the remaining time is less than one fixed time production element, by selecting the static production element as the production element of the remaining time, there is no change over time or a small fixed production element. Even if the effect element is interrupted halfway and the next effect element is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, “there is no change or little change over time” means, for example, a state in which there is no change for several seconds or a main content (for example, the entire background, the entire screen composition, For example, there is a case where only the auxiliary contents (for example, a part of the background or a part of the screen composition, etc.) are changed without changing the character pattern.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2,
The sub-control means,
Execution determination means (for example, a sub-slump flag 223f) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means;
In the case where the control signal is notified by the notifying unit, when the execution determining unit determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the dynamic display based on the control signal notified by the notifying unit is performed. A special effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing a specific effect (for example, “Slump effect”) instead of the dynamic display on the display means for a longer time than the execution time of A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C0 to C2. That is, the execution determination means provided in the sub-control means can determine whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when it is determined that the dynamic display is not being executed by the execution determining means when the control signal is notified by the notifying means, the dynamic effect based on the control signal notified by the notifying means is determined by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect is executed on the display means for a longer time than the execution time of the display instead of the dynamic display. Thus, by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which no effect is performed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C3,
The specific effect execution means,
An additional time selecting unit (for example, S1406 of a fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined additional time (for example, an extended time) when the specific effect is executed;
Total time execution means for executing the specific effect during a total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means (for example, a slump effect timer 223g) And a game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, a predetermined additional time is selected by the additional time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means when executing the specific effect. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time executing means similarly provided in the specific effect executing means for a total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selecting means and the execution time selected by the selecting means. . As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect for a time longer than the execution time of the selected dynamic display. By increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which no effect is performed on the display means, There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

In the gaming machine C4,
The additional time selected by the additional time selecting means,
A gaming machine C5 comprising an integral multiple of the production time of the fixed production.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4. That is, the additional time selected by the additional time selecting means includes a time that is an integral multiple of the fixed effect. With this, in the sub-control means, when selecting an effect pattern for dynamic display based on the total time of the notified execution time and the added time, the dynamic display is executed by combining the fixed time effect elements. This makes it possible to select an effect pattern to be executed, and to execute a specific effect that matches the execution time.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5,
The latter half side selecting means,
A determining effect selecting means for selecting a determining effect (for example, an effect element of "reach reach") for determining whether the specific identifying information appears or non-specific identifying information different from the specific identifying information appears; Prepared,
The residual selection means,
A determination transition effect selecting means for selecting a determination transition effect (for example, a “pseudo-ren” effect in which a chance pattern or a gassence pattern appears) to determine whether to transition to the determination effect,
Development selection means for selecting the determination transition effect or the development effect of whether or not to shift to the determination effect (for example, a “pseudo variation” effect element in which a chance development symbol or a reach formation symbol appears). A gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines C0 to C5. That is, the determination effect selection means provided in the second half side selection means selects a determination effect of whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. In addition, the judgment transition effect selection means provided in the residual selection means selects a judgment transition effect to determine whether or not to shift to the judgment effect, and the development selection means provided in the residual selection means also determines the transition effect or the judgment transition effect. The development effect of whether to shift to the effect or not is selected. Thereby, based on the execution time, the sub-control means first selects an effect pattern from the effect elements to be executed in the latter half of the dynamic display, and then determines the effect element based on the remaining remaining time. Thus, there is an effect that the contents of the dynamic display can be determined while maintaining the consistency of the series of dynamic displays.

In the gaming machine C6,
The time selection means,
A gaming machine C7 characterized in that a long execution time is easily selected when the specific identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. That is, when the specific identification information appears by the time selecting means, a long execution time is easily selected. Thereby, when the execution time of the selected dynamic display is a long execution time in which many effects can be easily executed, a judgment transition effect or a development effect in which the appearance expectation of the specific identification information is high is executed. Since the appearance expectation of the specific identification information changes due to the execution of the judgment transition effect and the development effect, there is an effect that interest in which effect to transition to is generated, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine C6 or C7,
The determination transition effect and the development effect,
A gaming machine C8 that executes the same or similar effect element.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C6 or C7. In other words, the same or similar effect element is executed in the determination shift effect and the extended effect. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the judgment transition effect is being performed or the advanced effect is being performed. The illusion can be made as if the display was performed, and the interest of the game can be improved by making the player think as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained.

  In addition, "same or similar" means that the time and the content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (the color, the composition, the size, etc.), or the content is the same and the time is slightly ( (About several seconds) are exemplified, and if the effect element has a content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, the effect element is included in the category of “same or similar”.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8,
The specific effect execution means,
When the new lottery information is obtained by the obtaining unit during the execution of the specific effect, a time obtaining unit (for example, a fluctuation setting process) that obtains a new execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information (S1401) of (S1213) and
Residual summation means (for example, S1409 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for summing the execution time acquired by the time acquisition means and the remaining time of the specific effect being executed;
And a sum setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for setting the specific effect again based on the sum time summed by the residual summing means. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C3 to C8. In other words, when new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition unit during execution of the specific effect by the time acquisition unit provided in the specific effect execution unit, the execution time of the new dynamic display is determined based on the lottery information. The execution time obtained by the time obtaining means and the remaining time of the specific effect being executed are added together by the remaining summing means obtained and also provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, the specific effect is set by the sum setting unit provided in the specific effect execution unit, based on the total time summed by the residual summing unit. Thus, even if the execution time of the new dynamic display is acquired during the execution of the specific effect, the consistency of the specific effect being executed and the execution time can be maintained by setting the content of the specific effect again. This makes it possible to set the contents of the specific effect while taking the effect.

In the gaming machine C9,
The sum setting means,
The gaming machine C10, wherein the second half side selecting means selects first the effect element executed in the second half of the specific effect based on the total time.

  According to the gaming machine C10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C9. That is, in the sum setting means, the second half selection means selects the effect element executed in the second half of the specific effect based on the sum time first. With this, even if a new dynamic display execution time is acquired during execution of the specific effect, the effect pattern is selected first from the effect elements to be executed in the second half of the specific effect based on the total time. After that, there is an effect that the effect elements can be set again based on the remaining remaining time, and the content of the solitary effect can be determined while maintaining the consistency of a series of dynamic displays.

<Group D: Display dummy hold>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that may cause a big hit appears as a part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. While performing a pseudo effect as if it were performed (so-called “pseudo-repeated” effect), there is an effect that performs another effect whether or not a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Document 1 2015-134027)).

  However, in the conventional gaming machines, the pseudo continuous production has become monotonous, and has not produced unexpectedness in the production contents. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Group D has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Based on the result of the determination by the determination unit, a dynamic display of the identification information (for example, a fluctuation effect of the third symbol) performed on the first display unit (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. Dynamic display executing means (for example, an audio lamp control device 113).
In the case where specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player,
A storage unit (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203c) that stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
A pseudo display means (for example, a dummy design which is a dummy dummy display) for displaying pseudo pseudo effect number information on the second display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, it is determined whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, “losing display” or a gaess chance pattern) appears. (For example, at the time of stopping all the symbols such as the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", the effect of "pseudo-run", the effect of "pseudo-sequence" or the effect of "normal reach"),
Total effect number execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h and a hold information storage area 223i) for executing the number of the determined effects corresponding to the total number of the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information. A gaming machine D0.

  According to the gaming machine D0, the obtaining unit obtains the lottery information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining unit makes a determination based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining unit. Then, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the first display means based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the storage unit stores lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit up to a predetermined number, and the effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage unit is displayed by the second display unit. Is displayed. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the pseudo display means, pseudo pseudo effect number information is displayed on the second display means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display or whether non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. A judgment effect is executed. In addition, the determination effect of the number corresponding to the total number of the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information is executed by the total effect number executing means provided in the dynamic display executing means. Thereby, the pseudo effect number information is displayed or erased in conjunction with the judgment effect in which the specific identification information or the non-specific identification information appears, and even if the pseudo effect number information is used, the judgment effect is executed. , It is possible to create a sense of realism as if dynamic display is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D0,
The total effect number execution means,
When the pseudo-display means displays the pseudo-production number information, additional production selection means (for example, fluctuation setting) for selecting an additional production to be additionally executed (for example, “Gase pseudo-run 2” in “Slump production”) Processing (S1213) (S1413),
The pseudo display means,
Before execution of the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection unit, a pre-execution display unit that displays the number of pseudo-effects (for example, a ball is placed in the dummy winning opening 75 before execution of “Gase pseudo-ream 2”). The game machine D1 is provided with a dummy symbol which is a dummy symbol when the ball is entered.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D0. That is, the additional effect selection means provided in the total effect number executing means selects additional effects to be additionally executed when the pseudo effect number information is displayed by the pseudo display means. Then, before execution of the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means, the pseudo effect number information is displayed by the pre-execution display means provided in the pseudo display means. Thereby, since the pseudo effect number information can be displayed before the additional effect to be additionally executed, for example, even though the pseudo effect number information and the effect number information are not displayed, the additional effect is displayed. Can be prevented from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game while providing an effect with consistency.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a left special figure winning opening 77a or a right special figure winning opening 78a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter,
The acquisition means,
Acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of a game ball into the first entry means,
The pseudo display means,
A gaming machine D2 which displays the pseudo effect number information when a game ball enters a second ball entry device different from the first ball entry device.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D0 or D1. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and the ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-entering means. Then, the lottery information is obtained by the acquisition means due to the entry into the first entry means. Here, the pseudo-display means displays pseudo effect number information due to the entry of the game ball into the second entry means different from the first entry means. Thereby, it is possible to display pseudo effect number information, which is the number of effects performed on the first display means, as a result of entering a game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. By entering the first ball entry means, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the effect number information was displayed. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo effect is performed based on the pseudo effect number information while displaying the pseudo effect information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if you were. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D2,
The second ball entry means,
A gaming machine D3 arranged near the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, the second ball entry means is arranged near the first ball entry means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the first ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Even when the pseudo effect number information is displayed based on the incoming ball, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the effect number information was displayed by entering the first ball entry means. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo effect is performed based on the pseudo effect number information while displaying the pseudo effect information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if you were. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

  The “near the first ball entry means” is, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball entry means, or an area between the first ball entry means when there are a plurality of first ball entry means. Alternatively, a position where both the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be visually recognized at the same time is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3,
Holding means (for example, a holding device 73) capable of changing between a holding state for holding the game balls fired by the shooting means and a release state for releasing the game balls held based on satisfaction of a predetermined release condition; With
The second ball entry means,
A gaming machine D4, wherein a gaming ball released from the holding means is arranged at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D2 or D3. That is, the holding means is configured to be changeable between a holding state for holding the game balls fired by the firing means and a release state for releasing the game balls held based on the satisfaction of a predetermined release condition. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from the ball can enter. Thus, the game balls held by the holding unit can be made to enter the second ball entry unit based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, and the pseudo effect number information can be displayed. As a result, the held game balls can be immediately entered into the second ball entry means, and the pseudo effect number information is displayed while displaying the pseudo effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. , It is possible to create a sense of realism as if an actual dynamic display is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D4,
The total effect number execution means,
Counting means for counting whether or not it is time to display the pseudo-effect number information corresponding to the additional effect when the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting means (for example, a holding device driving timer 203g) ,
The holding means,
A release unit (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) that releases the game ball held by the holding unit when the timing of displaying the pseudo effect number information is reached based on the counting result by the counting unit. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D4. That is, when the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting device, the counting device provided in the total effect number executing device determines whether or not it is time to display the pseudo effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. Is done. Then, when the timing of displaying the pseudo effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means is reached by the releasing means provided in the holding means, the game balls held by the holding means are released. This makes it possible to associate the timing at which the second ball entry means enters the game ball with the timing at which the pseudo effect number information corresponding to the additional effect is displayed. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo effect is performed based on the pseudo effect number information while displaying the pseudo effect information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if you were. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D5,
The total effect number execution means,
Holding determining means (for example, a holding ball detecting switch 73g) for determining whether or not a game ball is held in the holding means;
By the counting result by the counting means, when it is time to display the pseudo effect number information, when it is determined by the holding determination means that the game ball is not held in the holding means, the additional effect, A gaming machine D6 comprising: an effect changing unit (for example, an effect conversion flag 223k) that changes the effect number information or the pseudo effect number information to a non-digesting effect that does not digest.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5. That is, the holding determination means provided in the total effect number execution means determines whether or not the game ball is held in the holding means. Then, when the timing for displaying the pseudo effect number information is reached by the counting result by the counting means by the effect changing means similarly provided in the total effect number executing means, the game ball is held in the holding means by the holding determination means. When it is determined that there is no additional effect, the additional effect is changed to a non-digestion effect that does not digest the effect number information or the pseudo effect number information. Thereby, when the game ball to be made to enter the second ball entry means is not held in the holding means, the pseudo effect number information is not displayed, and the number of effects executed by the first display means, It is possible to maintain consistency with the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information displayed by the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player, and to prevent the player from getting excited about the game.

In the gaming machine D6,
A storage determination unit (for example, a hold display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether or not the lottery information stored in the storage unit includes the dynamic display for displaying the specific identification information;
Display change means (for example, a hold change counter 223d) for changing a display mode of the number-of-effects information and the number-of-simple-effects information based on the determination result by the storage determination means;
The effect change means,
When the additional effect is changed to the non-digestion effect, a change-time changing unit (for example, a reservation rank-up command) for changing a display mode of the effect number information by the display changing unit is provided. Gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D6. That is, it is determined by the storage determining means whether or not the lottery information stored in the storing means includes a dynamic display that causes the specific identification information to appear, and the display changing means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display based on the determination result by the storage determining means. Thus, the display mode of the effect information and the pseudo effect information is changed. Here, when the additional effect is changed to the non-extinguishing effect by the change-time changing means provided in the effect changing means, the display mode of the effect number information is changed by the display changing means. Thereby, even when the additional effect is changed to the non-extinguishing effect because the game ball is not held in the holding means, the display mode of the effect number information is changed and the player's expectation to the specific identification information is changed. By amplifying, there is an effect that a variety of effects can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Group E: shift pending before elapse of fluctuation time>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  The number of suspensions of the dynamic display is displayed by a predetermined suspension symbol, and when the dynamic display being executed is completed, the suspension symbol corresponding to the unexecuted dynamic display is shifted (shifted) and displayed. Have been. With this configuration, the end of the dynamic display being executed and the start of a new dynamic display are suggested to the player, and the remaining number of pending dynamic displays is suggested to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2003-340046)).

  However, in the conventional gaming machines, the shift (shift) display of the reserved symbols is monotonous, and it has not been possible to create unexpectedness in the effect contents. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the E group has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can perform a surprising effect and appropriately improve the interest of the game. .

Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Based on the result of the determination by the determination unit, a dynamic display of the identification information (for example, a fluctuation effect of the third symbol) performed on the first display unit (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. Dynamic display executing means (for example, an audio lamp control device 113).
In the case where specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player,
A second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying effect number information corresponding to the effect number executed by the first display means;
First increasing means for increasing (adding) and displaying the effect number information based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means (for example, adding a reserved symbol based on winning in the left special figure winning opening 77a). Display) and
First decreasing means for decreasing (erasing) the number-of-effects information based on the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means (for example, erasing an executed symbol based on the end of the variable effect);
Second increasing means for increasing and displaying the number-of-effects information based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means (for example, holding based on winning in the dummy winning opening 75) Add a design) and
Second reduction means for reducing the number-of-effects information based on satisfaction of a predetermined second condition different from the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means (for example, “Gase pseudo ream 1 in“ Slump effect ”) ), The execution symbol is erased based on the end of ").

  According to the gaming machine E0, the lottery information is acquired when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determination unit makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. Then, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the first display means based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the effect number information corresponding to the effect number executed by the first display means can be displayed by the second display means. Then, the effect number information is increased and displayed by the first increasing means based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and based on the termination of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means by the first decreasing means. The effect number information is reduced. Further, the effect number information is increased and displayed by the second increasing means based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and by the second decreasing means by the dynamic display executing means. The effect number information is reduced based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition different from the end of the dynamic display. This allows the effect number information to be increased and decreased under conditions different from the start or end of the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that a variation is provided for the increase display and the decrease of the number-of-effects information, and a surprising effect is provided, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E0,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a left special figure winning opening 77a or a right special figure winning opening 78a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter,
The acquisition means,
Acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of a game ball into the first entry means,
The first condition is:
A gaming machine E1 wherein the game ball is entered into a second ball entry device different from the first ball entry device.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E0. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-entering means. Then, the lottery information is obtained by the acquisition means due to the entry of the game ball into the first entry means. Here, the first condition is that a game ball enters a second ball entry device different from the first ball entry device. That is, the effect number information is increased and displayed based on the entry of the game ball to the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. As a result, there is an effect that a variation is provided for the increase display of the number-of-effects information, and a surprising effect is provided, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1,
Execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means;
In a case where the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition unit, when the execution determination unit determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the first display unit performs a plurality of specific effects (for example, “Slump”). Specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing each effect unit of “effect”.
The second condition is:
1. The gaming machine E2, wherein the specific effect is ended.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means can determine whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means, and when the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means, the dynamic display is performed by the execution determination means. When it is determined that the specific effect has not been executed, the specific effect execution unit executes a plurality of specific effects on the first display unit. Here, the end of one specific effect is the second condition. That is, the effect number information is reduced based on the end of one specific effect different from the end of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a surprising effect by providing a variation with respect to a decrease in the effect number information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E2,
A time selection unit (for example, a variation type counter CS1) for selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on a determination result by the determination unit;
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine E3 comprising: a long-term execution unit that executes the specific effect a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection unit.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2. That is, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the time selection means based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the specific effect is executed a plurality of times by the long-time executing means provided in the specific effect executing means for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selecting means. In other words, the specific effect is executed a plurality of times longer than the execution time of the acquired dynamic display. Thus, by increasing the execution time of the effect on the first display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which no effect is performed on the first display means, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, the execution of the effect on the first display means and the increase and decrease of the number-of-effects information displayed on the second display means are kept consistent with each other to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity, and the player gets excited. This has the effect of preventing the situation.

In the gaming machine E3,
The long running means,
An extension time selecting means (for example, S1406 of a variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) when executing the specific effect;
Total time execution means (for example, a slump effect timer 223g) for executing the specific effect during a total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection device and the execution time selected by the time selection device. And a gaming machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3. That is, when a specific effect is executed by the extended time selecting means provided in the long running means, a predetermined extended time is selected, and the extended time is selected by the total time executing means also provided in the long running means. The specific effect is executed during the total time of the extension time selected by the means and the execution time selected by the time selecting means. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect for a time equal to or longer than the execution time of the selected dynamic display. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3 or E4,
The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, an effect of determining whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, an effect element of “low-speed fluctuation”, an effect of “pseudo-sequence”, an effect of “pseudo-sequence”, or an effect element of “normal reach”) And the like, when all symbols are stopped).
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine E5 comprising: a specific effect determination execution means (for example, a first effect and a second effect in a “slump effect”) for executing the determination effect for each specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3 or E4. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the determination effect is executed for each specific effect by the specific effect determination execution means provided in the specific effect execution means. Thereby, for each specific effect, the number of judgment effects that are greater than the number of dynamic displays actually acquired is executed, and the player is illusioned as if a lot of lottery opportunities have been obtained. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

In the gaming machine E5,
The specific effect execution means,
A first effect execution means for executing a first effect (for example, “Pseudo-sequence 1”) for performing the determination effect of No. 1;
After the first effect is performed by the first effect executing means, a second effect executing means for executing a second effect (for example, “Pseudo-sequence 2”) for performing the determination effect again,
The second reducing means includes:
Reducing the number-of-effects information based on the end of the first effect by the first effect execution means, and decreasing the number-of-effects information based on the end of the second effect by the second effect execution means A gaming machine E6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E5. That is, the first effect for performing one determination effect is executed by the first effect executing means provided in the specific effect executing means, and the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means also provided for the specific effect executing means. After the first effect by the means is performed, the second effect for performing the determination effect is executed again. Here, the number-of-effects information is reduced by the second reduction means based on the end of the first effect by the first effect execution means, and the number of effects is determined based on the end of the second effect by the second effect execution means. Information is reduced. Thereby, while giving the illusion to the player as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained, the consistency between the number of productions of the judgment production on the first display means and the production number information displayed on the second display means is checked. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity and keep the player from getting up and running.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E6,
The dynamic display execution means,
Based on the execution time selected by the time selecting means, a predetermined effect element (for example, “high-speed fluctuation” + “low-speed fluctuation”, “pseudo-sequence” effect, “pseudo-sequence” effect, or “normal reach” effect) Effect element selecting means (for example, S1708 of the variable effect processing (S1117)) for selecting at least one effect element from among the element elements).
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine E7, wherein in the specific effect, an effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selecting means is executed.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E2 to E6. That is, the effect element selecting means provided in the dynamic display executing means selects at least one effect element from the predetermined effect elements based on the execution time selected by the time selecting means. Then, in the specific effect, the effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selecting means is executed by the specific effect executing means. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the illusion that dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times of dynamic display has been performed, and it is as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. By reminding the player of the game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, "same or similar" means that the time and the content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (the color, the composition, the size, etc.), or the content is the same and the time is slightly ( (About several seconds) are exemplified, and if the effect element has a content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, the effect element is included in the category of “same or similar”.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E7,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means,
In each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means, there is provided individual area change means (for example, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The specific effect execution means,
Timing synchronizing means for synchronizing the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selecting means with the stop timing of the identification information of any one of the display areas in the specific effect (for example, “non-reach A gaming machine E8 comprising: (long) a determination timing of an effect mode and a stop timing of a left symbol column Z1 of the “gase pseudo-run 2”.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E2 to E7. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means by the individual area changing means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selecting means and the stop timing of the identification information of any display area in the specific effect are synchronized by the timing synchronizing means provided in the specific effect executing means. Is done. Thereby, it is possible to associate the specific performance executed in place of the dynamic display with the dynamic display, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even during the execution of the specific performance, There is an effect that the association between the specific effect and the dynamic display can be suggested to the player.

In the gaming machine E8,
The timing synchronization means includes:
In the second effect by the second effect execution means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol sequence Z1) in a display area other than the display region (for example, the middle symbol sequence Z2) where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect. A) the gaming machine E9, wherein the stop timing of the gaming machine E9 is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine E9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E8. That is, in the second effect by the second effect executing means, the timing synchronizing means sets the stop timing of the identification information in the display area other than the display area in which the identification information stops at the end of the second effect, to the execution time of the dynamic display. Is synchronized with the end timing. With this, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the specific effect is associated with the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display even during the execution of the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display Can be recognized, and the effect that the association between the specific effect and the dynamic display can be suggested to the player.

<Group F: Relationship between slump effects and holding devices>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  Further, as this kind of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine provided with a holding means for holding a ball fired in a game area. In this pachinko machine, the ball is held in the holding means, and based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, an operation of pressing the release button by the player), the ball held in the holding means is released, and the ball is moved downstream. It is configured to enter the provided entrance and to provide a predetermined game value to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235)).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the ball released from the above-mentioned holding means is not related to the ball entering the entrance and the dynamic display based on the ball entering the starting ball entry means, and the game is monotonous. It was not able to produce unexpectedness in the production contents. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the F group has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game using a ball held by a holding means.

Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
First ball entry means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Acquiring means (for example, a special drawing winning opening switch) for acquiring lottery information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) due to the entry of a game ball into the first entering means;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Selection means (for example, a dynamic effect of the third symbol) for selecting dynamic display of identification information (for example, a third symbol variation effect) performed on the first display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means , Fluctuation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display executing means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selecting means on the first display means,
In the gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means,
A second ball entry means (for example, a dummy winning opening 75) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and which is different from the first ball entry means;
Holding means (for example, a holding device 73) provided above the game area of the second ball entry means and capable of holding game balls flowing down the game area;
Release means (for example, hold) for releasing the game balls held in the hold means based on establishment of a predetermined first condition relating to the dynamic display (for example, "6 seconds" have elapsed from the start of "Slump effect") Device solenoid 73f),
When the game ball released by the release means enters the second ball entry means, a related appearance that presents a related display related to the dynamic display (for example, a reserved symbol as a dummy reserved display). (For example, a dummy reserved ball number counter 223c).

  According to the gaming machine F0, the launching means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the game ball fired by the launching means can enter the first ball-receiving means. Then, the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining means due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball inputting means, and a determination is made by the determining means based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining means. Is Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the first display means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is selected by the dynamic display execution means. , In the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, game balls fired by the launching means to the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are configured to be able to enter the ball, and the holding means provided above the game area of the second ball entry means Thereby, game balls flowing down the game area can be held. Then, based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition relating to the dynamic display, the release means releases the game ball held by the holding means. Then, when the game ball released by the release unit enters the second ball entry unit, the related display unit displays a related display related to the dynamic display. Thereby, the game balls held in the holding means are released based on the establishment of the first condition in the dynamic display, and the released game balls enter the second ball entry means to achieve the dynamic display. Relevant related display can be performed. Therefore, by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the holding means, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect, and to enhance the interest of the game using the game ball held in the holding means. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In the gaming machine F0,
The first condition is:
A gaming machine F1 wherein a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since the start of the execution of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F0. That is, the first condition is that a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since the start of the execution of the dynamic display. That is, when a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since the start of the execution of the dynamic display, the game balls held in the holding means can be released and can be made to enter the second ball entry means. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect related to the dynamic display based on the entering of the game ball held in the holding means. Therefore, by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the holding means, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect, and to enhance the interest of the game using the game ball held in the holding means. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
A storage unit (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203c) that stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the dynamic display effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means,
The related manifestation means,
A gaming machine F2 comprising: an effect number information increasing unit (for example, adding a reserved symbol as a dummy reserved display) for increasing and displaying the effect number information as the related display.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F0 or F1. That is, the storage means stores lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the dynamic display effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is the second information. The display means is configured to be able to display. Here, the effect number information is increased and displayed as a related display by the effect number information increasing means provided in the related appearance means. That is, when the game ball held by the holding means enters the second ball entry means, the effect number information, which is the effect number of the dynamic display, is displayed in an increased manner. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect as if the number of effects of the dynamic display were increased based on the entering of the game ball held in the holding means. Therefore, by displaying the number-of-effects information that is larger than the number of effects of the dynamic display actually acquired, and giving the illusion to the player as if many lottery opportunities are obtained, the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine F2,
The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, an effect of determining whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears (for example, an effect element of “slow fluctuation”, Effect, a “dramatic pseudo-ren” effect or a “normal reach” effect element when all symbols are stopped).
The related manifestation means,
When the number-of-effects information is increased and displayed by the number-of-effects information increasing means, the number of executions of the determination effect is increased by one. A gaming machine F3, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F2. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether or not specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. An effect is performed. Then, when the number-of-effects information is increased by the number-of-effects information increasing means and displayed by the number-of-effects increasing means provided in the related effecting means, the number of executions of the determination effect is increased by one. Thereby, the judgment effect in the dynamic display is increased based on the entering of the game ball held in the holding means, and the number of the judgment effects in the dynamic display actually obtained is larger than the number of the judgment effects. By giving the player an illusion as if many lottery opportunities can be obtained, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F3, the related manifestation means is:
When the number of executions of the judgment effect is increased by the judgment effect increasing means, the increasing time decreasing means for decreasing the effect number information by one at the end of the judgment effect (for example, executing at the end of the "gasse pseudo-run 1") Gaming machine F4).

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3. In other words, when the number of executions of the judgment effect is increased by the judgment effect increasing means by the increase time decreasing means provided in the related effect means, the effect number information is decreased by one at the end of the judgment effect. Thus, when the number of determined effects is increased, the number of effect information is increased by one with the increase of the determined effect, and the number of effect information is decreased by one after the end of the determined effect. It is possible to bring out a sense of reality as if the number had been increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4,
A first flow path (e.g., a sorting ball inlet 72) for causing the game balls fired by the shooting means to flow down to the first ball input means,
The holding means,
A gaming machine F5 provided in the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4. That is, the game ball fired by the firing means flows down to the first ball input means by the first flow path. Then, the holding means is provided in the first flow path. As a result, it is possible to hold the game balls that can enter the first ball entry means by the holding means, and when the game balls can flow into the first ball entry means, the game balls are first stored by the holding means. Can be put on hold. Therefore, in the case where an effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entering of the game ball held in the holding means, the state in which the game ball is held in the holding means can be maintained. Therefore, by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the holding means, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect, and to enhance the interest of the game using the game ball held in the holding means. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In the gaming machine F5,
The holding means,
A storage unit capable of storing game balls (for example, a holding ball holding unit 73b);
A guide portion (for example, a holding device opening / closing plate 73a) for guiding game balls flowing down the first flow path to the storage portion when no game balls are stored in the storage portion;
The guide section,
A gaming machine F6, wherein when a game ball is stored in the storage section, a game ball flowing down the first flow path is caused to flow down to the first ball entry means side.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F5. That is, the game ball can be stored by the storage portion provided in the holding means, and when the game ball is not stored in the storage portion, the first flow path is also provided by the guide portion also provided in the holding means. The game ball flowing down is guided to the storage section. Then, when the game ball is stored in the storage section by the guide section, the game ball flowing down the first flow path flows down to the first ball entry means side. Thereby, when the game ball is not stored in the storage unit, the game ball that can enter the first ball entry means can be held by the holding unit, while the game ball is stored in the storage unit. If so, a game ball that can enter the first ball entry means can flow down to the first ball entry means side. Therefore, when a game ball can enter the first ball entry means, the state in which the game ball is reserved by the retaining means first can be set. Therefore, in the case where an effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entering of the game ball held in the holding unit, the game ball can be always held in the holding unit. As a result, the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game balls held in the holding means can enhance the variation of the effect, and the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means can be improved. It is possible to achieve the effect.

In the gaming machine F6,
The first flow path,
A passage wall for allowing game balls to flow down (for example, a side wall on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the sorting ball inlet 72),
The guide section,
A gaming machine F7, wherein when the game ball is guided to the storage section, a tip portion of the guide section has a shape of making surface contact with the passage wall.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F6. That is, the game ball flows down through the passage wall of the first flow path. Then, when the guide section is in a state of guiding the game ball to the storage section, the distal end portion of the guide section is configured to be in surface contact with the passage wall. That is, since the tip portion of the guide portion makes surface contact with the passage wall, the game ball collides with a portion other than the upper surface portion of the tip portion. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the guide portion from being damaged by making it difficult for the game ball flowing into the first flow path to collide with the upper surface portion of the tip portion of the guide portion.

In any of the gaming machines F5 to F7,
The first ball entry means,
A predetermined predetermined first ball entry means (for example, left special figure prize port 77a);
A plurality of specific first ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means (for example, right special figure winning opening 78a);
The first flow path,
Distributing means (for example, a distributing device 76) for alternately distributing the game balls flowing down the first flow path to the predetermined first entering means or the specific first entering means;
The second ball entry means,
A gaming machine F8, wherein the gaming machine F8 is arranged in an area between the predetermined first ball entry means and the specific first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines F5 to F7. That is, a plurality of predetermined first ball entry means and a plurality of specific second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided as the first ball entry means, and the distribution provided in the first flow path is provided. By means, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are alternately distributed to predetermined first ball entry means or specific first ball entry means. Then, the second ball entry means is arranged in an area between the predetermined first ball entry means and the specific second ball entry means. This makes it difficult for the game ball flowing down the first flow path to recognize whether the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Even when the number-of-effects information is displayed on the basis of the number-of-effects information, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the number-of-effects information was displayed by entering the first ball entry means. As a result, even if the determination effect is performed based on the number-of-effects information while displaying the number-of-effects information based on the entry into the second ball-in means, whether the actual determination effect is performed a plurality of times is determined. It is possible to create such a sense of reality. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a surprising effect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F8,
The holding means,
A gaming machine F9, which is arranged on the upstream side of the distribution means in the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine F9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F8. That is, the holding means is arranged upstream of the distribution means in the game area. Thereby, it is possible to reserve the game balls that can enter the predetermined first ball entry means or the specific first ball entry means by the retaining means before being distributed by the distribution means. Therefore, when a game ball can enter either the first ball entry means or the specific first ball entry means, in any case, the game ball can be held by the holding means first. Therefore, in the case where an effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entering of the game balls held in the holding means, the state in which the game balls are held in the holding means can be maintained. As a result, the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game balls held in the holding means can enhance the variation of the effect, and the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means can be improved. It is possible to achieve the effect.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4,
A second flow path (for example, an out port 66) through which a game ball having entered the first ball entry means flows down,
The holding means,
A gaming machine F10 provided in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4. That is, the game ball having entered the first ball entry means flows down through the second flow path, and the holding means is provided in the second flow path. When a game ball that can enter the first ball entry means is reserved, the player feels a sense of loss due to failure to obtain lottery information that may cause specific identification information to appear. There is a risk of getting upset. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F10, a game ball that has entered the first ball entry means and is not used for a subsequent game can be held by the holding means. Therefore, instead of a game ball that can enter the first ball entry means or the like and is used for a game, a game ball not used for the game is entered into the second ball entry means, and the effect and the holding means in the dynamic display are used. With the effect using the suspended game balls, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect, and to enhance the interest of the game using the game balls retained in the retaining means without arousing the player. There is an effect that.

<Group G: Performing effects across multiple variable effects, changing the effect time according to winning timing>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that may cause a big hit appears as a part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. While performing a pseudo effect as if it were performed (so-called “pseudo-repeated” effect), there is an effect that performs another effect whether or not a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Document 1 2015-134027)).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and it is not possible to create unexpectedness in the effect content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Reference selection means for selecting a reference time for dynamic display of identification information (for example, a fluctuation effect of the third symbol) performed on the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. (For example, a variation type counter CS1);
Dynamic display execution means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means,
In the gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means,
A specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing a specific effect (for example, "Pseudo-sequence 2" of "Slump effect") performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays; ,
During the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means, when new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means, timing judging means for judging the acquisition timing of the lottery information (for example, a fluctuation setting process (S1213) S1419) and
A special effect setting means (for example, a special effect setting means for setting an effect time of a predetermined special effect performed after the specific effect (for example, “Gase pseudo 3” or “developability effect”) based on the determination result of the timing determining device. , A variation setting process (S1213) (S1240 to S1422).

  According to the gaming machine G0, the obtaining unit obtains the lottery information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining unit makes a determination based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining unit. Then, based on the determination result by the determining means, the reference time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means is selected by the reference selecting means, and the dynamic display is performed based on the reference time selected by the reference selecting means. The execution means executes dynamic display on the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, a specific effect performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays is executed by the specific effect execution unit, and during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution unit, new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition unit. Is acquired, the acquisition timing of the lottery information is determined by the timing determination means. Then, based on the determination result of the timing determining means, the special effect setting means sets the effect time of a predetermined special effect performed after the specific effect. Thereby, by providing a variation in the production time of the subsequent special production according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific production performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays, the production There is an effect that the variation of the game can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G0,
The specific effect execution means,
An adding time selecting means (for example, S1406 of a fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined adding time (for example, an extension time) when the specific effect is executed;
During a total time of the addition time selected by the addition time selection means and the reference time selected by the reference time selection means, a total time execution means for executing the specific effect (for example, a slump effect timer 223g) ) And
The timing determining means includes:
The gaming machine G1, wherein it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the specific effect based on the addition time selected by the addition time selection means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G0. That is, when the specific effect is executed by the addition time selecting means provided in the specific effect execution means, a predetermined addition time is selected. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time executing means similarly provided in the specific effect executing means during the total time of the addition time selected by the adding time selecting means and the reference time selected by the reference time selecting means. Is done. Here, the timing determination means determines whether or not it is the timing for executing the specific effect based on the addition time selected by the addition time selection means. That is, when the specific effect being executed based on the reference time and the addition time is in the process of being executed based on the addition time, the subsequent special effects are performed depending on whether or not the lottery information is acquired. The production time of the production is set. Therefore, it is possible to set the effect time of the special effect in consideration of the additional time, so that even if the specific effect based on the additional time is being performed, matching of the effect contents of the specific effect and the special effect is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine G1,
The specific effect execution means,
Elapsed time counting means for counting the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the addition time (for example, S1421 of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)),
The special effect setting means,
When it is determined by the timing determining means that the specific effect based on the addition time is being executed, the reference time based on the lottery information and the specific effect counted by the elapsed time counting means are determined. A gaming machine G2 comprising: an elapsed time setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of a change setting process (S1213)) for setting the special effect based on the elapsed time.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the addition time is counted by the elapsed time counting means provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, when the elapsed time setting means provided in the special effect setting means determines that the specific effect based on the added time is being executed by the timing determining means, the reference time and the elapsed time based on the preceding lottery information are determined. A special effect is set based on the elapsed time of the specific effect counted by the time counting means. That is, the effect time of the special effect changes based on the elapsed time of the specific effect. Thereby, by providing a variation in the production time of the subsequent special production according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific production performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays, the production There is an effect that the variation of the game can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The special effect setting means,
The timing discriminating unit subtracts the acquired addition time when it is determined that the timing of acquiring the new lottery information by the acquiring unit is not executing the specific effect based on the addition time. Above, the addition and subtraction setting means for setting the special effect based on the reference time based on the preceding lottery information and the reference time based on the subsequent lottery information (for example, S1420 of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) ), The gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, the addition / subtraction setting means provided in the special effect setting means determines that the timing at which the new lottery information is obtained by the obtaining means is not in execution of the specific effect based on the addition time by the timing determining means. In this case, the special effect is set based on the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the reference time based on the subsequent lottery information after subtracting the acquired addition time. In other words, if the specific effect based on the additional time is not executed, there will be no discrepancy between the effect contents and the effect time even if the additional time is subtracted for the subsequent special effects, and the effect time management will be easier. Become. In this way, while achieving the consistency in the production and facilitating the management of the production setting, according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific production performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays. By providing a variation in the production time of the subsequent special production, there is an effect that the variation of the production can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3,
The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, an effect of determining whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, an effect element of “low-speed fluctuation”, an effect of “pseudo-sequence”, an effect of “pseudo-sequence”, or an effect element of “normal reach”) And the like, when all symbols are stopped).
The specific effect execution means and the special effect setting means,
The gaming machine G4, wherein the determination effect is executed in the specific effect and the special effect.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G3. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the specific effect execution means and the special effect setting means execute the determination effect in the specific effect and the special effect. Thereby, the determination effect is also performed in the specific effect and the special effect, so that there is an effect that the variation of the effect is abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4,
Execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means,
The specific effect execution means,
When the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining unit, when the execution determination unit determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the reference time selected by the reference selection unit and the addition time The gaming machine G5, wherein the specific effect is executed until a total time obtained by adding the addition time selected by the selection unit has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the specific effect execution means obtains the lottery information by the obtaining means, when the execution determining means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the reference time selected by the reference selecting means is added. The specific effect is executed until the total time obtained by adding the addition time selected by the time selecting means elapses. Thereby, even after the reference time of the selected dynamic display has elapsed, it is possible to execute the specific effect until the addition time has elapsed, and by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, the effect can be performed on the display means. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce situations in which the game is not performed and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5,
The specific effect execution means,
When the determination means determines that the specific identification information does not appear, the addition time selection means selects the addition time, and a loss time execution means (for example, a specific performance based on the addition time) A gaming machine G6 comprising: a fluctuation setting process (S1405 in S1213).

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G5. That is, when the loss-time execution means provided in the specific effect execution means determines that the specific identification information does not appear by the determination means, the addition time selection means selects the addition time, and based on the addition time, A specific effect is executed. Thereby, even if the game value is not given due to the specific identification information not appearing in the dynamic display, the specific effect is performed on the display means longer than the acquired reference time, and the dynamic effect is performed on the display means. By reducing the number of situations in which the game is not performed, the player can be prevented from getting up.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6,
The addition time selection means,
A gaming machine G7 comprising: an addition non-acquisition unit (for example, S1405: Yes in the variation setting process (S1213)) that does not acquire the addition time when the specific identification information appears. .

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G6. That is, the addition time is not acquired when the specific identification information appears by the addition non-acquisition means provided in the addition time selection means. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, a transition is made to a special game state (for example, a jackpot) in which a predetermined game value is provided immediately after the end of the dynamic display, and a notification according to the special game state is issued. It must be made. Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the additional time is acquired, and if the specific effect based on the additional time is executed, the specific effect is discontinued along with the start of the special game state. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the contents of the effect. Therefore, according to the gaming machine G7, in the case of the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the addition time is not obtained. With this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the end timing of the acquired dynamic time with the start timing of the special game state based on the specific identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a feeling.

In the gaming machine G7,
The selecting means,
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection unit (eg, a pre-stage selection unit for selecting whether to display pre-stage identification information (for example, “reach display”) which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information (for example, , Stop pattern selection counter C3),
The addition non-acquiring means,
The gaming machine G8, wherein the additional time is not obtained when the preceding stage identification information appears in the dynamic display by the preceding stage selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G7. That is, the pre-stage selection unit provided in the selection unit determines whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information in the dynamic display. Then, when the previous stage identification information appears in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection unit, the addition time is not acquired by the addition non-acquisition unit. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, it is general that a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears is performed. Execution time is selected. In such a case, the lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition unit during the dynamic time. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the specific effect performed for a longer time than the dynamic time acquired until such a case. Therefore, in the gaming machine G8, when the execution time of the dynamic display for causing the preceding stage identification information to appear is selected, the addition time is not acquired. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect time on the display means is not unnecessarily lengthened, and the player can be prevented from becoming active in the game.

<Group H: Configuration of Hold Device>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  Further, as this kind of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine provided with a holding means for holding a ball fired in a game area. In this pachinko machine, the ball is held in the holding means, and based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, an operation of pressing the release button by the player), the ball held in the holding means is released, and the ball is moved downstream. It is configured to enter the provided entrance and to provide a predetermined game value to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235)).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the aim is to directly add a game value to award the game ball held in the holding means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and to award a prize hole, and to enhance the interest in the game. For this reason, many game balls must be held, and as a result, the installation area of the holding means in the game area is increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the board of the game area is reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in design from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the H group has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is possible to improve the degree of design freedom of the gaming machine while improving the interest of the game using the balls held in the holding means. It is intended to provide a gaming machine.

Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
First ball entry means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
Acquiring means (for example, a special drawing winning opening switch) for acquiring lottery information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) due to the entry of a game ball into the first entering means;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Selection means (for example, fluctuation) for selecting dynamic display of identification information (for example, fluctuation effect of the third symbol) performed on the display means (for example, third symbol display device 81) based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means on the display means,
In the gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means,
A second ball entry means (for example, a dummy winning opening 75) which is different from the first ball entry means and which gives a predetermined game value when a game ball fired by the launch means enters the ball;
Holding means (for example, a holding device 73) capable of holding game balls flowing down a first flow path provided above the game area of the second ball entry means,
With
The holding means,
A storage unit capable of storing one game ball (for example, a reserved ball holding unit 73b);
A guide unit that is connected to the storage unit and guides game balls flowing down the first flow path to the storage unit side in a guide state in which game balls are not stored in the storage unit (for example, a holding device opening and closing device). Plate 73a);
Changing means (for example, a rotating shaft portion 73c) for changing the guide portion from the guide state to a non-guide state in which the game ball is not guided to the storage portion when a game ball is stored in the storage portion;
When a game ball is stored in the storage section, a movable means (for example, a holding section lock section 73e1) capable of changing between a storage state for storing the game ball in the storage section and a release state for releasing the storage state. When,
Driving means for driving the movable means between the storage state and the release state (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f);
Releasing means (for example, a holding device drive flag 203f) for changing the movable means from the storage state to the release state by the driving means when a predetermined first condition is satisfied;
A second flow path (for example, a board return port 74) for causing the game balls released from the stored state by the release means to flow down to the second ball entry means side;
When a game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means, a predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect relating to the dynamic display (for example, a dummy symbol display which is a dummy symbol display). Display),
When the movable means is changed from the release state to the storage state, re-guide means (for example, an opening and closing plate pushing portion 73e2) for changing the guide means to the guide state is provided. Gaming machine H0.

  According to the gaming machine H0, a game ball is fired toward the game area by the shooting means, and the game ball fired by the shooting means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means. Then, lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry unit, and the determination unit makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. Also, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Performed in the means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means is configured to be given a predetermined game value when a game ball fired by the firing means enters, and the second ball entry means is provided. A game ball flowing down the first flow path provided above the game area is held by the holding means. In addition, the storage section provided in the holding means is configured to be able to store one game ball, is connected to the storage section, in the case of a guide state where no game balls are stored in the storage section, by the guide section The game ball flowing down the first flow path is guided to the storage section side. When the game balls are stored in the storage unit, the movable unit is configured to be able to change between a storage state in which the game balls are stored in the storage unit and a release state in which the storage state is released from the storage state. Further, the movable means is driven by the driving means between the storage state and the release state, and when the predetermined first condition is satisfied, the release means changes the movable means from the storage state to the release state by the driving means, The game ball whose storage state has been released by the release means flows down to the second ball entry means side through the second flow path. Then, when a game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means, a predetermined effect relating to dynamic display is executed by the predetermined effect execution means. Further, when the movable means is changed from the release state to the storage state by the re-guide means, the guide means is changed to the guide state. That is, when one game ball stored in the holding means enters the second ball entry means, a predetermined game value is provided, and a predetermined effect is executed in the dynamic display. After releasing the game balls stored in the storage device, when the game balls are again stored, the game balls can be guided to the storage unit. With this, the effect using the game balls stored in the holding means can be efficiently used, thereby enriching the variation of the effect, and enhancing the interest of the game using the game balls stored in the holding means. There is an effect that. In addition, since it is possible to impart interest to the player without using a configuration in which a large number of game balls are stored in the holding means and a large amount of game value is provided, the holding means can be installed while improving the interest by the holding means. There is an effect that the area can be reduced and the degree of freedom of board design in the game area can be increased.

<Group I: Main hold display and decoration hold display>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball-in means while a dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, the execution of the suspended unexecuted dynamic display is started.

  In this dynamic display, as a part of the interest of the game, various effects are executed when a special result other than the specific display result that can generate a big hit appears (for example, Patent Document 1 2015-134027)).

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Group I has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

Acquiring means (for example, the left special figure prize port 77a or the right special figure prize port 78a) for obtaining lottery information (for example, the jackpot random number counter C1) when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307));
Based on the result of the determination by the determination unit, a dynamic display of the identification information (for example, a fluctuation effect of the third symbol) performed on the first display unit (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. Dynamic display executing means (for example, an audio lamp control device 113).
In the case where specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player,
A storage unit (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203c) that stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
A second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying basic effect number information (for example, main suspension display) corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
A decoration that displays (or supplements; the same applies hereinafter) the basic production number information on the second display means. Display means (for example, a hold symbol that is a dummy hold display),
The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, it is determined whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, “losing display” or a gaess chance pattern) appears. (For example, at the time of stopping all the symbols such as the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", the effect of "pseudo-run", the effect of "pseudo-sequence" or the effect of "normal reach"),
A game comprising: an effect executing means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h and a hold information storage area 223i) for executing the determination effect corresponding to the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information. Machine I0.

  According to the gaming machine I0, the obtaining means obtains the lottery information when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the determining means makes a determination based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining means. Then, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information on the first display means based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the storage means stores lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the basic effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means. Is displayed. Then, the decoration effect number information for decorating the basic effect number information is displayed on the second display means by the decoration display means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display or whether non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. A judgment effect is executed. In addition, the determination effect corresponding to the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information is executed by the effect executing means provided in the dynamic display executing means. Thereby, the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information are displayed or erased in association with the determination effect in which the specific identification information or the non-specific identification information appears, and the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information correspond. By executing the determination effect, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I0,
The effect executing means,
Additional effect selection means (for example, fluctuation setting) for selecting an additional effect to be additionally executed (for example, “Pseudo-sequence 2” in “Slump effect”) when the decorative effect number information is displayed by the decoration display means. Processing (S1213) (S1413),
The decoration display means,
Before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means, before execution of the additional effect selection information display means (for example, before the execution of the "gasse pseudo-ren 2", the ball to the dummy winning opening 75) The game machine I1 is provided with a dummy symbol and a dummy symbol is displayed as a dummy symbol.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I0. That is, the additional effect selection means provided in the effect execution means selects an additional effect to be additionally executed when the decorative effect number information is displayed by the decoration display means. Then, before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selecting unit, the decorative effect number information is displayed by the pre-execution display unit provided in the decorative display unit. With this, it is possible to display the decorative effect number information before the additional effect to be additionally performed is executed. For example, even if neither the decorative effect number information nor the basic effect number information is displayed, the additional effect information is displayed. A situation in which an effect is executed can be prevented beforehand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game while providing an effect with consistency.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a left special figure winning opening 77a or a right special figure winning opening 78a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter,
The acquisition means,
Acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of a game ball into the first entry means,
The pseudo display means,
A gaming machine I2 which displays the number-of-decoration effect number information when a game ball enters a second ball entry unit different from the first ball entry unit.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I0 or I1. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and the ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-entering means. Then, the lottery information is obtained by the acquisition means due to the entry into the first entry means. Here, the decoration display means displays the decoration effect number information due to the entry of the game ball into the second entry means different from the first entry means. Thereby, it is possible to display the decorative effect number information related to the determination effect performed by the first display means due to the entry of the game ball to the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, It is possible to give the player an illusion as if the number-of-effects information was displayed by having entered the first ball entry means. As a result, while displaying the decorative effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means, even if the effect is performed based on the decorative effect number information, the player is provided with an effect without discomfort, There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I2,
The second ball entry means,
A gaming machine I3 arranged near the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2. That is, the second ball entry means is arranged near the first ball entry means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game ball that has flowed in the vicinity of the first ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Even when the decorative effect number information is displayed based on the incoming ball, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the effect number information was displayed by entering the first ball entry means. As a result, even if a dummy effect is performed based on the decorative effect number information while displaying the decorative effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means, an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity. It is possible to provide the game and improve the interest of the game.

  The “near the first ball entry means” is, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball entry means, or an area between the first ball entry means when there are a plurality of first ball entry means. Alternatively, a position where both the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be visually recognized at the same time is exemplified.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3,
Holding means (for example, a holding device 73) capable of changing between a holding state for holding the game balls fired by the shooting means and a release state for releasing the game balls held based on satisfaction of a predetermined release condition; With
The second ball entry means,
A gaming machine I4, wherein a gaming ball released from the holding means is arranged at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3. That is, the holding means is configured to be changeable between a holding state for holding the game balls fired by the firing means and a release state for releasing the game balls held based on the satisfaction of a predetermined release condition. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from the ball can enter. Thus, the game balls held by the holding unit can be made to enter the second ball entry unit based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, and the decorative effect number information can be displayed. As a result, the suspended game balls can be immediately entered into the second ball entry means, and the decoration effect number information is displayed while displaying the decoration effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. Even if the effect is performed based on the game, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that is not uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I4,
The effect executing means,
Counting means for counting whether or not it is time to display the decorative effect number information corresponding to the additional effect when the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting means (for example, a holding device drive timer 203g) ,
The holding means,
A release unit (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) that releases the game ball held by the holding unit when the timing of displaying the decorative effect number information is reached according to the counting result by the counting unit. A gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4. That is, when an additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting device, the counting device provided in the effect executing device counts whether or not it is time to display the decorative effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. . Then, when the timing of displaying the decorative effect number information by the counting result of the counting means is reached by the releasing means provided in the holding means, the game balls held by the holding means are released. This makes it possible to associate the timing at which the second ball entry means enters the game ball with the timing at which the decorative effect number information corresponding to the additional effect is displayed. As a result, while displaying the decorative effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means, even if the effect is performed based on the decorative effect number information, the player is provided with an effect without discomfort, This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I5,
The effect executing means,
Holding determining means (for example, a holding ball detecting switch 73g) for determining whether or not a game ball is held in the holding means;
By the counting result by the counting means, when it is time to display the decorative effect number information, when it is determined by the holding determination means that the game ball is not held in the holding means, the additional effect, A gaming machine I6 comprising: an effect changing unit (for example, an effect conversion flag 223k) that changes the basic effect number information or the decorative effect number information to a non-extinguishing effect that does not digest.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I5. That is, whether or not the game ball is held in the holding means is determined by the holding determination means provided in the effect executing means. When the timing of displaying the decorative effect number information is reached by the counting result of the counting means by the effect changing means also provided in the effect executing means, the game ball is not held in the holding means by the holding determination means. Is determined, the additional effect is changed to a non-digestive effect that does not digest the basic effect number information or the decorative effect number information. Thereby, when the game ball to be entered into the second ball entry means is not held in the holding means, the decorative effect number information is not displayed, the effect number executed by the first display means, Consistency with the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information displayed by the ball entry means can be maintained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player, and to prevent the player from getting excited about the game.

In the gaming machine I6,
A storage determination unit (for example, a hold display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether or not the lottery information stored in the storage unit includes the dynamic display for displaying the specific identification information;
Display change means (for example, a hold change counter 223d) for changing a display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information based on the judgment result by the storage judgment means,
The effect change means,
When the additional effect is changed to the non-digestion effect, a change-time changing unit (for example, a reservation rank-up command) that changes the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information by the display changing unit. , A gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I6. That is, it is determined by the storage determining means whether or not the lottery information stored in the storing means includes a dynamic display that causes the specific identification information to appear, and the display changing means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display. Thus, the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information is changed. Here, when the additional effect is changed to the non-extinguishing effect by the change-time changing means provided in the effect changing means, the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information is changed by the display changing means. . Thereby, even when the additional effect is changed to the non-extinguishing effect due to the game ball not being held in the holding means, the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information is changed to change the display mode of the player information. By amplifying the sense of expectation for the specific identification information, there is an effect that a variety of effects can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  Also, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  Also, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E9, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  Also, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  Also, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited by any one may be applied.

  In addition, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and I0 to I7 with respect to the configuration of the gaming machine H0. May be applied.

  In addition, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 with respect to the configuration of the gaming machines I0 to I7. May be applied.

  In these cases, further effects due to the application of each configuration can be obtained.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, and I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine Z1 characterized by the following. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, and I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by the above-mentioned. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine And a gaming machine Z3. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

  It should be noted that “entering the ball in the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “predetermined starting conditions” in the claims, and “counters C1 to C3” described in the above embodiment. , CS1 ”corresponds to the“ lottery information ”acquired by the“ acquiring means ”in the claims, and the“ third symbol ”in the above embodiment is the“ identification information ”in the claims. Corresponding to, "fluctuating effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and "big hit display" described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. The "big hit" described in the embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
66 Out port (part of the second channel)
72 Sorting ball entrance (part of the first channel)
73 Holding device (part of holding means)
73a Retaining device opening / closing plate (part of guide unit)
73b Retaining ball holding part (part of storage part)
73c Rotating shaft (part of changing means)
73e1 Holding part lock part (part of movable means)
73e2 Opening / closing plate pushing part (part of re-guide means)
73f Retaining device solenoid (part of release means, part of drive means)
73g Retention ball detection switch (part of the suspension discrimination means)
74 Board return port (part of the second channel)
75 Dummy winning opening (part of the second ball entry means, part of the second increase means)
76 Sorting device (part of sorting means)
77a Left special figure winning opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increase means, part of predetermined first ball entry means)
78a Right special map winning opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increase means, part of specific first ball entry means)
81 third symbol display device (part of display means, part of first display means)
110 Main control device (part of judgment means, part of main control means)
112a Ball launching unit (part of launching means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of dynamic display execution means, part of sub-control means)
203c Reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203f Reservation device drive flag (part of release means)
223d Pending change counter (part of storage determination means)
203e Main slump counter (part of execution determination means)
203g Reservation device drive timer (part of counting means)
223c Dummy reserved ball counter (part of related manifestation means)
223d Pending change counter (part of display change means)
223f Sub-slump flag (part of execution determination means)
223g Slump production timer (part of total time execution means)
223h Slump effect storage area (part of specific effect execution means, part of second half selection means, part of residual selection means, part of total effect number execution means, part of effect execution means)
223i Reservation information storage area (part of total effect number execution means, part of effect execution means)
223k effect conversion flag (part of effect change means)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of lottery information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of previous stage selection means)
CS1 fluctuation type counter (part of selection means, part of time selection means, part of reference selection means)
Db cockpit display area (part of second display means, part of pseudo display means, part of decoration display means)
Dm main display area (part of the first display means)
S101 External output processing (part of notification means)
S401 (part of determination means)
S1117 Variation effect processing (part of dynamic display execution means)
S1208 Hold display setting processing (part of storage determination means)
S1213 (part of pattern selection means)
S1401 (part of time acquisition means)
S1405 (part of the losing execution means)
S1406 (part of time selection means, part of extension time selection means, part of addition time selection means)
S1409 (part of residual summation means)
S1411 (part of elapsed time setting means)
S1413 (part of total setting means, part of additional effect selection means, part of elapsed time setting means)
S1419 (part of timing determination means)
S1420 (part of special effect setting means, part of addition / subtraction setting means)
S1421 (part of special effect setting means, part of elapsed time counting means)
S1422 (part of special effect setting means)
S1708 (part of production element selection means)
Z1 to Z3 Left symbol row, middle symbol row, right symbol row (part of individual area changing means)

Claims (3)

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means for performing a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means,
Selecting means for selecting an execution time of dynamic display of identification information performed by the display means based on a result of the determination by the determining means;
Dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the execution time selected by the selecting means,
In the case where specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player,
Execution determination means capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display execution means,
In the case where the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining unit, when the execution determining unit determines that the dynamic display is not being performed, the display unit may be longer than the execution time selected by the selecting unit. A gaming machine, comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect instead of the dynamic display. The specific effect execution means,
When performing the specific effect, extension time selection means for selecting a predetermined extension time,
Total time execution means for executing the specific effect during a total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein The dynamic display execution means,
In the dynamic display, whether the specific identification information appears, a determination effect execution means for performing a determination effect of whether non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears,
The specific effect execution means,
The method according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect includes a plurality of execution units that execute the number of the determination effects greater than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. Gaming machine.

Images